Home

L-PRO User Manual 4.0 Rev 4.book

1. E Figure H 1 Rear Panel 3U Chassis L PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix H 1 D02333R05 00 Appendix H Rear Panel Drawings GEE vet D dt itt OEE e E JS 9t SZE E ZE ZZE WE Qc 6E oe ue 9E SIE ple cle zie We OE 60 a JE x SE WE ZOE WE 00 e el eee rele eee eee te eee eee eel eee tro S a ro S a ro ii ro or ro S ero SEISEGSECNEE IK ege F 3 ve L wepoy pai EICH CISH ptn s LA Ji LAM 8 LAM 8 LAM pb LAM E LAM
2. E Bile gdt window Heb lal x BEE JES E LJ identification Point Change Event Class Deadband aj C Relay Group Index Name Deadband Units C Analog Inputs E External inp 16 ZS C External Inputs 42 External Input 17 IH x C Output Contacts 43 External Input 18 Bu Mer g Virtual inputs 44 External Input 19 Xx C Setting Groups E E System Parameters s Summe DX BIG CADA Communication Analog Inputs CI DNP Configuration ae 0 Line VaMeontude DI O X O 2 of nominal 03 C Point Map aa 1 line va ange O X L1 05 degrees jor Class Data 300390 2 Line Vo Magntude O O X O 2 of nominal 01 SCADA Settings Summary 30 32 3 Line Vb Ande 1 CO X L1 05 degrees 01 lecord Length 3032 4 Line Ve Magnitude ol M ol of nominal 01 etting Group 1 Setting Group 1 30 32 5 Line Ve Ange DI L X L1 05 degrees oa C Line Parameters 3 32 6 Lnela Magntude DI O X 0O 2 of nominal 1 C Scheme Selector 3032 7 LnelaAnge 1 1 X L1 os degrees oa Ci Breaker Status 30 32 8 Line b Magntude O X 10 2 Seofnomna 1 C Directional Element 3032 8 Deb gel L1 L1 X L os degrees o1 E Protection Functions aa 10 Une lc Magntude O OXOR of nominal 1 C Z Circle Trigger aal mn Lneic Ange 1 1 X L os degrees 101 E ProLogic aa 12 12a Magntude C O 2 of nominal 1 5 C Group Logic 3032 13 Ta Angle EISES 5 degrees 01 C Out
3. Pickup Delay 2 00 0 20 to 99 99 50LS Low Set Overcurrent 50LS Main Input 1 Enabled Pickup 0 50 0 10 to 50 00 Pickup Delay 0 00 0 00 to 10 00 50LS Auxiliary Input 2 Enabled Pickup 0 50 0 10 to 50 00 Pickup Delay 0 00 0 00 to 10 00 50LS Input 3 Enabled Pickup 0 50 0 10 to 50 00 Pickup Delay 0 00 0 00 to 10 00 50LS Input 4 Enabled Pickup 0 50 0 10 to 50 00 Pickup Delay 0 00 0 00 to 10 00 50BF Breaker Failure 50BF Main Enabled Pickup Delay 1 0 50 0 01 to 99 99 Pickup Delay 2 1 50 0 01 to 99 99 50BF Auxiliary Enabled Pickup Delay 1 0 50 0 01 to 99 99 Pickup Delay 2 1 50 0 01 to 99 99 50 51 67 Phase Overcurrent 50 Enabled Directional Control forward Pickup 10 00 0 50 to 50 00 Pickup Delay 1 00 0 01 to 99 99 51 Enabled Directional Control forward Pickup 10 00 0 50 to 50 00 Curve Type IEC very inverse TMS 0 50 0 01 to 10 00 A 13 5 B 0 0 p 1 0 TR 47 30 z 50N 51N 67 Neutral Overcurrent 50N Enabled Directional Control forward Pickup 10 00 0 50 to 50 00 L PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix B 11 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Appendix B 12 L PRO Settings Summary Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 Pickup Delay 1 00 A 0 01 to 99 99 51N Enabled Directional Control forward Pickup 10 00 A 0 50 to 50 00 Curve Type IEC very inverse TMS 0 50 0 01 to 10 00 A 13 5 b B
4. NOTES 3 Virtual Inputs default Binary Output points 94 123 can be used to control re lay output contacts See L PRO Offliner Setting Group X Output Matrix screen for configuration options 4 Binary Output data points are user selectable the data points available in the device for any given Binary Output point selection can be obtained through the L PRO Offliner software see SCADA Setting Summary Default Class Supported Control Operations Assigned to Events 1 2 3 or none I amp o m z 2 Name for Name for Name o State when State when Change Command Description z E a 2 value is 0 value is 1 2 22 E E Ri zx HIE E 909 0666 6 A S 3 82288 s28 5 8 Es aj 8 amp amp 3 83 amp E o 6 6 0 Output contact 1 Open Closed None None Output contact 2 Open Closed None None 2 Output contact 3 Open Closed None None 3 Output contact 4 Open Closed None None 4 Output contact 5 Open Closed None None 5 Output contact 6 Open Closed None None 6 Output contact 7 Open Closed None None 7 Output contact 8 Open Closed None None 8 Output contact 9 Open Closed None None 9 Output contact 10 Open Closed None None 10 Output contact 11 Open Closed None None 11 Output contact 12 Open Closed None None 12 Output contact 13 Open Closed None None 13 Output contact 14 Open Closed None None 14 21P1 Trip nactive Active None None 15 21P2 Tri
5. For I gt pickup For I lt pickup T I2 TMS B 7 T 2 TMS DR Puy B LTA E 46 50 46 51N 67 Negative Sequence Overcurrent 46 50 Enable disable Directional Forward non directional Pickup 0 50 to 50 00 5 A 0 10 to 10 00 1 A Pickup Delay 0 00 to 99 99 seconds non directional 0 01 to 99 99 seconds directional 46 51 Enable disable Directional Forward reverse non directional Pickup 0 50 to 50 00 5 A 0 10 to 10 00 1 A Curve Type For details see for details see Table 4 1 IEC and IEEE Curves on page 4 29 TMS 0 01 to 10 00 A 0 0010 to 1000 0000 B 0 0000 to 10 0000 p 0 10 to 10 00 TR 0 10 to 100 00 L PRO User Manual 2100 4 31 4 Protection Functions and Specifications Adaptive Additional Delay for 50 O C Elements Directional Control Z Circle Trigger 4 32 The L PRO provides an adaptive additional time delay maximum 16 ms re sponse to the 50 O C elements to prevent operation during RFI testing with minimal pickup set points and operation near pickup This adaptive delay is applied to 50LS 1 50LS 2 50LS 3 50LS 4 50 50N 46 50 If the Pickup Delay setting Tp 20ms AND Pickup Level setting lt Inominal nominal current an extra 8 ms delay is added After this 8 ms timer expires if I lt threshold the second 8ms extra delay will be added in addition to the original Tp If I gt threshold after the first 8ms timer expires only
6. RHS Outer R4 20 0 ohm 17 0 to 100 0 Dead Line Pickup Dead Line Pickup Enabled 27 Vpos Pickup 68 0 V 0 0 to 69 0 50 Pickup 10 0 A 0 5 to 50 0 50N Pickup 10 0 A 0 1 to 50 0 Second Harmonic Restraint Enabled 12 11 Ratio 54 0 0 to 10 0 Weak Infeed Weak Infeed Enabled 27 V1 Pickup 64 3 V 0 0 to 69 0 59 VO Pickup 20 0 V 0 0 to 100 0 Zone2 Zone4 Reset Delay TWD1 0 10 s 0 02 to 0 20 Comm Cycle Reset Delay TWD2 0 05 s 0 02 to 0 20 Comm Reset Time Delay TWD3 0 15 s 0 02 to 1 00 25 27 59 Sync Check 25 Sync Check Enabled Maximum Voltage 70 0 V 60 0 to 138 0 Minimum Voltage 40 0 V 40 0 to 69 9 Angle Difference 20 0 deg 1 0 to 50 0 Pickup Delay 0 10 s 0 00 to 10 00 Dead Main Live Sync DMLS Enabled Live Main Dead Sync LMDS Enabled Dead Main Dead Sync DMDS Enabled 79 Recloser 79 Enabled Number of Shots 1 First Reclose T1 1 0 s 0 1 to 999 9 Second Reclose T2 5 0 s 1 0 to 999 9 Third Reclose T3 10 0 s 1 0 to 999 9 Fourth Reclose T4 20 0 s 1 0 to 999 9 Close Time Tp 0 2 E 0 1 to 1 0 Lockout Reset TD 25 0 s 0 1 to 999 9 nitiate Reset TDI 1 0 s 0 0 to 999 9 Sync Control Disabled Recloser Mode Main Only Block Reset TDB 0 5 s 0 0 to 999 9 Follower Time TF 50 s 0 0 to 24 9 Breaker Out of Service TC 50 0 s 0 0 to 999 9 L PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix B 9 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Appendix B 10 L PRO Settings Sum
7. Table 8 1 Special Characters Character ASCII Decimal Description 033 Exclamation mark 034 Quotation mark 035 Number sign 036 Dollar sign 037 Percent sign amp 038 Ampersand 039 Apostrophe 040 Left parenthesis 041 Right parenthesis 3 042 Asterisk 043 Plus sign 044 Comma 045 Hyphen minus 046 Full stop 047 Slash Solidus 058 Colon 059 Semicolon lt 060 Less than sign 061 Equal sign gt 062 Greater than sign 063 Question mark D02333R05 00 L PRO User Manual 2100 8 1 8 Cyber Security Access Timeout Access Level Blocking Authorization by Access Level Table 8 1 Special Characters 064 At sign 091 Left Square Bracket 093 Right Square Bracket A 094 Circumflex accent SS 095 Low line 124 Vertical bar 123 Left Curly Bracket 125 Right Curly Bracket ei 126 Tilde Special characters other than listed above may currently be used for passwords However only the listed characters are guaranteed to be supported in the future L PRO does not inforce password complexity rules However password com pliance to the following complexity rules can be verified when password is be ing updated Minimum password length 8 characters At least one upper case character Atleast one lower case character At least one numerical character At least one special cha
8. e Setting Group 4 Setting Group 4 E E C Setting Group 5 Setting Group 5 Station Name Station Name amp Setting Group 6 Setting Group 6 Station Number 1 oo 2C Setting Group 7 Setting Group 7 Setting Group 8 Setting Group 8 EU Location Line 0245 L PRO Offliher Settings v9 Z Setting Tree Setting Area Figure 5 1 Opening Screen Use the Offliner Settings software to create relay settings on a PC Offliner Set tings provides an easy way to view and manipulate settings Hardware The minimum hardware requirements are 1 GHz processor 2 GB RAM 20 GB available hard disk space USB port Serial communication port Operating System The following software must be installed and functional prior to installing the applications Microsoft Windows XP Professional Service Pack 3 or Microsoft Windows 7 Professional Service Pack 1 32 bit or 64 bit L PRO User Manual 2100 5 1 5 Offliner Settings Software Installing PC Software Insert the CD ROM in your drive The CD ROM should open automatically Ifthe CD ROM does not open automatically go to Windows Explorer and find the CD ROM usually on D drive Open the L PRO exe file to launch the CD ROM To install the software on your computer click the desired item on the screen The installation program launches automatically Installation may take a few minutes to start To view the L PRO User Manual you must ha
9. Open Closed None None 130 Output Contact 20 Open Closed None None 131 Output Contact 21 Open Closed None None 132 ProLogic 11 Inactive Active None None 133 ProLogic 12 Inactive Active None None D02333R05 00 L PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix F 21 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile 2 3 Analog Input Points G If configurable Pe See deed Number 30 Capabilities Current Value listmmeinods 2 3 1 Static Variation reported Variation 1 32 bit with flag when variation 0 Variation 2 16 bit with flag requested Variation 3 32 bit without flag I Variation 4 16 bit without flag Variation 5 single precision floating point with flag Variation 6 double precision floating point with flag Based on point Index add column to table below 2 3 2 Event Variation Variation 1 32 bit without time reported when variation kl Variation 2 16 bit without time 0 requested Variation 3 32 bit with time Variation 4 16 bit with time Variation 5 single precision floating point w o time Variation 6 double precision floating point w o time Variation 7 single precision floating point with time Variation 8 double precision floating point with time Based on point Index add column to table below 2 3 8 Event reporting mode Only most recent I All events 2 3 4 Analog Inputs In
10. nactive Active None None Trip 32 Comm Scheme nactive Active None None Send 33 60 Alarm nactive Active None None 34 21P2 Alarm nactive Active None None 35 21P3 Alarm nactive Active None None 36 21P4 Alarm nactive Active None None 37 21N2 Alarm nactive Active None None 38 21N3 Alarm nactive Active None None 39 21N4 Alarm nactive Active None None 40 51 Alarm nactive Active None None 41 51N Alarm nactive Active None None 42 46 51 Alarm nactive Active None None 43 Self Check Fail nactive Active None None 44 68 OutBlinder nactive Active None None Alarm 45 68 InBlinder Alarm nactive Active None None 46 27 Main Trip nactive Active None None 47 27 Aux Trip nactive Active None None 48 59 Main Trip nactive Active None None 49 59 Aux Trip nactive Active None None 50 50LS Main nactive Active None None 51 25 27 59 Sync nactive Active None None Check 52 ProLogic 1 nactive Active None None 53 ProLogic 2 nactive Active None None 54 P
11. GL Setting Group 5 Setting Group 5 E Setting Group 6 Setting Group 6 Setting Group 7 Setting Group 7 1 Setting Group 8 Setting Group 8 CPRO Offiiner Settings v8 Setting Gro Figure 5 17 Setting Groups Comments The relay has 8 setting groups SG You can change all relay setting parame ters except the physical connections such as input or output parameters in each setting group Use any one of the 16 available Group Logic Statements per set ting group to perform Setting Group changes The Group Logic statements are similar to the ProLogic statements with the following exceptions the sole function is to activate one of the 8 setting groups and the processing is ina slower half second cycle Group Logic inputs statements can be driven from ProLogic or any external input or virtual input or from previous Group Logic statements Each Group Logic statement includes 5 inputs with Boolean state ments one latch state and one pickup delay timer View the active setting group ASG from the Terminal Mode from the front panel or from a record stored by the relay the active setting group is stored with the record Line Parameters L PRO Offliner Settings Document 1 LJ Ble Edt window Help Die teje amp a S ff B Identificati Fi Eee Line Parameters Relay C Analog Inputs External Inputs tine C Output Contacts Ere Line to Line Voltage 23000 kV Primary C Settin
12. Group Logic 4 Disabled Setting Group to Activate none Pickup Delay 0 s 0 to 999 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt Group Logic 5 Group Logic 5 Group Logic 5 Disabled Setting Group to Activate none Pickup Delay 0 s 0 to 999 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 D02333R05 00 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges L PRO Settings Summary Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt Group Logic 6 Group Logic 6 Group Logic 6 Disabled Setting Group to Activate none Pickup Delay 0 s 0 to 999 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt Group Logic 7 Group Logic 7 Group Logic 7 Disabled Setting Group to Activate none Pickup Delay 0 s 0 to 999 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operato
13. update update Firmware update Service access is only available through the local front port connec tion Port 1 You can configure change access so that it is only allowed from Port 1 Individual passwords for all Access Levels are available to prevent or limit ac cess to the IED Passwords are mandatory Units arrive from the factory with default passwords installed Default passwords are as follows Access Level Login Name Default Password view view change change service service secadmin secadmin maintenance maintenance update update The following rules are applied when firmware is upgraded to a ver sion with secadmin login for the first time the current password is preserved if Access Level has a password assigned to it a default password is assigned to an Access Level if Access Level does not have a password assigned to associated with it Use the right and left arrow keys and the Enter key to move around in the ter minal mode screen The mouse does not work in VT100 terminal mode Items from the menu are selected by moving the highlight to the desired item and ac L PRO User Manual 2100 3 7 3 Using the IED Getting Started tivating it using the Enter key As a short cut use the first letter of the menu item to access 1t directly Key Function F2 Accept or Freeze or Execute F3 Quit or Exit
14. Modbus allows Modbus Communications to enter its Diagnostic Mode Follow directions on the screen Programming done using the Modicon Modbus Protocol Reference Guide PI MBUS 300 Rev G published by Modicon Inc dated November 1994 For details see Modbus RTU Communication Protocol in Appendix E 3 14 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 Access Passwords Password Update Syslog D02333R05 00 3 Using the IED Getting Started Submenus view Access change Access Password Provides the ability view Changes the access level to view Allows you read only access to relay information change Changes the access level to change Allows you to modify settings and delete records Restriction Allows you to limit change access to Port 1 only or cancel limitation Passwords Allows you to read and change passwords Requires service access level Submenu Password Update Password Update includes the submenus for all Access Levels password up dates View Password update for view login Change Password update for change login Service Password update for service login Secadmin Password update for secadmin login Maintenance Password update for maintenance login Update Password update for update login Submenu Syslog Configuration Syslog Configuration submenu allows configuration of Syslog server commu nication parameters as well as selection of
15. ABC 68 Inner Blinder Alarm 68 Outer Blinder Alarm Com Aided Z2 Wi Send Scheme types WI Z2 Z2 amp WI Z2 is Zone 2 POTT and WI is Weak Infeed L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 D02333R05 00 Appendix D Event Messages L PRO Event Messages 27 Main ABC Trip 27 Aux ABC Trip 59 Main ABC Trip 59 Aux ABC Trip 50LS Main ABC Trip 50LS Aux ABC Trip The possible phase information will be A Wd Mei AB BC CA ABC 252759 Sync Check Armed 50BF 1 Main ABC Trip The possible phase information will be A B Mei AB BC CA ABC 50BF 2 Main ABC Trip 50BF 1 Aux ABC Trip 50BF 2 Aux ABC Trip 81 1 Trip 81 2 Trip 81 3 Trip 81 4 Trip 79 Initiated High Recloser is initiated 79 Lead Lockout High Recloser shot count has expired and reclosing attempts are blocked 79 Follow Lockout High Follow breaker has failed to reclose 79 Main Reclose shot n Recloser Main circuit breaker close attempt where n equals the shot count 79 Follow Reclose shot n Recloser Aux circuit breaker close attempt where n equals the shot count 79 Block High Recloser is blocked by an external signal Self Check DC Ch n Alarm Continuous dc level on Ch n where n 1 to 18 Self Check DC Alarm Reset Continuous dc level condition has re
16. Distance Units L PRO User Manual 2100 km or miles D02333R05 00 SCADA Communication D02333R05 00 5 Offliner Settings Software Target Latching On This option specifies whether the front Target LED is latched or not Target Latching On means that the target LED remains on after a trip until it is reset through the front by human machine interface HMI If the Target Latching is set off the target light comes on during a relay trip and will reset All targets are stored in the relay log 250 event logs are stored Base MVA The base MVA is used for recording purposes CT Turns Ratio and PT Turns Ratio The CT and PT ratios are specified for the monitoring of analog inputs All CT and PT ratios are specified with a ratio relative to one The line protection uses the main current and the main voltage to operate When 2 sets of CTs main and auxiliary are used as line current input e g ring bus application you must enable ring bus configuration to configure the relay If enabled the cur rents from the 2 sets of CTs are added to the relay to form the line current For cases where voltage for line protection is obtained from bus PTs the bus PTs are connected to the main voltage inputs Auxiliary Voltage Input If a single phase source is used it must be connected to the corresponding phase designation on the relay input example If only a B phase bus PT is available it should be connected to the relay input
17. External Input 7 External Input 8 External Input 9 Virtual Input 1 Virtual Input 2 Virtual Input 3 Virtual Input 4 Virtual Input 5 Virtual Input amp Virtual Input 7 Virtual Input amp Virtual Input 9 Virtual Input 10 Virtual Input 11 Virtual Input 12 Virtual Input 13 Virtual Input 14 Virtual Input 15 Virtual Input 16 Virtual Input 17 Virtual Input 18 Virtual Input 19 Virtual Input 20 A t9 19 19 9 19 19 89 19 19 89 19 19 19 89 9 19 89 9 89 09 89 II 9 89 89 IS I I 9 Virtual Input 21 S Virtual Input 22 L PRO Offliner Settings v12 Use the space bar to toggle the selected Point List mapping on off Figure 5 13 Point Map F 4 The L PRO relay has configurable DNP point mapping On the Point Map screen any of the configurable points may be added or removed from the Point List by clicking or using the cursor keys and space bar on the keyboard on the associated checkbox A green X denotes that the item will be mapped to the Point List The list contains separate sections for Binary Inputs Binary Outputs and An alog Inputs The list is scrollable by using the scroll control on the right hand side
18. Settings Settings includes all the submenus pertaining to protection functions used to create a relay setting When these settings are made or changed you can load them into the relay allowing input of all settings information for the relay Settings submenus Identification L PRO System Parameters Line Parame ters common Setting Group 1 to 8 Recording Identification Relay Serial Number Software Version Relay ID Line Name Station Name Station Number and Location Comments Enter any appropriate comment Analog Input Names Name inputs Main VA VB VC Main IA IB IC Aux IA IB IC IA3 IB3 IC3 IA4 IB4 IC4 Aux VA External Inputs Name external inputs 1 to 9 Names Output Contact Name auxiliary relay output contacts 1 to 14 Names Setting Group Names Name setting groups 1 to 8 Virtual Input Names Name virtual inputs 1 to 30 ee 99 The following characters are not allowed in the above setting parameters SU TES SE POI ide Et od TS and eM Load From Offliner You can download the settings file into the relay using the terminal mode menu Onthe Window s desktop double click L PRO Offliner Settings icon The initial Offliner Settings screen appears Enter the required settings 3 Save the settings to a file on your PC 4 Startthe Terminal Mode of L PRO login as change or service then access the Settings menu and activate Load from Offliner function 5
19. For the next group of tests using the Acceptance Test file you must change to Setting Group 3 1 In Service mode access Utilities Maintenance Control Virtual Inputs 2 Use the Enter key to scroll Input Name to Switch to SG3 3 Cursor over to Action and select Pulse On 4 Press lt F2 gt to execute this command the Active Setting Group now is Group 3 LPRO Unit ID RO0001 Util Maintenance User flccess Level SERVICE 2002Aug21 14 55 prev menu Calibrate Outputs PTS Erase Control Virtual Inputs Input Name Action Switch to S63 KF3 gt Quit lt F2 gt Execute Figure 6 32 Control Virtual Inputs HyperTerminal 5 Confirm the Active Setting Group in Metering Logic Setting Group Note Active Setting Group cannot be changed in this screen 6 40 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 6 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide LPRO Unit ID R00001 Metering Logic User flccess Level SERVICE 2002Rug21 14 59 prev menu Protection Prologic REESRHNUST Virtual Inputs Group Logic functions Active Setting Group 3 Group Logic functions State Name State 1 Switch to S61 LOW 9 Group Logic 9 LOW 2 Switch to 62 LOW 18 Group Logic 10 LOW 3 Group Logic 3 LOW 11 Group Logic 11 LOW amp Group Logic 4 LOW 12 Group Logic 12 LOW D Group Logic 5 LOW 13 Group Logic 13 LOW 6 Group Logic 6 LOW 14 Group Logic 14 LOW 7 Group Logic 7 LOW 15 Group Logic 15 LOW 8 Group Logic 8 LOW 16 Grou
20. Host Name field value in the unit Syslog message see section 8 Cyber Security Modes of Syslog server operation are defined in the table below Mode Description Disabled Communication with Syslog server is disabled UDP UDP protocol is used for communication with Syslog server IP Address parameter defines Syslog server IP Address Port parameter defines Syslog server IP port for receiving Syslog messages Host Name parameter values are as follows L PRO User Manual 2100 3 15 3 Using the IED Getting Started Quit Metering Data Front Panel Metering TUI Metering 3 16 Host Name Description Unit IP Address Unit IP Address is used for Syslog message Host Name field Unit Serial Number Unit Serial Number is used for Syslog message Host Name field Unit ID Unit ID is used for Syslog message Host Name field Selecting this option ends serial port communication with the relay The quantities provided on the front panel display are the L L voltage line cur rents primary W VARS line to neutral quantities for the individual phases and frequency The TUI provides the following metering quantities Analog Analog Inputs displays the magnitude and phase relationship of all the analog inputs Line Quantities displays the primary line to line voltage line current MW MVARS and system frequency External Inputs Displays the status
21. 4 4 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 4 Protection Functions and Specifications 21N Ground The L PRO device 21N contains 4 zones of ground distance elements all 4 Distance zones of 21N can be set to either Mho or Quadrilateral type note that only one mund ert type can be used at a time The 21N can contain a mixture of Mho and quad shapes for example the 21N1 and 21N2 can be set to a Mho characteristic and the 21N3 and 21N4 could be set to a quadrilateral characteristic L PRO Quadrilateral Characteristics Figure 4 3 Ground Quadrilateral The quadrilateral shape is parallel to the positive sequence line angle setting The user defined Mho Characteristic Angle is not selectable when you have defined a quadrilateral characteristic for that particular zone All other setting are selectable and user definable Relay Method of The 21P and 21N mho elements use positive sequence voltage derived from a Memory Polarization memory voltage as the polarizing quantity Sufficient positive sequence volt age should be available during all fault events However during certain fault events especially three phase bolted faults near the line VT location the pos itive sequence voltage may be insufficient for correct operation To ensure ad equate positive sequence voltage exists for all fault conditions the L PRO uses aring filter implemented in software to provide memory voltage as the source for the positive sequence voltage
22. 9160304d 9 XIE 1ndino 91 91607 dnoig sinduj jeujejxa G XEN 1ndino 21607 dno di Lg 480S r sue 1ndino zi 36o15J XEN 1ndino 64 uueivgo 69 S709 ZZ u5ouAses zse eueuos es XEN 1ndino Se 91607 dnoig uuelv 09 L L igt LZ du 410 Lg 0S 9v Z vue 1ndino S 71 9oi6o10Jd Bu UID z ino 99 du1 NES NOS LS 0S LZ L XIEN dyno 719 L8 08 JaBBUL au Z Jjgos suomnoun J uono9joJd S108 snes Jeyeolg 19 G9v OS9v L Jojoejeg euieuog 19 NLG NOG 09 S1ejeureJeg eur 19 VS 0S A 8 dnog Bumes 19 L8 08 SS 628 eu w EN 5011u8 3 61 paajul ea SEN dia iri g dnoig Buges P aud ou s 65 22 dad eur peeq Deeg Ge ee eseiq _ Deeg E A 39 SOWEN peuo 1ndino 9 dnouo Bunjes GES s wey jndu jewa xy g dnoig Bumes nod NIZ suogoun4 uonoejoJd Seten idul Boreuw y dno Bum s NO ug diz S UBWULUOD g dnouc umes 440 ue Iz Aen z dnoig Bunes aweN ndul uoleoynusp dnoug Bumes BEI SE uoujui09 s1ejeujeJeg eur ee SE Fir Mic sjojouie eq WaISks OR onsouBeig snqpoy snqpow zabo js mes uoneonnuep DA gA NA STM abessay sme sonsouBeiq Jajsued L 91607 GL D Ge sBumes ONd 1 YOI val YVI snapo sonsouDeiq i S COU eal ev Seen Se Ol al Wi xny sennueno eur Ol al Vi ure Sindy sjndu Bojeuy Jo SA AA VA UIEN nun Jou02 O seide sindino DuipJoo2es BABINIOY FEIGIED ayeuques 1U9 3 21607 T pap eoueuejutrelN Jeuillio DuipJooes SjoE uo2 UJOJJ uonoujs
23. F4 Copy Group Esc Back to previous menu level The menu tree consists ofa series of sub menus for details see Figure 3 3 Ter minal Mode Menus for view change and service login on page 3 9 The Enter key allows you to toggle through a list of selections i e enabled dis abled The Enter key toggles forward through the list while the space bar moves backward through the list In this manner you do not have to scroll through the entire list to get back to a previous selection you can use the space bar For certain lists a pick box appears when there is a long list of selections to chose from for example ProLogic inputs You can scroll though these boxes with the arrow keys or the Enter key Use the F2 key to make a selection or F3 to leave 3 8 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 3 9 3 Using the IED Getting Started L PRO User Manual 2100 Figure 3 3 Terminal Mode Menus for view change and service login 0 94 syndy jenurA gg Xew 1ndino GL L synduy jeni A8 vg 1ndino
24. PLS 79 Lead lockout High 252759 Sync Check Armed R 79 Initiated High Bkr Status Reset PL2 External Trip Inpu EI2 Ext Trip Signal Aux Bkr a Closed EI 19 Aux Reclose shot 4 R Aux Breaker Close PL8 Main Bkr a Close EI Main 52a Status PL3 79 Main Rec loze shot A R Main Bkr Reclose 252759 Sync Check f rmed R Figure 6 46 Event Log Showing Reclose Sequence HyperTerminal 5 To perform this test again reset the Lockout as per 79 Reset Procedure above then repeat the 79 test procedure End of 79 test 6 52 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 7 Installation Physical Mounting Standard 3U Optional 4U The relay is 3 rack units or 5 25 inches high and approximately 12 25 inches deep The standard relay is designed for a 19 inch rack A complete mechani cal drawing is shown for details see Mechanical Drawings in Appendix G To install the relay you need the following 19 inch rack 4 10 screws The relay is 4 rack units or 7 0 inches high and approximately 12 25 inches deep The relay is designed for a 19 inch rack A complete mechanical drawing is shown for details see Mechanical Drawings in Appendix G To install the relay you need the following 19 inch rack e 4 10 screws AC and DC Wiring For details see AC Schematic Drawings in Appendix I and DC Schematic Drawings in Appendix J Communication Wiring EIA 232 R
25. Seg Gram eset oo SR Hosanna Saison EC Setting Group 8 Seti i SOBF Main 1 Trip B1 88 878 08 78 eee m m m wp m 50BF Mair oer Act Tre ENEE aCe eC Cea EN 50BF Aux 2 Trip SOLS Main SHEI DOE DOE Or INN T SOLS Aux m e ame oppooo eneo on APT L PRO Offliner Settings v6 Setting Group Figure 5 23 Output Matrix The output contact matrix determines which function initiates which output re lay All output relays have an individual user selectable stretch time except those outputs identified as communication initiation outputs They can have their time delay characteristics changed Functions also initiate recording as re quired For a particular function to operate correctly it must be enabled and must also have its logic output assigned to at least one output contact if it is involved in a tripping function Print the entire output matrix by right clicking on the output matrix then select ing the printer icon This printout is produced on 2 pages 5 22 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 Settings Summary D02333R05 00 L PRO Offliner Settings Document 1 UI Ele Edt window Help 5 Offliner Settings Software OC 3 Ba 2a E Settings Summary Output Matie Identification C System Parameters C Record Length Ei Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 C Line Parameters C Scheme Selector C Breaker Status H Protection Functions C Z Circle Trigger ProLog
26. service full access to all functions Port 1 access only secadmin access to security configuration maintenance access to the maintenance menu update to load a firmware update Port 1 access only H H Notes Serial and modem connections have a 60 minute inactivity timeout Usernames and passwords are case sensitive login 4 Iflogin is successful the Main Menu appear as follows for view change or service login LPRO Unit ID UnitID Main Menu User Access Level SECADMIN 2015Nov1 23 24 view change or service depends on how you log in for secadmin login Passwords Syslog Quit L PRO User Manual 2100 3 5 3 Using the IED Getting Started 5 Iflogin is unsuccessful the Status Message appear as follows Status Messagen Incorrect Password any key Unit allows 7 unsuccessful login attempts before locking out the Access Level for 5 minutes Any attempts to login into locked out Access Level will fail Ac cess lockout and lockout period are Access Level specific i e if an Access Level is locked out the other Access Levels remain unaffected If the box around the menu does not appear as above change the font in your terminal program to one that supports line draw charac ters e g terminal fonts If there are incorrect characters in the display improper line feeds or unerased portions the baud rate is too high for the quality of the com munication link
27. v 79 Lead Lockout REES REISE Figure 6 41 Recloser Lockout ProLogic 6 This equation resets the 79 Lockout It uses Virtual Input 1 SCA DA Reset 79 to simulatea SCADA Lockout Reset command In this case this is done by closing the Main Breaker Status Out 5 then Auxiliary Breaker Sta tus Out 6 to simulate main and auxiliary breaker closed status This latching function resets when the 79 Lead Lockout goes low SCADA LO Reset Ini 0 00 0 50 v vi SCADA Reset 79 3 79 Lead Lockout REIS Figure 6 42 Using Virtual Input to simulate SCADA Recloser Lockout Reset L PRO User Manual 2100 6 49 6 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide ProLogic 7 This equation is intended only for giving indication of when the 79 Lockout is reset This indication along with ProLogic 6 proves the 79 Reset timer TD om om Iv 79 Lead Lockout Figure 6 43 Main Recloser Lockout Reset Indication ProLogic 8 This equation closes Out 6 to simulate auxiliary breaker closed status from SCADA breaker close command OR auxiliary recloser operation This latching function resets when an external trip is received Aux Breaker Close 0 00 0 00 Iv VI 2 SCADA Close Bkr 187 79 Aux Reclose E El 3 External Trip 3 F ass 0 Figure 6 44 Auxiliary Breaker Close Command via Virtual Input 6 50 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 D02333R05 00 6 Acceptance Protection Function Te
28. 43 External Input 13 1 Inactive Active 44 External Input 14 1 Inactive Active 45 External Input 15 1 Inactive Active 46 External Input 16 1 Inactive Active 47 External Input 17 1 Inactive Active 48 External Input 18 1 Inactive Active 49 External Input 19 1 Inactive Active 50 External Input 20 1 Inactive Active D02333R05 00 L PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix F 15 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile 2 2 Binary Output Status And Control Relay Output Block If configurable ik ieu Ne MM Er DEUS Current Value list methods CROB Group Number 12 Binary Output Command Event Object Num 13 2 2 1 Minimum pulse time I Fixed at 0 000 ms hardware may limit this allowed with Trip further Close and Pulse On Based on point Index add column to table commands below 2 2 2 Maximum pulse time Fixed at 0 000 ms hardware may limit this allowed with Trip further Close and Pulse On Based on point Index add column to table commands below 2 2 8 Binary Output Status Always included in Class 0 Never response Only if point is assigned to Class 1 2 or 3 Based on point Index add column to table below 2 24 Reports Output Never Not supported Command Event Only upon a successful Control Objects Upon all control attempts 2 2 5 Event Variation Variation 1 without time Not supported L PRO Offliner reported when variation Variation 2 with absolute time See Note 2 0 re
29. After 10 Seconds External Trip Time delay of ProLogic4 After 2 Seconds After 8 Seconds After 2 Seconds After 4 Seconds After 8 Seconds After 2 Seconds After 6 Seconds After 8 Seconds After 2 Seconds After 8 Seconds After 8 Seconds After 2 Seconds Main Bkr Reclose Shot 1 T1 Auxiliary Breaker Close Shot 1 TF External Trip PL4 TF Main Bkr Reclose Shot 2 T2 Aux Breaker Close Shot 2 TF External Trip PL4 TF Main Bkr Reclose Shot 3 T3 Aux Breaker Close Shot 3 TF External Trip PL4 TF Main Bkr Reclose Shot 4 T4 Aux Breaker Close Shot 4 TF External Trip PL4 TF After 1 3 Seconds Recloser Lockout 1 0 seconds Tp 4 For detail of shot numbers etc observe the sequence of events by viewing Main Menu gt Event Log or by pressing the View Logs button of the L PRO HMI Note Targets need to be reset before you can view logs via HMI LPRO Unit ID R00001 Main Menu ID Settings Metering Records User Access Level SERVICE Utilities Access Quit 20020ct03 09 11 Event Log TIME 20020ct03 09 10 11 394 20020ct03 09 10 11 394 20020ct03 09 10 10 102 20020ct03 09 10 09 969 20020ct03 09 10 09 969 20020ct03 09 10 09 969 20020ct03 09 10 09 962 20020ct03 09 10 08 002 20020ct03 09 10 07 996 20020ct03 09 10 07 996 20020ct03 09 09 59 967 20020ct03 09 09 59 962 20020ct03 09 09 59 960 20020ct03 09 09 59 960 20020ct03 09 09 51 971 Recloser Lockout
30. L PRO Phase Mho Operating Times Phase to Phase Faults with CCVT setting disabled Appendix A 4 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 D02333R05 00 Appendix A IED Specifications with CCVT Transient Compensation Enabled L PRO Phase Mho Operating Times Phase to Phase Faults EE ege TED NER RS m RN z SIR 10 SIR 25 Time cycles a SIR 1 CEREREM IL 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 Fault Location of Z1 Reach 100 SIR 30 SIR 7 0 1 Figure A 2 L PRO Phase Mho Operating Times Phase to Phase Faults with CCVT setting enabled L PRO Ground Mho Operating Times Single Line to Ground Faults o o e SIR 30 a SIR 10 amp SIR 1 x SIR 0 1 Time cycles o o n o N 0 0 a ee TTT 2 20 40 60 80 100 Fault Location Got Z1 Reach Figure A 3 L PRO Ground Mho Operating Times Single Line to Ground Faults with CCVT setting disabled L PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix A 5 Appendix A IED Specifications Appendix A 6 L PRO Ground Mho Operating Times Single Line to Ground Faults with CCVT Transient Compensation Enabled 2 5 2 1 5 E SIR 30 9 a SIR 10 O
31. Note Out of Step Blinders are Positive Sequence Impedance Quantities 68 Inner Alarm Out 13 68 Outer Alarm Out 12 68 Trip Figure 6 20 Out of Step Logic 68 Preliminary Calculations Because this is a Positive Sequence Impedance perform this test as balanced 3 phase since this is the easiest way to obtain positive sequence The calculat ed Z is Z V phase Ijhase The minimum 3 phase current required must be greater than the I1 Supervision Setting 3 0 A Add 5 to ensure that the supervision is met Imin Ilsupervision x lO5percent 3 0 x 1 05 3 15A 68 Outer Right Test Procedure 1 In Terminal Mode access relay Metering Logic Protection Logic Monitor 68 OutBlinder Alarm Contact 12 with an ohmmeter 2 Apply balanced 3 phase nominal voltages 66 4 V to the L PRO terminals Ph A 330 66 4 V 70 Ph B 331 66 4 V Z 120 Ph C 332 66 4 V 2 120 Ph N 333 L PRO User Manual 2100 6 23 6 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 3 Connect 3 phase current sources 3 15 A in phase with voltages to the L PRO terminals Ph A 300 301 3 15 A Z0 Ph B 302 303 3 15 A Z 120 Ph C 303 304 3 15 A 74120 Observe 68 OutBlinder Alarm Low Contact 12 Open 4 Simultaneously increase ramp up 3 phase currents At 3 72 to 4 10 A expect 3 91A 68 OutBlinder Alarm High Contact 12 Closed End of 68 Outer test 68 Inner Lef
32. On active Virtual Input 28 10540 0 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 29 10541 0 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 30 10542 0 Off inactive On active Read Holding Registers Function Code 03 Channel Address Units Scale L PRO Clock Time UTC Read all in same query to ensure consistent time reading data Milliseconds Now 40001 0 1 Millisecond information not supported Seconds Now 40002 0 59 1 Minutes Now 40003 0 59 1 Hours Now 40004 0 23 1 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 D02333R05 00 Appendix E Modbus RTU Communication Protocol Read Holding Registers Function Code 03 Day of Year Now 40005 1 365 up to 366 if leap 1 year Years since 1900 40006 90 137 1 Sync d to IRIG B 40007 0 No 1 Yes 1 Time of Acquisition UTC Read all in same query to ensure consistent time reading data Milliseconds Now 40008 0 1 Millisecond information not supported Seconds Now 40009 0 59 1 Minutes Now 40010 0 59 1 Hours Now 40011 0 23 1 Day of Year Now 40012 1 365 up to 366 if leap 1 year Years since 1900 40013 90 137 1 Sync d to IRIG B 40014 0 No 1 Yes 1 Offset of UTC to IED time 40015 2 s complement half 1 hours North America is negative Channel Address Units Scale p AAAA AA 2 M d Line Va
33. Type Mho Forward Reach 28 80 ohm 0 05 to 66 00 Reverse Reach 1 44 ohm 0 05 to 66 00 Left Reach R1 8 00 ohm 0 05 to 66 00 Right Reach R2 8 00 ohm 0 05 to 66 00 Mho Char Angle 90 0 deg 70 0 to 140 0 Pickup Delay 1 00 E 0 00 to 5 00 Phase Current Supervision 5 0 A 0 2 to 50 0 310 Supervision 2 0 A 0 2 to 50 0 21N Ground Distance Zone 4 21N Zone 4 Enabled Type Mho Forward Reach fixed at 0 secondary ohm for POTT or Block ing scheme Reverse Reach 11 52 ohm 0 05 to 66 00 Left Reach R1 4 00 ohm 0 05 to 66 00 Right Reach R2 4 00 ohm 0 05 to 66 00 Mho Char Angle 90 0 deg 70 0 to 140 0 Pickup Delay 2 00 s 0 00 to 5 00 Phase Current Supervision 5 0 A 0 2 to 50 0 310 Supervision 2 0 A 0 2 to 50 0 68 Out of Step Protection Mode Off Zone 1 Blocking Disabled Zone 2 Blocking Disabled Zone 3 Blocking Disabled Zone 4 Blocking Disabled Out of step Swing Timer 0 50 s 0 00 to 1 00 11 Supervision 10 0 A 0 5 to 50 0 3lo Blocking 5 0 A 0 5 to 50 0 Blocking Reset Time 1 50 s 0 25 to 2 00 LHS Outer R1 20 0 ohm 100 0 to 17 0 LHS Inner R2 17 0 ohm 20 0 to 17 0 RHS Inner R3 17 0 ohm 17 0 to 20 0 Appendix B 8 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 D02333R05 00 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges L PRO Settings Summary Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1
34. Use the Utilities gt Setup gt Ports menu to reduce the re lay s baud rate The new rate is in effect at the next connection The relay supports 4 user access levels that control what relay functions are available to user The current access level is always shown in the centre of the Main Menu heading To change the Access Level either login again using the desired access level as your login name To change between view change and service Access Level you can also use the Main Menu gt Access menu Access Level Login Name Level Authorized Functions Function view view lowest View settings online readings and logs List and retrieve records At this level you cannot affect the operation of the controller change change middle Do all of the above plus change the settings and delete records service service highest Do all of the above 2 categories plus cali brate the analog inputs manually control out put auxiliary relays and modify passwords secadmin secadmin security Change passwords View change Syslog configuration 3 6 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 Login Passwords Terminal Mode Menus D02333R05 00 3 Using the IED Getting Started maintenance maintenance mainte nance Configure IP address subnet mask default gateway IP address Restore default configuration settings calibra tion Enable disable modem View retrieve system diagnostics update
35. directory on your PC s hard disk or network For example with HyperTer minal select Transfer Receive File to set the receive directory 2 Select one or more records on the relay using the List function in the Ter minal Mode s Records menu 3 Initiate transfer of the selected records by selecting R on the keyboard 4 Start the RecordBase View program and use the File7 Open menu command to open the downloaded record files located in the receive directory speci fied in step 1 For further instructions refer to the RecordBase View Manual at the back of the printed version of this manual D02333R05 00 L PRO User Manual 2100 5 5 5 Offliner Settings Software Main Branches from the Tree View Identification 5 6 RHS Information relating to specific menu Item LHS Menu Tree L PRO Offliner Settings Docunicnt 1 E Fle Edt window Help accessed by LHS menu or top tabs y Relay Identification Analog Inputs r Identification External Inputs Output Contacts Virtual Inputs Setting Groups System Parameters B Software Setting Settings Version g Serial Number LPRO 2100 astoor for Refter to the serial number Unit iD unto Nominal CT Sec Current 5a Nominal System Frequency Standard lo Optional UO Comments Setting Name Date CreateciModified Ignore Serial Number on the back of the relay
36. e det Actions Direction A s o Setting Group 6 Setting Group 6 E O Setting Group 7 Setting Group 7 OIC Carrier Start SON 67F Scheme Only zl ad 10 0 020 EL Setting Group 8 Setting Group 8 OIC Carrier Black S0N 87R Scheme Only w Reverse 10 0 020 L PRO Offliner Settings v8 Setting Gro Figure 5 19 Scheme Selector Scheme Selector Scheme Selection POTT PUTT Blocking Communication Aided External Input 1 to 9 and ProLogic 1 to 10 Receiver 1 External Input Receiver 2 External Input Scheme Send User defined Pickup Delay seconds Dropout Delay second POTT Current Reversal User defined Pickup Delay seconds Dropout Delay second DCB Scheme Zone 2 DCB Scheme Receiver Overcurrent Carrier O C Start GON GEI Disabled Scheme only ProLogic only Scheme and Pro Logic O C Carrier Block 50N 67R Disabled Scheme only ProLogic only Scheme and Pro Logic L PRO supports a Basic no communication a Permissive Overreaching Transfer Tripping POTT a Permissive Under reaching Transfer Tripping PUTT and a Directional Comparison Blocking Scheme DCB D02333R05 00 L PRO User Manual 2100 5 19 5 Offliner Settings Software 5 20 Directional Element dE L PRO 400 r Settings Document 1 File Edit Window Help Die e ed m Directional Element C Analog Inputs C External Inputs Iv Bii C Output Contacts O Virtual Inputs
37. fixed level 0 20 to 99 99 seconds rate of change 81 4 Disabled Fixed Level Rate of Change Pickup 50 000 to 59 995 or 60 005 to 70 000 fixed level 10 0 to 0 1 or 0 1 to 10 0 rate of change Pickup Delay 0 05 to 99 99 seconds fixed level 0 20 to 99 99 seconds rate of change Four frequency elements are provided with adjustable definite time de lays Frequency is determined from the main voltage input 3 phase volt age L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 50LS Overcurrent D02333R05 00 4 Protection Functions and Specifications L PRO takes in currents from 2 ring bus CTs and 2 additional CT inputs 50LS Input 3 and 50LS Input 4 These individual overcurrent devices can be used with ProLogic to create your own logic 50LS Input 3 and 50LS Input 4 are not available in the Output Matrix 50 l1a RMS Low Set Overcurrent 50 I1b RMS ee 50 I1c RMS Figure 4 19 Low Set Overcurrent 50 Low Set Overcurrent Main Enable disable Pickup 0 10 to 50 00 A secondary 5 A 0 02 to 10 00 A secondary 1 A Pickup Delay 0 00 to 10 00 seconds Auxiliary Enable disable Pickup 0 10 to 50 00 A secondary 5 A 0 02 to 10 00 A secondary 1 A Pickup Delay 0 00 to 10 00 seconds L PRO User Manual 2100 4 27 4 Protection Functions and Specifications 50BF Breaker Failure 4 28 The breaker failure protection function detects breaker failures There are 2 sets of brea
38. in terms of negative sequence quantities The zero sequence directional element can be used in many applications How ever where strong mutual coupling between parallel lines exist the zero se quence calculation must be disabled to prevent an incorrect directional determination The sensitivity settings should be low enough to permit opera L PRO User Manual 2100 4 9 4 Protection Functions and Specifications 4 10 tion during the lowest expected ground fault in terms of zero sequence quanti ties expected during a fault and high enough to allow for normal load imbalance Directional Element Override Enabled Enable Disable Negative Sequence Enable Disable V2 Sensitivity Level volts secondary 0 5 to 5 0 I2 Sensitivity Level amps secondary 0 1 to 1 0 5A 0 02 to 0 20 1A 3V0 Sensitivity Level volts secondary 1 0 to 10 0 310 Sensitivity Level amps secondary 0 2 to 2 0 5A 0 04 to 0 40 1A L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 21P and 21N Phase Selector D02333R05 00 4 Protection Functions and Specifications The phase selector algorithm for L PRO ensures that 21N only trips on single phase to ground fault so as to prevent 21N from false tripping for phase to phase to ground faults with arc resistance Supervise 21P for low SIR ratios and single phase to ground faults at 20 of line reach or below Algorithm Details The phase select
39. oy om sjuauing eur Oy ute bei uy sez pez geez zez iez oez 6zz gzz zz o SZZ vec zz zzz zz O22 oc BZ 4 9iZ SiZ viz ele Zee Vez okz 602 goz 202 902 soz poz eoz zoz 102 002 RES ale AWS MN Y GG 2X 2 S CG oon zl CREAG 2 OE OO 2 2 lei Ce a e e aca e s e 3 VE e E e e e e e e e ea e a call n no 1 ano zino uino av ino sno Leino dno amo smo rino ero eno io ed sioeiuos pesnun jndino AL 9 SIE nt ELL EHE IL Obl opt 80L 40L 90L SOL OL EOL ZOL ot O0L gu E e 83 8 e E 8 683 6 ed 8 63 63 n 2 eller etseleetgetereleeleg e Estria ter f4MD o9 tes tte tye ttt tony OGASZL geet j OQASZL j OQASZL j OQASZL JT OQASZL j OQASZL j ooaszi Ji Od ezi leulexg y Bottom Figure H 3 Rear Panel Vertical Mount 3U Chassis L PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix H 3 D02333R05 00 Appendix AC Schematic Drawings uonoejoJd eui 104 pesn sjndui eDejjoA Oy urew uonoejoud jepun 1e o pue ou s au 101 pesn sjndu eBeyoA xny Ov sjueuno OV 1eujo BuipaooeJ 10J pesn eq ued p pue e sjndui 19 E suoneordde snq Bul 104 suen eui jo jes puooes 104 pesn eq ued z sindui 19 z ou pejoejoJd euj jo Bulpsoded 101 pue uorjejoJd 104 pesn eq 0 s ndul 19 S JON SIOA OV SHOA OV sinduy jueng Ov suan 9ur syu uno eur uen xny vi Ndu 12 Ndu 19 Ov xny OV uen gee zee LES OEE SZE got Jot 926 Got vot EZE cct Lot Oct GLE Ble ALLE GLE SLE vit CLE ZLE Lie Ole GOC 80E OC 90 SOE
40. the front panel or from a record stored by the relay the active setting group is stored with the re cord Group Logic Processing The 16 Group Logic statements reside in a slower processing thread within the relay protection algorithms The processing cycle happens once every half sec ond 0 5 second When using ProLogic statements remember that a latch or dropout timer should be used if the initiating condition does not last at least 0 5 seconds In the example following we will create a definite pulse length using ProLogic for details see L PRO Setting Example in Appendix L Default Setting Group The relay uses Setting Group 1 as the factory default setting group and retains the current active setting group in memory This allows the relay to use the last active setting group prior to interruption of relay power as the default setting group following power up L PRO User Manual 2100 4 35 4 Protection Functions and Specifications Change Active Group You can at any time change the active setting group When you initiate a set ting group change this change takes precedence over an automatic setting group change The terminal UI is used to change the active setting group To view a snapshot of the group logic data select F2 prior to making any modifi cation to the Active Setting Group input The following is the flow of events that can occur in the Active Group Screen Active Group Screen Acess Level vi
41. the output for each reclose attempt is captured to the event log and visual indication of an external recloser block condition 79B is available on the front panel The 79 requires breaker a contact status indication for each breaker For more information see L PRO Setting Example in Appendix L Open Interval Timers The lead breaker open interval times are settable for each shot T1 T4 while the follow breaker open interval is common for each shot attempt The follow breaker open interval can use the 79 follower timer TF or the 79 reset timer TD Lead or Follow Breakers The 79 adds flexible lead and follow breaker options where the lead breaker can be in the main or auxiliary position The 79 automatically moves the follow breaker into the lead position after the out of service time delay TC when the lead breaker is removed from service If the follow breaker is removed from service after the out of service time delay TC there is no follow breaker re close attempts When a TC timer has expired it does not reset until the breaker status changes for at least 10 0 seconds or the relay is powered down External Reclose Blocking The 79 also supports blocking from external devices via the output matrix and the internal 79 Lockout indication You can control the 79 remotely or locally with external or virtual inputs Lockout Indication Lockout indication is provided for the lead and follow breaker The lead an
42. then an R is displayed by the event D02333R05 00 L PRO User Manual 2100 3 13 3 Using the IED Getting Started Utilities Sub menus Setup Maintenance Diagnostics Setup Time set manual time IRIG B skew control Requires change or Service access level Ports change Baud rates on communication ports Requires change or service access level SCADA select which SCADA protocol Modbus or DNP v3 0 to run on the SCADA port Configure parameters for the selected pro tocol such as address or timeout Requires change or service access level External Inputs Set the number of samples that an external input must be high in order for the external input to change for details see IED Specifications in Appendix A Maintenance Calibrate calibrate all 18 analog inputs Requires service access level Outputs close and open output contacts independent of the associ ated relay functions Requires service access level Control Virtual Inputs set reset and pulse virtual inputs Pulse width is 1 second Latched virtual inputs reset after pulse command has executed Requires change or service access level Erase use submenus Records and Event Logs to erase these records from the relay memory Requires change or service access level Diagnostics Transfer Diagnostics transfers relay diagnostic file to the PC The diagnostic file can be sent to us for analysis
43. vi L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 Version Compatibility D02333R05 00 This chart indicates the versions of Offliner Settings RecordBase View and the User Manual which are compatible with different versions of L PRO firm Ware RecordBase View and Offliner Settings are backward compatible with all ear lier versions of records and setting files You can use RecordBase View to view records produced by any version of L PRO firmware and Offliner Settings can create and edit older setting file versions Minor releases designated with a letter suffix e g v3 1a maintain the same compatibility as their base version For example L PRO firmware v3 1c and Offliner Settings v3 1a are compatible L PRO Firmware Software Compatibility Guide GE Te Compatible Offliner Settings v5 0 12 4000 v2 0 and greater v4 0a 12 4000 v2 0 and greater v4 0 12 4000 v2 0 and greater v3 5a 12 v3 5 or greater v3 5 12 v3 5 or greater v3 4 11 v3 4 or greater v3 3e 10 v3 3 or greater v3 3d 10 v3 3 or greater v3 3c 10 v3 3 or greater v3 3b 10 v3 3 or greater v3 3a 10 v3 3 or greater v3 3 10 v3 3 or greater v3 2c 9 v3 2 or greater v3 2b 9 v3 2 or greater v3 2a 9 v3 2 or greater v3 2 9 v3 2 or greater v3 1a 8 v3 1 or greater v3 1 8 v3 1 or greater v3 0b 7 v3 0 or greater v3 0a 7 v3 0 or greater v3 0 7 v3 0 or greater Please contact ERLPhase Customer Service for complet
44. 00 5 A 0 25 to 330 00 1 A 0 05 to 66 00 5 A 0 25 to 330 0 1 A Reverse Reach ohms 0 05 to 66 00 5 A 0 25 to 330 00 1 A 0 05 to 66 00 5 A 0 25 to 330 00 1 A 0 04 to 10 00 1 A 0 04 to 10 00 1 A 0 04 to 10 00 1 A Mho Characteristic Angle degrees 70 0 to 140 0 70 0 to 140 0 70 0 to 140 0 70 0 to 140 0 Pickup Delay seconds 0 00 to 0 20 0 00 to 2 00 0 00 to 5 00 0 00 to 5 00 Id Supervision amps secondary 0 2 to 50 0 5 A 0 2 to 50 0 5 A 0 2 to 50 0 5 A 0 2 to 50 0 5 A 0 04 to 10 00 1 A Line Angle degrees 45 to 89 Setting is made in Parameters Positive Sequence Angle Load Impedance ohms R ohms secondary 150 0 to 150 0 X ohms secondary D02333R05 00 150 0 to 150 0 L PRO User Manual 2100 4 3 4 Protection Functions and Specifications 21 N Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Characteristic Type Mho Quad Mho Quad Mho Quad Mho Quad Forward Reach ohms Mho characteristic 0 05 to 66 00 5 A 0 25 to 330 00 1 A 0 05 to 66 00 5 A 0 25 to 330 00 1 A 0 05 to 66 00 5 A 0 25 to 330 00 1 A 0 05 to 66 00 5 A 0 25 to 330 0 1 A Forward Reach ohms Quad characteristic x to 66 00 5 A x to 330 00 1 A x to 66 00 5 A x to 330 00 1 A x to 66 00 5 A x to 330 00 1 A x to 66 00 5 A x to 330 0 1 A Reverse Reach ohms Mho charac
45. 02 vT100 88400 6 N 1 ou caes NUM Capt int ech Figure 6 1 Enter actual applied signal level rLPRO Unit ID UnitID Util Maintenance User flccess Level SERVICE 2003Jun23 13 22 prev menu RICH Outputs Control Virtual Inputs Erase rCalibration MMain VAI Main VB Main VC jain IArCalibrate AC Input Channel Status Message Calibrate error Gain reading 0 00 out of range 55 20 to 82 80 any key gt _ Aux VA V KENTER gt Calibrate F2 Accept F3 Quit Figure 6 2 Calibration error out of range For example when you select voltage VA for calibration a prompt appears which asks you which quantity the relay should try to calibrate Ifa 66 V phase to neutral quantity is applied to the back VA terminals 66 0 V would be indi cated as the desired calibration L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 Testing the External Inputs Testing the Output Relay Contacts D02333R05 00 6 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide In a similar way you are prompted to go through all 18 ac analog quantities and provide the information about the injected calibration quantities You must have a test source to perform this function Only the magnitude of the analog input requires calibration not the angle When an analog input channel is calibrated you can verify the quantity mea sured by selecting the Metering menu and the Analog Quantity submenu VA of the ac voltage input is used as a refer
46. 1 On active 68 Out of Step 779 0 Off inactive 1 On active ZCircle Trigger 780 0 Off inactive 1 On active 51N Trip 781 0 Off inactive 1 On active L PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix E 1 Appendix E Modbus RTU Communication Protocol Appendix E 2 Read Coil Status Function Code 01 50N Trip 782 0 Off inactive On active 46 51 Trip 783 0 Off inactive On active 46 50 Trip 784 0 Off inactive On active Deadline Trip 785 0 Off inactive On active Comm Scheme Trip 786 0 Off inactive On active Comm Scheme Send 787 0 Off inactive On active 60 Alarm 788 0 Off inactive On active 21P2 Alarm 789 0 Off inactive On active 21P3 Alarm 790 0 Off inactive On active 21P4 Alarm 791 0 Off inactive On active 21N2 Alarm 792 0 Off inactive On active 21N3 Alarm 793 0 Off inactive On active 21N4 Alarm 794 0 Off inactive On active 51 Alarm 795 0 Off inactive On active 51N Alarm 796 0 Off inactive On active 46 51 Alarm 797 0 Off inactive 1 On active Self Check Fail 798 0 Off inactive On active ProLogic1 799 0 Off inactive 1 On active ProLogic2 800 0 Off inactive 1 On active ProLogic3 801 0 Off in
47. 1 Setting Group 1 aN lA3 Current 3A IB3 Current 3 B ICH Current 3 C 1A4 Current 4 A IB4 Current 4 B IC4 Current 4 C BVA Aux Voltage A BVB Aux Voltage B BVC Aux Voltage C External Input Names 1 Spare 1 2 Spare 2 3 Spare 3 4 Spare 4 5 Spare 5 6 Spare 6 2 Spare 7 8 Spare 8 9 Spare 9 Output Contact Names Output 1 Spare 1 Output 2 Spare 2 Output 3 Spare 3 Output 4 Spare 4 Output 5 Spare 5 Output 6 Spare 6 Output 7 Spare 7 Output 8 Spare 8 Output 9 Spare 9 Output 10 Spare 10 Output 11 Spare 11 Output 12 Spare 12 Output 13 Spare 13 Output 14 Spare 14 Output Contact Dropout Timers Output Spare 1 0 10 E 0 00 to 1 00 Output2 Spare 2 0 10 s 0 00 to 1 00 Output3 Spare 3 0 10 s 0 00 to 1 00 Output4 Spare 4 0 10 E 0 00 to 1 00 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 D02333R05 00 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges L PRO Settings Summary Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 Output5 Spare 5 0 10 s 0 00 to 1 00 Output6 Spare 6 0 10 s 0 00 to 1 00 Output Spare 7 0 10 s 0 00 to 1 00 Output8 Spare 8 0 10 s 0 00 to 1 00 Output9 Spare 9 0 10 s 0 00 to 1 00 Output10 Spare 10 0 10 s 0 00 to 1 00 Output11 Spare 11 0 10 s 0 00 to 1 00 Output12 Spare 12 0 10 s 0 00 to 1 00 Output13 Spare 13 0 10 s 0 00 to 1 00 Ou
48. 1 00 to 1000 00 Phase Rotation ABC Aux Voltage Input Three Phase Target Latching Enabled Fault Location Display Enabled Fault Location Initiated by 21 Alarm Disabled Ring Bus Configuration Aux CT Line Enabled Input Main Auxiliary CT Turns Ratio 240 00 1 Protection amp Record 1 00 to ing 10000 00 CCVT Transient Compensation on All 21 Disabled Devices Current Input 3 CT Ratio 400 00 1 Recording A ProLogic 00 to Input 0000 00 Current Input 4 CT Ratio 500 00 1 Recording A ProLogic 00 to Input 0000 00 Main PT Turns Ratio 2000 00 1 Protection A Record 00 to ing 20000 00 Auxiliary PT Turns Ratio 2000 00 1 Protection A Record 00 to ing 20000 00 Line to Line Voltage 230 00 kV 00 to 1000 00 Distance Unit Selection km Record Length Fault Record Length 0 5 s 0 2 to 2 0 Swing Rcd Length 120 s 60 to 120 Event Auto Save Disabled Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 Setting Group Comments Line Parameters Line Length 200 00 km 0 50 to 2000 00 Positive Sequence Impedance Z1 14 40 ohm 0 05 to 66 00 Appendix B 4 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 D02333R05 00 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges L PRO Settings Summary Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 Positive Sequence Angle Z1 80 0 deg 45 0 to 89 0 Zero Sequence Impedance Z0 36 00 ohm 0 05 to 300 00 Zero Seque
49. 16 bit with 129 response 00 04 start step flag 41 2 Analeg Gutput 16 bit 3 select 17 28 index 129 response Eche ofrequest 4 operate 5 direct op 6 dir op no ack 50 1 THme and Date Absolute time 2 write 07 limited qty 1 129 response 51 1 Time and Date C TO Absolute time 129 response Di limited qty synchronized 430 unsel resp qty 1 51 2 Time and Date CTO Absolute time 29 response 07 limited qty unsynchronized 130 unsol resp qty 1 52 1 Time Delay Coarse 29 response 07 limited qty aty 1 52 2 Time delay Fine 129 respense 07 imited qty tah 60 1 Class Objects Class 0 data 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop 60 2 Class Objects Class 1 data 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index 60 3 Class Objects Class 2 data 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index 60 4 Class Objects Class 3 data 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index 80 1 Internal Indications Packet format 2 write 00 start stop 129 response index 7 110 0 Octet string 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 07 limited qty 111 0 Octet string event 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 07 limited qty No Object function code only 13 cold restart 129 response No Object function code only 14 warm restart 129 response No Object function code only 23 delay
50. 2 or 3 Based on point Index add column to table below 2 1 5 Definition of Binary Fixed list shown in table below Default list is L PRO Offliner Input Point List I Configurable shown in the Other explain table below 1 Binary Inputs are scanned with 1 ms resolution NOTES 2 Binary Input data points are user selectable the data points available in the device for any given Binary Input point selection can be obtained through the L PRO Offliner software see SCADA Setting Summary Point Default Class Name for Name for Name Assigned to Events State when State when Description Index 1 2 3 or none value is 0 value is 1 0 External Input 1 1 Inactive Active 1 External Input 2 1 Inactive Active 2 External Input 3 1 Inactive Active 3 External Input 4 1 Inactive Active 4 External Input 5 1 Inactive Active 5 External Input 6 1 Inactive Active D02333R05 00 L PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix F 13 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile Point Default Class Name for Name for Index Name Assigned to Events State when State when Description 1 2 3 or none value is 0 value is 1 6 External Input 7 1 Inactive Active 7 External Input 8 1 Inactive Active 8 External Input 9 1 Inactive Active 9 Virtual Input 1 1 Inactive Active 10 Virtual Input 2 1 Inactive Active 11 Virtual Input 3 1 Inactive Active 12 Virtual Input 4 1 Inactive Acti
51. 25 3U chassis 17 7 cm 4U chassis 7 4U chassis 48 3 cm rack mount 19 rack mount 30 5 cm deep 12 deep Time Synchronization and Accuracy External Time Source Synchronized using IRIG B input mod ulated or unmodulated auto detect Free Running Accuracy In the absence of an external time source the relay maintains time with a maximum 15 minutes drift per year over the full oper ating temperature range and maxi mum 90 seconds drift per year at a constant temperature of 25 C The relay can detect loss or re establish ment of external time source and auto matically switch between internal and external time Synchronization Accuracy Sampling clocks synchronized with the time source internal or external Overall L PRO Accuracies Current 2 5 of inputs from 0 1 to 1 0 x nominal current In 1 0 of inputs from 1 0 to 20 0 x nominal current In Voltage 1 0 of inputs from 0 01 to 2 00 x nominal voltage Vn Impedance 5 0 or 5 mQ of set value from 0 05 to 66 00 ohms secondary 0 25 to 330 00 ohms secondary 1 A nominal Directional Phase Angle 2 0 of set value of Positive Sequence Line Angle value from 25 0 to 89 0 Frequency Elements 0 001 Hz fixed level 0 05 Hz df dt Sync Check Elements 0 2 degrees Timers 2 5 ms of set value plus 1 00 to 1 50 cycles of inherent delay Inverse Overcurrent Timers 2 5 or 1
52. 250 volts are pos sible depending on the range provided The L PRO Relay model 2100E contains 7 additional output relay contacts Each contact is programmable and has breaker tripping capability All output contacts are isolated from each other The dropout time for each output contact Is configurable L PRO User Manual 2100 1 Overview Model Options Ordering L PRO is available for either horizontal or vertical mount for details see Me chanical Drawings in Appendix G L PRO is available with an internal modem card or internal modem network card The CT inputs are 1 A nominal or 5 A nominal The external inputs are 48 125 Vdc or 125 250 Vdc The system base frequency is either 50 Hz or 60 Hz The L PRO is available with an optional I O board as described above All of the above options must be specified at the time of ordering Relay Method of Memory Polarization The 21P and 21N mho elements use positive sequence voltage derived from a memory voltage as the polarizing quantity Sufficient positive sequence voltage should be available during all fault events However during certain fault events especially three phase bolted faults near the line VT location the positive sequence voltage may be insufficient for correct operation To ensure adequate positive sequence voltage exists for all fault conditions the L PRO uses a ring filter implemented in software to provide memory voltage as the source for the positive s
53. 26 Y Y Y Y Y Y nactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 120 Virtual Input 27 Y Y Y Y Y Y nactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 121 Virtual Input 28 Y Y Y Y Y Y nactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 122 Virtual Input 29 Y Y Y Y M Y nactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 123 Virtual Input 30 Y Y Y Y De Y nactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 124 Get Next Fault Y Y Y NY Y Y nactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed Event atis 125 Output Contact 15 Open Closed None None 126 Output Contact 16 Open Closed None None Appendix F 20 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile Default Class Supported Control Operations Assigned to Events 1 2 3 or none Name for Name for Name State when State when Change Command Description value is 0 value is 1 Cancel Currently Running Operation Direct Operate No Ack Point Index Select Operate Direct Operate Pulse On NUL Pulse Off Latch On NUL Latch Off NUL Close Count gt 1 127 Output Contact 17 Open Closed None None 128 Output Contact 18 Open Closed None None 129 Output Contact 19
54. 6 27 6 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 4 With A Phase voltage still reduced reduce B and C phase volts At 31 to 29 V expect 30 V 27 Aux U V High 27 Main U V High Contact 14 closed End of 27 test 59 Overvoltage Test Settings Main AND 3 Phase Overvoltage Auxiliary OR Single Phase Overvoltage 1 phase connected Main and Aux Pickup 72 V Time Delay 0 05 second 59 Va main MS 59 Vb main RMS 296 O 59 Vc main RMS O eA 59 Main Undervoltage 297 O 3 Phases Connected 7 59 Va aux RMS 4 59 Vb aux RMS 298 ECT T 59 Vcaux RVS 299 O E 59 Aux Undervoltage 1 Phase Connected Figure 6 24 Overvoltage Logic 59 59 Test Procedure 1 In Terminal Mode access relay Metering Logic Protection Logic2 Monitor 59 Main O V 59 Aux O V Monitor contacts Output 13 59 Aux Trip Output 14 59 Main Trip 2 Apply balanced 3 phase nominal voltages 66 4 V to the L PRO terminals Ph A 324 amp 330 66 4 V 70 Ph B 331 66 4 V 7 120 Ph C 332 66 4 V 7 120 Ph N 327 and 333 Observe 59 Main O V Low 59 Aux O V Low 6 28 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 6 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 3 Increase A Phase voltage At 70 0 to 74 0 V expect 72 V 59 Aux O V High Contact 13 Closed 59 Main O V remains Low Contact 14 Open 4 With A Phase voltage still increased increase B and C phase vo
55. 7 and 10 are Port 1 access only L PRO User Manual 2100 2 Setup and Communications Modify IP address Modifies the LAN IP address when equipped with an optional internal 10BaseT Ethernet card View system diagnostic Displays the internal status log Retrieve system diagnostics Automatically packages up the internal status log plus set ting and setup information and downloads it in compressed form to your computer This file can then be sent to our cus tomer support to help diagnose a problem Restore settings Use this menu to force the system back to default values if you suspect a problem due to the unit s settings calibration and or setup parameters Force hardware reset Manually initiates a hardware reset Note that the communi cation link is immediately lost and cannot be re established until the unit completes its start up Network utilities Enters network utilities sub menu Monitor SCADA Shows real time display of SCADA data Enable disable Modem Enables or disables the internal modem Network Utilities Menu Commands Please enter a command 1 5 1 View protocol statistics 2 View active socket states 3 View routing tables 4 Ping 5 Exit network utilities View protocol statistics View IP TCP and UDP statistics View active socket states View current states of active sockets View routing tables View routing tables Ping Check
56. Activate G 3 Setting Group 3 z o Pickup Delay 5 seconds 0 0 1 Input A El 1 Selector 1 D Input B El 2 Selector 2 Input C El 3 Selector 3 Input D PL 8 Block Group Logic Out Input E El 4 43CS Local Remote D Figure L 9 Group Logic 14 EI 1 high El 2 high and EI 3 low Group Logic 13 Go to Group 4 Iv Enabled Name Goto Group 4 AND Setting Group to Activate 3G 4 Setting Group 4 S E Pickup Delay D seconds 1 1 Input A El 1 Selector 1 Y Input B El 2 Selector 2 i Input C El 3 Selector 3 Input D PL 8 Block Group Logic v De Out Input E El 4 43CS Local Remote Y Figure L 10 Group Logic 13 2 o o o Appendix L 6 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 Appendix L L PRO Setting Example EI 1 low El 2 low and EI 3 high Group Logic 12 Go to Group 5 IV Enabled Name Goto Group 5 AND Setting Group to Activate 9G 5 Setting Group 5 SS glo 0 Pickup Delay 5 seconds orc pot 1 1 A muta E11 Selector Input B ei2isetector2 zl Input C El 3 Selector 3 x Input D PL 8 Block Group Logic Ei Input 14 43CS LocalRemote v Figure L 11 Group Logic 12 Out EI 1 high El 2 low and EI 3 high Group Logic 11 Go to Group 6 I Enabled Name Go to Group 6 AND Setting Group to Activate SG 6 Setting Group 6 Y Pickup Delay 5 seconds
57. C Setting Groups System Parameters SCADA Communication C DNP Configuration C Point Map C Class Data SCADA Settings Summar Record Length E Setting Group 1 Setting C C Line Parameters Scheme Selector X m H m Negative Sequence Directional Element IV Enabled V2 Sensitivity Levet 0 5 v D Sensitivity Levet 0 2 A m JOO Zero Sequence Directional Element IV Enabled 3V0 Sensitivity Level 1 0 v 310 Sensitivity Level 0 2 A L PRO Offliner Settings v401 Figure 5 20 Breaker Status Setting Group 1 Directional Elemnet Negative Sequence Directional Element V2 range 0 5 to5 V I2 range 0 1 to 1A Zero Sequence Directional Element 3V0 range 1 to 10 V Protection Functions 310 range 0 2 to2A L PRO Offliner Settings Document 1 Ele gdt Window Help Dleb 3 3 5 tB E Identification System Parameters C Record Length E C Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 Protection Summary 21P Phase Distance 1 SOLS Low Set Overcurrent EC C Line Parameters Zonet T Zoe T Men npui I Input 3 Scheme Selector Zones Zones TC Aux nput2 Input4 Dead Line Pick T Wi Weak infer 21N GroundDistance 50BF Breaker Failure mb e I Zonet I Zone2 T Main T Aux 78 Recloser H ProLogic Zones I Zone4 EE ES Group
58. C voltage always 90 Reduction 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 Fault Volts 103 5V 92 0V 80 5 V 69 0 V 57 5 V 46 0 V 34 5 V 23 0 V 11 5 V Fault Volt Angle 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 Voltage B C 61 5 V 56 7 V 52 2 V 47 9 V 43 9 V 40 4 V 37 4 V 35 1 V 33 7 V B Angle 122 7 125 8 129 5 133 9 139 1 145 3 152 5 160 9 170 2 C Angle 122 7 125 8 129 5 133 9 139 1 145 3 152 5 160 9 170 2 C A Fault B phase voltage 66 4V 7 120 The resultant angle of C A voltage always 150 Reduction 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 Fault Volts 103 5V 92 0 V 80 5V 69 0 V 57 5 V 46 0 V 34 5 V 23 0 V 11 5 V Fault Volt Angle 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 Voltage C A 61 5 V 56 7 V 52 2 V 47 9 V 43 9 V 40 4 V 37 4 V 35 1 V 33 7 V C Angle 117 3 114 2 110 5 106 1 100 9 94 7 87 5 79 1 69 8 A Angle 2 7 5 8 9 5 13 9 19 1 25 3 32 5 40 9 50 2 D02333R05 00 L PRO User Manual 2100 6 15 6 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 6 16 For this B C test a minimum fault voltage of 23 6 V is required as calculated in the table B C Fault on page 6 15 Select the next highest voltage In this case 34 5 V 70 reduction is used The following formulae were used to calculate the voltages for the tables they may be used f
59. Configuration access Comply 5 2 4 f Configuration change Comply 5 2 4 g Firmware change Comply 5 2 4 h ID password creation or modification Comply 5 2 4 i ID Password deletion Comply Feature not offered in this product 5 2 4 j Audit log access Comply Feature not offered in this product 5 2 4 k Time date change Comply 5 2 4 I Alarm incident Exception Not all alarm incidents are supported 5 3 Supervisory monitoring and control Exception 5 3 1 Overview of supervisory monitoring and Comply Real time Cyber Security Notification Events and control Alarms is available via Syslog protocol in compli ance with RFC 5424 and RFC 5426 standards 5 3 2 Events Comply 5 3 3 Alarms Exception 5 3 3 a Unsuccessful login attempt Comply 5 3 3 b Reboot Comply 5 3 3 C Attempted use of unauthorized configuration Exception Not supported software 5 3 3 d Invalid configuration or firmware download Comply 5 3 3 e Unauthorized configuration or firmware file Exception Not supported 5 3 3 f Time signal out of tolerance Exception Not supported 5 3 3 g Invalid field hardware changes Comply Feature not offered in this product 5 3 4 Alarm point change detect Comply 5 3 5 Event and alarm grouping Comply Event and Alarm grouping is predefined Event groups Notice Warning Error Critical Alert Alarm groups Error Alert Emergency 5 3 6 Supervisory permissive control Exception Not supported 5 4 IED cyber security features Exception 5 4 1 IED fu
60. Data Set Descriptors Appendix F 10 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile 1 7 Outstation Unsolicited Sg If configurable Response Support Capabilities Current Value listiaciods 1 7 1 Supports Unsolicited I Not Supported NA Reporting Configurable selectable from On and Off D02333R05 00 L PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix F 11 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile If configurable 1 8 Outstation Performance Capabilities Current Value f list methods 1 8 1 Maximum Time Base NA not synchro Drift milliseconds per nized by DNP minute 1 8 2 When does outstation I Never NA set IIN1 4 Asserted at startup until first Time Synchroniza tion request received Periodically range Io seconds Periodically selectable from seconds Range to seconds after last time sync Selectable from seconds after last time sync When time error may have drifted by range to ms When time error may have drifted by selectable from 1 8 83 Maximum Internal Time NA Reference Error when set via DNP ms 1 8 A Maximum Delay NA Measurement error ms 1 8 5 Maximum Response 100 ms for the L PRO Offliner time ms case all sup ported points mapped to the DNP point lists 1 8 6 Maximum time from NA start up to IIN 1 4 assertion ms 1 8 7 Maximum Event Time 0 1736 ms for tag error for local Binary 60Hz sys and Double bit I O
61. E LAML ty IL omg j omg Jr ower J omg TL og aL OQAS a ower 1L oag j OON 1 Euler o Figure H 2 Rear Panel 4U Chassis L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 Appendix H 2 Appendix H Rear Panel Drawings Top Front Panel La Overhang co H C5 CO Stt rtt ttt Zee itt oe e er ZZE e SZE mm e o WE ee ag a ie Ole SIE vit ele ZIE iE ole 60 me Z0 90 Sot ge o me om L 7 7 ACAN A ZZ ZZ ZZ 7 uw al gel ee el el edel ele NADIQAQIAIAAP PPP QAP e XX C ee ee eue ee DAP DAVDDADQAA DAMP PAMPPQS APS WAP DAPS P ADAAPAPGAPe N oA aA Ww N 9A D V X an an vyn oa Y aa Y ve oa a va ou a M vu 2H09 vs x SHOA OV ute pesnun SIOA OV xn synduj queuing ov syueung eur
62. KO Magnitude 0 10 to 2 00 KO Angle 25 0 to 25 0 degrees Line Parameter Settings permit a parameter entry related to the line voltage CT ratio PT ratio line length line secondary positive and zero sequence 1m pedance The KO factor used is a default factor based on the line parameters KO Z0 Z1 3Z1 You can specify by selecting KO Override Enable L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 5 Offliner Settings Software Scheme Selector L PRO Offliner Settings Document 1 File Edit Window Help e s go en s ea 8 EH Identification Relay Scheme Selector Analog Inputs External inputs Scheme Selelection Output Contacts Son O Virtual Inputs Seting Groups Communication Aided External Inputs 1 to 9 and ProLogic 1 to 10 System Parameters C Record Length Receiver 1 Receiver 2 EFL Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 E11 Comm T T Rew v NETTES E Line Parameters C Breaker Status E Protection Functions Z Circle Trigger Pickup Delay Dropout Delay s s Scheme Send 0 100 rus 9 200 me E0 ProLogic EC Group Logic POTT Current Reversal 0300 mp4 0400 T01 Output Matrix Settings S DCB Scheme Zone 2 DU LO ettings Summary 5 Setting Group 2 Setting Group 2 DCB Scheme Receiver 0500 mo 5 Setting Group 3 Setting Group 3 EC Setting Group 4 Setting Group 4 Overcurrent Carrier H 0 Setting Group 5 Setting Group 5 8 be 310 Pickup Pickup Delay
63. LL 21 zu 25ms 59 Vimain Positive Seq 20 V Fixed 216 9 E d 52aMain j 212 Jaen Out 10 NE H 27 Vsync Positive Seq 20 V Fixed Dead Main Dead Sync Enabled 27 Vmain Positive Seq 20 V Fixed 218 27 Vsync Positive Seq 20 V Fixed 6 44 Figure 6 35 Synchronism Check Logic 25 27 59 Sync Check Test Procedure 1 In Terminal Mode access relay Metering Logic Protection Logic2 Monitor 25 27 59 Sync Check Output Contact 10 Observe 25 27 59 Sync Check High Proves DMDA with no voltage applied 2 Apply voltages to the relay main voltage input terminals sufficient to create Vpos of 66 4 V If only 3 voltage sources are available Ph A 330 99 6 V 70 Ph B 331 99 6 V 7 120 Ph C 332 not applicable Ph N 333 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 6 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide OR If 4 voltage sources are available Ph A 330 66 4 V 70 Ph B 331 66 4 V Z 120 Ph C 332 66 4 V Z 120 Ph N 333 Observe 25 27 59 Sync Check High Proves LMDA with only line volt age applied 3 Turn voltage off 4 Apply single phase nominal voltage 66 4 V to the relay auxiliary voltage input terminals Ph A 324 66 4 V 725 Ph N 327 Short and ground unused Terminals 325 and 326 Observe 25 27 59 Sync Check High Proves DMLA with only bus voltage applied 5 Apply
64. Operate Time 1 0 to 1 3 cycles at 8096 reach Including output relay operation Sampling Rate 96 samples cycle Records up to 25th harmonic Power Supply Nominal Range 48 to 250 Vdc 120 Vac 50 60 Hz Full Operating Range 40 to 300 Vdc Memory Settings and records are stored in non Records are stored in a circular buffer volatile memory Protection Functions IEEE Dev 21P 1 2 3 4 21N 1 2 3 4 27 5OBF 50LS 50 51 67 50N 51N 67 46 50 51 67 59 60 68 79 Sync Check 81 Dead Line Pickup Weak Infeed Pro Logic Group Logic and Virtual Inputs Line protection takes in up to 6 voltages and 6 currents Extra 6 currents used for recording and ProLogic input Suitable for ring bus configurations Recording Fault 96 s c oscillography of all analog and external input channels Capacity up to 15 x 2 second records Viewing software provides waveform symmetrical components and harmonic analysis Dynamic Swing 1 s c phasor measurements of line posi tive sequence V and plus frequency Capacity up to 15 x 3 minute records Events 250 events Circular event log A D Resolution 13 bits 8192 counts full scale Input amp Output Analog Input Channels 18 6 line currents 3 line and 3 bus volt ages plus 6 currents for bus monitor ing Rating In 5 Aor 1 A Vn 69V Continuous 3x In 2x Vn One Second 20x In without distortion One Minute 3x V
65. PRO Line Protection Relay Model 2100 Betsy Functional O mem m Side View sessionis 01 19 00 O eee O ven 307 9 mm 12 12 Figure G 5 Vertical Mount Mechanical Drawing 3U Chassis D02333R05 00 L PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix G 5 Appendix G Mechanical Drawings 5 3 mm 21 120 7 e MS dx 296 4 mm 25 New Installation Cut Out Template Appendix G 6 L PRO User Manual 2100 omm a K a mm 46 2 4 mm 09 Holes for Vertical Mount 4 places 6 4 mm o 0 25 Retrofit Installation ABB Type FT42 Cutout ref ABB dwg 57D7905 D02333R05 00 Appendix H Rear Panel Drawings
66. Phase Current Supervision 1 5 A minimum phase current to allow 21N2 to operate 21N Zan 50 la 50N 310 Directional Element N Zone 21N Zbn 50 Ib 139 141 0 TN 50N 310 142 Out 1 60 4ms 0 out t Directional Element 21N Zcn 138 21N 50 Ic 440 Generic Phase Distance 50N 3IO Logic any zone Directional Element Figure 6 14 Ground Distance Logic 21N This test demonstrates testing a single line Phase A to a ground fault Preliminary calculations Since this 1s a single phase test use the compensated impedance value calcu lated above the calculated Z is Voss Z l fault Todi The minimum single phase current required is Remember Testing single phase so need to exceed the greater of I phase and 3IO supervision settings add 596 to ensure the minimum supervision logic is high for this test Greater of Phase and 310 Supervision x 105percent 1 5 x 1 05 1 584 nin This element has been set for quadrilateral characteristic 6 18 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 D02333R05 00 6 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 21N2 Reactive Test Procedure 1 In Terminal Mode access relay Metering Logic Protection Logic 1 Monitor 21N2 Pickup 2 Apply balanced 3 phase nominal voltages 66 4 V to the L PRO terminals Ph A 330 66 4 V Z0 Ph B 331 66 4 V Z 120 Ph C 332 66 4 V Z 120 Ph N 333 3 Connect singl
67. Port 5 10BaseT Ethernet Port Internal Modem optional 8 External clock IRIG B modulated or unmodulated 9 Port 2 Direct Modem RS 232 Port 10 Port 3 SCADA 11 Port 4 unused 12 Case ground 13 9 programmable external inputs 1 to 9 14 This row contains 2 distinct areas from left to right 14 programmable output relay contacts and relay inoperative contact 15 This row contains 3 distinctive areas from left to right Main and Auxiliary AC Line Currents 6 each for protection and recording AC Current Inputs 2 3 phase current groups for recording and 50LS function Main and Auxiliary AC Voltage for protection and recording Power supply Figure 1 3 L PRO Rear View L PRO User Manual 2100 1 3 1 Overview AC Current and Voltage Inputs External Inputs Output Rela Contacts y Relay inoperative Alarm Output L PRO is provided with terminal blocks for up to 12 ac currents and 6 phase to neutral voltages Each of the current input circuits has polarity marks A complete schematic of current and voltage circuits is shown for details see AC Schematic Drawings in Appendix I and DC Schematic Drawings in Appendix J The L PRO Relay contains 9 programmable external inputs External dc volt age of either 48 125 volts or 125 250 volts nominal are possible depending on the range provided The L PRO Relay has 14 output relay contacts Each contact is programmable and has breaker tripping capability All
68. Reply Yes to the Ready to load remote setting prompt 6 In your terminal program initiate transfer of the setting file created in step 2 above For example with HyperTerminal you would select Transfer then Send File Browse to find the file then select Open and finally Send 7 When the file has been transferred verified and loaded a message New settings loaded and secure is displayed L PRO User Manual 2100 3 11 3 Using the IED Getting Started A serial number discrepancy message may appear This is to en sure that you are aware of the exact relay to which the settings are being loaded If this happens check the relay serial number using the terminal mode ID menu item Type this serial number into the L PRO Serial No box in the Identification tab display area of Offlin er Settings Alternately you may check the Ignore Serial Number check box to bypass serial number supervision Retrieve To Offliner To transfer the relay s current settings to the PC do the following 1 2 3 4 5 Start L PRO in Terminal Mode and login as view change or service Navigate to Settings gt Retrieve To Offliner Select Enter The relay asks you if you wish to continue Select Y for yes The file is sent to the directory defined by the HyperTerminal menu Trans fer gt Receive File When using HyperTerminal if Use receiving protocol is set to Z modem with Crash Recovery file transfers are skipp
69. SIR 2 5 o 1 SIR 7 1 E SIR 0 1 0 5 0 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 10096 Fault Location of Z1 Reach Figure A 4 L PRO Ground Mho Operating Times Single Line to Ground Faults with CCVT setting enabled L PRO Quadrilateral Operating Times Single Line to Ground Faults Time cycles eo e o o P eng I d o TTT LI 0 96 0 LLEELLELLLELLLELLEELLELLI 20 40 60 80 Fault Location of Z1 Reach 1 Lun gre e 0 SIR 30 a SIR 10 4 SIR 1 lt SIR 0 1 Figure A 5 L PRO Quadrilateral Operating Times Single Line to Ground Faults with CCVT setting disabled L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 Appendix A IED Specifications L PRO Quadrilateral Operating Times Single Line to Ground Faults with CCVT Transient Compensation Enabled 2 2 ki o SIR 30 ra m SIR 10 EI SIR 2 5 94 SIR 7 1 E _SIR 0 1 0 0 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Fault Location of Z1 Reach Figure A 6 L PRO Quadrilateral Operating Times Single Line to Ground Faults with CCVT setting enabled D02333R05 00 L PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix A 7 Frequency Element Operating Tim
70. Set the protocol and set the corresponding parameters The DNP3 LAN WAN TCP and UDP options are only available if the unit has an optional Ethernet LAN port installed Port 3 s communication parameters are set using the Utilities Setup Ports menu in relay s user interface Both the baud rate and the parity bit can be con figured The number of data bits and stop bits are determined automatically by the selected SCADA protocol Modbus ASCII uses 7 data bits Modbus RTU and DNP Serial use 8 data bits All protocols use 1 stop bit except in the case where either Modbus protocol is used with no parity this uses 2 stop bits as defined in the Modbus standard Protocol monitor utilities are available to assist in resolving SCADA commu nication difficulties such as incompatible baud rate or addressing The utilities can be access through the Maintenance user interface for details see Mainte nance Menu on page 2 12 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 Communication Port Details D02333R05 00 2 Setup and Communications Port Location Front Panel Function RS 232 Data Communication Equipment DCE female DB9 Used for user interface access via a direct serial connection Default Setting 38 400 baud 8 data bits no parity 1 stop bit Rear Panel RS 232 DCE female DB9 Used for User interface access via a direct serial connection User interface access via an external modem The optional ERLPhas
71. This memory voltage lasts for approximate ly 150 cycles even if all voltage inputs from the line VTs go to zero A practi cal effect of using a memorized voltage is to expand the mho characteristic by the source impedance This expansion of the characteristic ensures correct op eration for zero voltage faults at the relay location and for forward capacitive faults D02333R05 00 L PRO User Manual 2100 4 5 4 Protection Functions and Specifications Ring Filter 4 6 No Memory Voltage Full Memory Voltage R Figure 4 4 Effect of Using Memorized Voltage The voltage memory in the L PRO uses a ring filter implemented in software The ring filter is a high Q bandpass filter with the frequency response centered on the nominal system frequency The effect of the ring filter is to retain some voltage information for approximately 150 cycles even ifthe measured system voltage is severely depressed by a fault VA gt Ring Filter sl Sequence Ve Ring Filter j Component Vpos mem gt H Filter V gt Ring Filter Kans c 9 e ore gt Vpolarizing Sequence Component Vpos Filter Figure 4 5 Polarizing Voltage Fault Ring Filter Memory Voltage Figure 4 6 Effect of the Ring Filter L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 Directional Element D02333R05 0
72. a Breaker Fail Application using Pro Logic The following screen shot shows the Logic being used to make a Breaker Fail application from the 50LS using ProLogic ProLogic 1 This boolean equation used to initiate and operate as a Breaker Fail for 52 3 Input 3 Current above the 50LS threshold arms one input of the AND gate The initiate in this case is provided by Virtual Input 3 which will latch until the current drops below the 50LS threshold Note ProLogic 2 not shown is for 52 4 Input 4 ProLogic 1 Breaker Fail 52 3 V Enabled Name Breaker Fail 52 3 Pickup Delay 100 s Dropout Delay 0 00 s V Target Enabled InputA VI3 BFinit 52 3 Input B 50LS Input 3 Y E Hal 3 s Input C 50LS Input 3 e Input D Unused 0 gt ei EN o This symbol denotes a function which has not been enabled and is treated as a logic zero input Figure 6 31 Breaker Fail Created Using ProLogic D02333R05 00 L PRO User Manual 2100 6 39 6 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide Input 3 Breaker Fail Test Procedure 1 Apply 0 31 A to L PRO Terminals 312 313 2 In Terminal Mode Service level access Utilities Maintenance Control Virtual Inputs Scroll to VI3 Init BF 52 3 Pulse On Observe after 1 Second Target Breaker Fail 52 3 PL1 3 Reduce current to zero 4 Apply the same process to Input 4 Terminals 318 319 using VIA Init BF 52 4 End of 50BF and 50LS tests
73. an IRIG B signal source to the IRIG B port at the back of the relay to set it auto matically The year may need to be set manually if it is not provided as part of the IRIG B signal View Readings Pressing the View Readings button obtains metering information about the transmission line for details see Display on page 3 4 View Logs Pressing the View Logs button displays the target information if a relay operation has occurred for details see Display on page 3 4 Previous Next Scroll through the menu by pressing Previous and Next When the Date amp Time is displayed pressing either of these buttons will display the current Port 1 and Port 2 baud rates Clear Target When a fault takes place the red target light appears You can select a setting option to reset the target light after a short time delay Use the Clear Target button to view all target information If many faults have been stored you may need to push this button several times Clearing the target light does not clear the target information from the relay log The relay holds all target messages during a power supply shutdown and restart Pressing the Clear Target push button displays any targets not previously viewed on the front display and clears the Target LED after the last target has been viewed L PRO User Manual 2100 3 3 3 Using the IED Getting Started Display 3 4 Target kl A AR Date amp View V
74. and Specifications There may be some rare circumstances where there may not be sufficient volt age or current using the negative zero and positive sequence components for the directional element to make a valid directional decision The most likely circumstance where this may occur is a three phase bolted fault near the line VTs that isn t cleared in an appropriate amount of time It takes approximately 30 cycles after the measured three phase system voltage drops to 0 for the ring filter voltage to decay such the Vpos mem is less than 2 Vsec For this cir cumstance or for any other fault case where there are insufficient sequence component quantities for any of the directional calculations to operate the di rection is set to forward Setting the directional element to forward explicitly sets the direction to forward for the distance elements and for the 50N 67N F and 50N 67N R elements in the communications aided tripping schemes ef fectively blocking the 50N 67N R element and allows all other directionally controlled elements to operate non directionally The output of the directional element asserts when the direction is determined to be forward This output is uses internally by protection functions directly supervised by the element and is also available as the Directional Element indication in ProLogic equations The directional element also provides the Directional Valid output for use in ProLogic equations This output
75. asserts when any one of the active sequence impedance calculations has sufficient in put quantities to make a valid direction determination regardless of the actual direction The Directional Valid output will always be asserted except in the rare case where system voltage has gone to 0 for more than 30 cycles as pre viously described The 2 outputs can be combined in a ProLogic equation to e a secure reverse directional output from the L PRO for example Directional Element 9 SE Directional Valid Reverse Fault m Figure 4 9 Directional Element The default setting of the directional element in the L PRO should be correct for most applications The default settings enable both the negative sequence and zero sequence calculations with the minimum sensitivities as described There are some applications where it may be advisable to change the sensitiv ity thresholds for the negative sequence or zero sequence calculations or it may be desirable to disable one or both of these elements Selecting Directional Element Override Enabled allows user settings for the negative sequence and zero sequence directional elements The settings for the negative sequence voltage sensitivity and negative se quence current sensitivity should be normally higher than the maximum nega tive sequence quantities generated by unbalanced load These settings should also be low enough to maintain sensitivity for the minimum unbalanced fault
76. both sets of voltages to main and auxiliary inputs as detailed above Observe 25 27 59 Sync Check Low 6 Simultaneously rotate the auxiliary voltage phase angle in lagging direction i e toward 0 At 21 to 19 difference expect 20 25 27 59 High Contact 10 Closed after 200 ms 7 Slowly ramp down the auxiliary voltage magnitude At 41 0 to 39 0 V expect 40 V 25 27 59 Low Contact 10 Open 8 Slowly ramp up the auxiliary voltage magnitude At 69 0 to 71 0 V expect 70 V 25 27 59 Low Contact 10 Open 8 Turn all voltage sources off End of Sync Check test D02333R05 00 L PRO User Manual 2100 6 45 6 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 79 Recloser Test 6 46 Settings Number of Shots 4 First Reclose T1 2 0 seconds Second Reclose T2 4 0 seconds Third Reclose T3 6 0 seconds Fourth Reclose T4 8 0 seconds Close time Tp 0 3 second Lockout Reset TD 12 seconds Initiate Reset TDI 1 0 second Sync Control Enable Mode Main then Aux Block Reset TDB 1 0 seconds Follower Time TF 8 0 seconds Breaker Out Of Service TC 200 seconds Follower Sequencer Close after Recloser Follower Time Main Breaker EI Breaker Status a Aux Breaker EI2 Breaker Status a The following procedure allows you to test the Main and Auxiliary 4 shot re closers ending in 79 lockout e e e The only test equipment required for this test is a 125 Vdc supply Output Contact
77. cycle of selected curve Definite Overcurrent Timers 2 5 or 1 cycle non directional 2 5 or 1 5 cycle directional Frequency Timer 2 5 of set value plus 1 25 cycles to 1 75 cycles of inherent delay fixed level at 2x pickup error 40 ms df dt at 0 1 Hz s above pickup error 100 ms Burden AC Voltage Inputs lt 0 15 VA 69 volts AC Current Inputs lt 0 5 VA 5A D02333R05 00 L PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix A 3 Appendix A IED Specifications Distance Element Operating Time Curves at Nominal Frequency Figure A 1 on page 4 Figure A 3 on page 5 and Figure A 5 on page 6 show operating times for the L PRO Relay distance elements The diagrams show operating times at each test point including output contact operate time Faults were applied at a location representing a percentage of the Zone 1 relay reach setting Tests were performed for source impedance ratios SIR of 0 1 1 0 10 0 and 30 0 No pre fault load current or fault resistance was included Operating times are the same for both 50 Hz and 60 Hz L PRO Phase Mho Operating Times Phase to Phase Faults VU SIR 30 a SIR 10 A SIR 1 lt SIR 0 1 Time cycles o o o eo A 1 o N eo 0 20 40 60 80 100 Fault Location of Z1 Reach Figure A 1
78. definite time delay timer You can set this function to be an AND or OR logic The auxiliary undervoltage function operates exactly the same way as the main undervoltage function except that it uses the voltages from the auxiliary PT in puts Gate Switch Setting 27 Va Main 27 Vb Main 27 Vc Main nS Figure 4 15 27 Undervoltage 27 Undervoltage Main Enable disable Gate Switch AND or OR Pickup 1 0 to 120 0 volts secondary Pickup Delay 0 00 to 10 00 seconds Auxiliary Enable disable Gate Switch AND or OR Pickup 1 0 to 120 0 volts secondary Pickup Delay 0 00 to 10 00 seconds D02333R05 00 L PRO User Manual 2100 4 23 4 Protection Functions and Specifications 60 AC Loss of Potential 4 24 27 VLa 0 75 pu fixed 27 VLb 0 75 pu fixed 27 Vic 0 75 pu fixed 59 VLa 0 1 pu fixed 59 VLb 0 1 pufixed 59 VLc 0 1 pu fixed dVposidt gt 3Vicyde dVposidt lt 2Vicyde ABS dipos dt gt 0 1A cyde 50 Ipos 50310 50 ILA 4 nomina 50 ILB 4 nominal SO ILC 4 nomina Figure 4 16 Loss of Potential The L PRO distance elements 21P and 21N are supervised by both instanta neous non directional overcurrent and the loss of potential LOP logic to pre vent false trip due to the loss of potential where the phase distance elements are supervised by the delta current i e Ia Ib Ib Ic and Ic Ia and the ground distance elements are supervised by both the phase
79. front display of the relay or through Port 1 2 or the SCADA port Fault locator can be enabled disabled through settings system parameters The fault locator is initiated by the following logic 21 Trip 50N Trip e 51N Trip Scheme Trip 21 Alarm configurable L PRO User Manual 2100 4 33 4 Protection Functions and Specifications ProLogic 4 34 ProLogic Control Statements Using ProLogic L PRO can pick any of the protection functions external in puts or virtual inputs and place them into Boolean like statements ProLogic handles up to 5 functions to generate one ProLogic statement 12 statements are possible The results from these statements are mapped to output contacts using the output matrix Special ProLogic inputs are Communications receive input from ProLogic output Output relay 14 as an input to ProLogic The ProLogic control statements are used to create Boolean like logic The L PRO can use any of the protection functions or external inputs combined with logic gates to create a ProLogic control statement The possible gates are AND NAND OR NOR XOR NXOR and LATCH The control can be time delay pickup and or time delay dropout and can drive the front panel target LED Twelve ProLogic control statements outputs are available and can be used in the output matrix to customize the relay to your specific needs Inputs to Pro Logic are all the elements plus previous ProLogic statements for logic nesting u
80. in enabled 21P2 to 21P4 and then plus 8 cycles 8 cycle is the maximum breaker opening time This ensures that if 21P didn t trip on the phase phase ground fault for some reason we allow 21N to trip on this fault after this maximum blocking time de lay has expired Ground Indicator in 21P Event Message 310 is checked against the minimum of the following settings e 21N1 310 supervision when it s enabled 21N2 310 supervision when it s enabled 21N3 310 supervision when it s enabled 21N4 310 supervision when it s enabled 50N Pickup level when it s enabled 51N Pickup level when it s enabled 50N 67F when it s selected as Scheme Only or both ProLogic amp Scheme When 310 exceeds the minimum of the above values a ground indicator G is put in the 21P event messages e g 21P Trip ABG 123 1km When a fault occurs especially on a line with high source to impedance ratio SIR the CCVT secondary voltage can become quite different from the actual system voltage varying in both magnitude and phase due to the transient re sponse of the CCVT This transient response can cause device 21 overreach significantly A special CCVT transient compensation algorithm Patent Pend ing has been included in L PRO 2100 relay to address this issue The CCVT transient compensation algorithm uses a combination of techniques with digital filters vector averages and other means to rebuild the correct volt age from the trans
81. network connection to given point Exit network utilities Exit network utilities menu and return to Maintenance Menu Commands Accessible when equipped with internal Ethernet card 2 14 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 2 Setup and Communications Firmware Update D02333R05 00 The relay has an update login that can be accessed by a connection through a VT100 terminal emulator such as HyperTerminal This login is available only from Port 1 1 Use the terminal program to connect to Port 1 2 Select Enter the terminal responds with a login prompt Figure 2 8 Firmware Update Password Prompt 3 Login as update in lower case Relay responds with password prompt login update Last login Mon Nov 16 19 36 28 2015 on 1 dev ser1 Mon Nov 16 23 23 11 2015 Password Figure 2 8 Firmware Update Password Prompt 5 Enter password The firmware update is used to update the relay s software with maintenance or enhancement releases Please see the L PRO Firmware Update Procedure documentation that comes with the firmware update for instructions on how to update the firmware L PRO User Manual 2100 2 15 3 Using the IED Getting Started L PRO Line Protection Relay Relay Functional IRIG B Functional Service Required Test Mode Online Mode Terminal Mode Start up Sequence The following initialization sequence takes place Test Mode red LED on 2 seconds after power ap
82. of Potential 60 Loss of Potential Enable disable 11 Blocking 0 5 to 50 0 A secondary 5 A 0 1 to 100 0 A secondary 1 A 3lg Blocking 0 5 to 50 0 A secondary 5 A 0 1 to 100 0 A secondary 1 A L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 4 Protection Functions and Specifications If this function is enabled and an AC Loss of Potential takes place an output contact can be closed Loss of potential causes an alarm and distance elements will be blocked Pos itive and Zero sequence current settings provided will block this function for faults If voltage goes below 7596 nominal 49 8 volts and the currents ob tained do not exceed the settings the loss of potential will be initiated Note that the positive and zero sequence current blocking level should be set above the maximum line current This function is fast enough to provide blocking of the distance functions for schemes that use bus potential inputs that are sometimes transferred without the need for any external blocking inputs Logic Element 167 Description for details see Figure 4 16 Loss of Potential on page 4 24 When 50lpos or 50310 exceed their set point and go high 1 it will invert and block logic element 169 168 When one of the phase to ground potentials falls below 0 75 pu the logic ele ment s output is high 169 To declare a LOP this element must have a negative rate of change of positive sequence voltage b
83. of all External Inputs Output Contacts Displays the status of all Output Contacts Logic Protection displays the status of all internal logic ProLogic displays the status of all ProLogic Group Logic displays the status of all Group Logic and Active Setting Group Virtual Inputs displays the status of all Virtual Inputs UO I O metering shows the status of all external inputs and output contacts L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 4 Protection Functions and Specifications Protection and Recording Functions 21P Phase 21N Ground Distance Mho D02333R05 00 This section describes the equations and algorithms of the L PRO Relay pro tection functions All functions with time delay provide an alarm output when their pickup level is exceeded The following exceptions are 27 Auxiliary 27 Main 59 Auxiliary 59 Main 25 27 59 Sync Check 50LS Main 50LS Auxiliary SOBF Main 50BF Auxil iary 81 Frequency and ProLogic elements L PRO has 4 zones of phase and 4 zones of ground distance protection ele ments The 4 zones in the ground distance element 21N can be set to either a Mbo shape or quadrilateral shape for details see 21N Ground Distance Quad rilateral on page 4 5 Zones 3 and 4 are set in both the forward and reverse direction as required Set all the distance functions in secondary ohms The available range of impedance settings is based on the hardware capabilities of the relay and the nomina
84. or all requests that must be parsed by an Outstation The Response col umns identify all responses that must be parsed by a Master or all responses that may be sent by an Outstation NOTES The implementation table must list all functionality required by the device wheth er Master or Outstation as defined within the DNP3 IED Conformance Test Pro cedures Any functionality beyond the highest subset level supported is indicated by highlighted rows Any Object Groups not provided by an outstation or not processed by a Master are indicated by strikethrough note these Object Groups will still be parsed DNP Object Group amp Variation Request Response Outstation parses Outstation can issue Group Var T Function Codes v Function Codes Num Num Description dec Qualifier Codes hex dec Qualifier Codes hex 1 0 Binary Input Any Variation 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop 00 01 start stop 07 08 limited qty 17 28 index 1 1 Binary Input Packed format 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop 00 01 start stop 07 08 limited qty 17 28 index 1 2 Binary Input With flags 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop 00 01 start stop 07 08 limited qty 17 28 index 2 0 Binary Input Event Any Variation read 06 no range or all 129 response 17
85. phase polarizing voltage to Ph A 330 333 66 4 V Z0 Apply single phase current at line angle to Ph A 300 301 2 0 A Z 80 Observe 51 Pickup Alarm High Slowly ramp the current phase angle in negative direction i e more lag At 165 to 175 expect 170 51 Pickup Alarm Low Restore current to line angle 80 Observe 51 Pickup Alarm High Slowly ramp the current phase angle in positive direction 1 e less lag At 5 to 15 expect 10 51 Pickup Alarm Low Turn off voltage and current sources End of 50 51 test L PRO User Manual 2100 6 33 6 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 46 50 46 51 Negative Settings Sequence D cu Overcurrent Test Irec ona 46 51 Pickup 1 0A Time Curve IEEE Extremely Inverse A 5 64 B 0 02434 p 2 TMS 3 0 46 50 Directional Control If Directional T must be greater than 10 ms T Eni 288 0 Out 8 5ms N 0 arm Timer is active only if it s directional 46 51 Directional Control Grp 289 C m 4 Out 9 Figure 6 28 Negative Sequence Instantaneous and Time OverCurrent Logic 46 50 46 51 Note that positive sequence current SOILpos 4 of nominal current is nec essary to enable the directional element This supervision can be seen on OR 265 for details see for details see Figure 6 27 Directional Element Logic on page 6 32 For th
86. port None 20 000 L PRO Offliner for responses Fixed at 20 000 I Configurable range 1025 to 32737 Configurable selectable from Configurable other describe Use source port number 1 3 15 Multiple master I Supports multiple masters Outstations only Method 1 based L PRO Offliner connections If supported the following methods may be used on IP address Outstations Only I Method 1 based on IP address required I Method 2 based on IP port number recommended I Method 3 browsing for static data optional 1 3 16 Time synchronization DNP3 LAN procedure function code 24 support DNP3 Write Time not recommended over LAN Other explain I Not Supported D02333R05 00 L PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix F 7 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile o See If configurable 1 4 Link Layer Capabilities Current Value list methods 1 4 4 Data Link Address Fixed at 1 L PRO Offliner I Configurable range 1 to 65519 Configurable selectable from i Configurable other describe 1 4 2 DNP3 Source Address I Never Validation Always one address allowed shown in 1 4 3 Always any one of multiple addresses allowed each selectable as shown in 1 4 3 Sometimes explain 1 4 8 DNP3 Source Configurable to any 16 bit DNP Data Link NA Address es expected Address value when Validation is Configurable range to Enabled Configurable selectable from S C
87. that a latch or dropout timer should be used if the initiating condition does not last at least 0 5 seconds L PRO User Manual 2100 5 21 5 Offliner Settings Software Output Matrix zl Ble Edt Window Help IE olsa xele s g fg Ei Lj Identification Output Contact Block amp Initiate Recording Relay Device 1YI2T3T4T5TS T7 T8T8 0n 14 79B 9 BFI Fault Swing Anoa nps amx x 00000000 ojo 0 Oo x Ede puis arme O DL L D CIL OIL CIL OI CI CI CI ICTU TC RR DupikEanaps zwsme L 1 L1 DL DJ C1 C DJ CI CI CI O O O oO 0 peed hen aem O OOOO OO CRCSCRCHSCSSCH etting Groups Z X X OOOOOOOO0 oo O O x ee zesaem L1 LC C C C CIL CI CI CI NCIICONCOUNRIE T TN piensas RE d meram O L1 L D C1 C DJ CI CI CI EI E HEED E pod ag P zwmweljDuuuuuadgutcuec u CRCSCSCHRCSSCH SE 2 Trip DI QOOOO00000 OE fal n ans e x KOO Oo le CEDE CIE C DII EISEIREISX X Bu dici 21N4 Trip o0 g0 DIER DIE DIE 3 ET LET SE Ew OO eee mp Brom Eleng 2iNS Alem O ggaggguagdgiu a ZS Be Oe sees Ge CeCe ys Cet Settings S 2577159 Sync Check dC Seling Grup 2 ISeting o Ee ee r t7en PO Setina Grow S Seting Dee Eres CIL INC TL INCOC OM CORO eee m m m m m m Setting Group 4 Setting Group 4 lar COD DVC OTTO OD OC EI OT 0 oo Ei Setting Group 5 Setting Group 5 i m Setting Group 6 Setting Group 6 ff 53 Mein Overvaltage UE E ECO ET EI Gee ET EJ EET Bb E ET m
88. the Relay To retrieve records from the relay do the following 1 Start L PRO in Terminal Mode and login as view change or service 2 Navigate to Records List and press Enter a records list appears 3 Select Records using the space bar and select R You can also press Enter to retrieve a record directly The record will be saved in the directory spec ified by the terminal emulation program When using HyperTerminal if Use receiving protocol is set to Z modem with Crash Recovery file transfers are skipped by Hyper Terminal if the record already exists in the downloads folder When using HyperTerminal use Z modem no crash recovery files are received and auto incremented Delete Records from the Relay To delete records from the relay do the following 1 Start L PRO in Terminal Mode and login as view change or service 2 Navigate to Records List and press Enter 3 Select the records for deletion with the space bar and select D The selected records will be deleted Event Log The event log lists events stored in the relay A complete list of the types of events logged is available for details see Event Messages in Appendix D For protection logic elements the event 1s logged only when the element chang es from Low to High For External Inputs Virtual Inputs and Output Contacts all changes of state are logged Low to High High to Low Open to Closed Closed to Open If an event triggered a record
89. the fourth column of the ta bles below This document may be used to show the device capabilities the current value of each parameter or both If itis used to show the current values the third col umn should be filled in even if a fixed parameter is selected in the capabilities section NA may be entered for parameters that are Not Applicable If this document is used to show the current value of each parameter the Cur rent Value column applies to a single connection between a master and out station If configurable Software version string 1 1 Device Identification Capabilities Current Value 3 list methods 1 1 1 Device Function Master Master Outstation Outstation 1 1 2 Vendor Name NxtPhase T amp D Corporation 1 1 3 Device Name L PRO 2100 1 1 4 Device manufacturer s NA hardware version string 1 1 5 Device manufacturer s NA Device Profile Document Version Number V1 0 October 26 2007 DNP Levels Supported for D02333R05 00 Masters Only RequestsResponses None Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Outstations Only Requests and Responses None Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 L PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix F 1 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile 1 1 Device Identification Capabilities Current Value If configurable list methods 1 1 8 Supported Function Blocks Self Address Reservation Object 0 attribute objects Data Sets File Transf
90. to R3 ohms secondary RHS Binder Outer R3 R2 to R4 ohms secondary Inner R4 R3 to 100 0 ohms secondary 5 A R3 to 500 0 ohms secondary 1 A L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 4 Protection Functions and Specifications Dead Line Pickup D02333R05 00 When energizing a line that has been out of service the line may have a fault on it This function is called Dead Line Pickup or sometimes called switch on to fault Ifthe line potential is derived from bus PTs the distance relay function acts normal and operates for any fault that exists when the line is energized If the line uses line PTs the output of these line PTs is zero Because of this op eration of the line distance functions may be undefined To provide protection to detect faults when a line is first energized the dead line pickup function is involved 27 Vpos rm m 50ILa RMS nominal 50ILb RMS Dead Line Pickup Trip RMS fixed 50lLc RMS 50ILa RMS 50ILb RMS 50 Trip 50ILc RMS 50N Trip 50 310 e IL2a IL1a gnd harmonic ME ENTTETS IL2c IL1c 2nd Harmonic Restraint Enable Figure 4 13 Dead Line Pickup The Dead Line Pickup function uses voltage and current to determine whether the line is energized The logic diagram shows how the circuit actually works On energization the line voltage is zero allowing you to set the phase and neu tral overcurrent relay function to trip if a fault is present on the line These overcurrent functions mus
91. 0 4 Protection Functions and Specifications The ring filter is designed to adjust the center of the frequency response to ac count for small variations of the power system frequency When the measured voltage drops below 0 5 Vsec the ring filter explicitly uses the nominal system frequency as the center point of the bandpass filter During this condition or when the system frequency varies widely or rapidly as during out of step con ditions the ring filter could provide an incorrect output During these condi tions the 21P and 21N mho elements use the positive sequence voltage derived from the system voltage directly from the line VTs until the voltage output of the ring filter is correct If the measured positive sequence voltage is below 1 Vsec then the mho elements use the positive sequence voltage derived from the memory voltage The L PRO includes a directional element that directly supervises the Zone 1 and Zone 2 phase and ground distance elements the 50 51 67 50N 51N 67N 46 50 51 67 overcurrent elements and the 50N 67F and 50N 67R elements in the Communications Aided Tripping schemes The directional element consid ers negative sequence impedance zero sequence impedance or positive se quence impedance depending on relay settings and system conditions at the time of the fault The element declares a forward fault when the impedance de termined by the directional element is within 90 of the line impedance ix Forwar
92. 0 2001Dec17 17 09 23 19 Aux Reclose shot 1 2001Dec17 17 09 23 TP start PL9 2001Dec17 17 09 2001Dec17 2001Dec17 17 09 13 2001Dec17 17 09 13 52 1 52 H Trip amp 79 VIS 2001Dec17 05 33 52 1 Trip 2001Dec17 17 05 33 92 1 Trip 52 CS 2001Dec17 16 34 48 92 2 a status 2001Dec17 16 34 48 TP end PL10 2001Dec17 16 34 47 19 flux Reclose 2001Dec17 34 47 TP start PL9 2001Dec17 394 42 52 1 a status 17 Go to the Control Virtual Inputs and select 52 1 Close 52 CS using the Pulse On action for the virtual inputs This will close breaker 52 1 and after a fixed delay of 10 0 seconds breaker 52 1 will move back into the lead po sition and 52 2 follow breaker will move back into the follow position 18 Go to the Control Virtual Inputs and select 52 1 52 2 Trip amp 79T using the Pulse On action for the virtual inputs This will trip both breakers and ini tiate the reclosing sequence 19 After 52 1 closes and before 52 2 closes select 52 1 52 2 Trip amp 79T us ing the Pulse On action for the virtual inputs This will trip breaker 52 1 and cause a lockout alarm to be generated and block the follow breaker re close attempt 20 Check the event log and confirm the 79 Lead Lockout event and that there was no follow breaker reclose attempt 79 Lead Lockout The time equals time from 79 Initiate event to 79 Lead Lockout event approx TP 1 0s Main Menu User Access Level CHANGE 2002Sepi8 13 11 LPRO
93. 0 0 p 1 0 A TR 47 30 z 46 50 46 51 67 Negative Sequence Overcurrent 46 50 Enabled Directional Control forward Pickup 10 00 A 0 50 to 50 00 Pickup Delay 1 00 A 0 01 to 99 99 46 51 Enabled Directional Control forward Pickup 10 00 A 0 50 to 50 00 Curve Type IEC very inverse TMS 0 50 0 01 to 10 00 A 13 5 2 B 0 0 p 1 0 E TR 47 30 Z Circle Trigger Swing Trigger Disabled ve Seq Impedance 20 0 ohm 0 1 to 50 0 ProLogic 1 ProLogic 1 ProLogic 1 Disabled Target Enabled Pickup Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 D02333R05 00 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges L PRO Settings Summary Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt ProLogic 2 ProLogic 2 ProLogic 2 Disabled Target Enabled Pickup Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt ProLogic 3 ProLog
94. 0 0 degrees 0 1 0 0 20 I3b Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 0 21 13b Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 degrees 0 1 0 0 22 I3c Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 01 23 I3c Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 degrees 0 1 0 0 24 4a Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 0 25 14a Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 degrees 0 1 0 0 26 4b Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 0 27 4b Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 degrees 0 1 0 0 28 14c Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 01 29 14c Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 degrees 0 1 0 0 30 Bus Va Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 1 0 00001 1 0 0 0 KV 0 1 0 00001 31 Bus Va Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 degrees 0 1 0 01 32 Bus Vb Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 1 0 00001 1 0 0 0 KV 0 1 0 00001 D02333R05 00 L PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix F 23 Transmitted Value Scaling 3 Default Class Resolution S Assigned to GES 1 S Multiplier t pe t Name Everits Minimum Maximum default range Offset Units default Description o 1 2 3 or none maximal a 33 Bus Vb Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01
95. 0 D02333R05 00 D02333R05 00 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges L PRO Settings Summary Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 Pickup Delay 0 s 0 to 999 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt Group Logic 12 Group Logic 12 Group Logic 12 Disabled Setting Group to Activate none Pickup Delay 0 s 0 to 999 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt Group Logic 13 Group Logic 13 Group Logic 13 Disabled Setting Group to Activate none Pickup Delay 0 s 0 to 999 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt L PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix B 21 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Appendix B 22 L PRO Settings Summary Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 aaa Group Logic 14 Group Logic 14 Group Logic 14 Disabled Setting Group to Activate none Pickup Delay 0 s 0 to 999 Operator
96. 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt Group Logic 15 Group Logic 15 Group Logic 15 Disabled Setting Group to Activate none Pickup Delay 0 s 0 to 999 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt Group Logic 16 Group Logic 16 Group Logic 16 Disabled Setting Group to Activate none Pickup Delay 0 s 0 to 999 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 D02333R05 00 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges L PRO Settings Summary Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt L PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix B 23 Appendix C Hardware Description External Input and Comm Board Relay Output Board Power Supply Board AC Analog Input Board Main Processor Board MPB 486 CPU Board D02333R05 00 The L PRO is a sophisticated transformer protection relay with integral high quality fault recording The L PRO Relay has 9 c
97. 1 2 and 3 are configured as EIA RS 232 Data Communications Equipment DCE devices with female DB9 connec tors This allows them to be connected directly to a PC serial port with a stan dard straight through male to female serial cable for pin out for details see Communication Port Details on page 2 9 The relay s user interface 1s accessed through a standard VT 100 terminal em ulation program running on a PC To create a direct serial link between the re lay and your computer connect the serial cable provided between your computer s serial port and Port 1 on the relay s front panel Port 2 on the relay s rear panel can also be used for direct serial access provided the port is not con figured for modem use When connected run the terminal emulation software on your computer to establish the communication link for details see Using HyperTerminal to Access the Relay s User Interface on page 2 5 The relay s Modbus and DNP3 SCADA services can be accessed via a direct serial link to Port 3 on the relay s rear panel for details see Accessing the Re lay s SCADA Services on page 2 8 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 Modem Link External D02333R05 00 2 Setup and Communications Modem Cable as supplied with modem Analog Telephone Modem Adapter d ine Analog Port 2 Direct Modem Telephone Telephone System Desktop Computer Modem Adapter Supplied by ERLPhase DB 9 Male Male
98. 1 52 2 Trip amp 79 Y Figure L 22 ProLogic 3 52 2 Trip alalolo 2 o 2 o Circuit Breaker ProLogic statement 2 and 4 are used to provide a simulated logic point for the Simulator Logic circuit breaker contact a status The output of this logic is used as the input for the 52 Breaker Status see 79 Recloser Settings The 79 Main Reclose logic point and VI1 provide the close signal ProLogic 1 provides the trip signal The pickup and dropout time delays are used to simulate breaker tripping and closing times ProLogic 2 52 1 a status IV Enabled Name 52 1 a status NXOR Pickup Delay 020 seconds D Dropout Delay 020 seconds v Target Enabled Input A 79 Main Reclose x Input B VI 1 52 1 Close 52 CS x Input C PL 1 52 1 Trip Input D PL 1 52 1 Trip x Figure L 23 ProLogic 2 52 1 a Status 2 o 2 o lelel Appendix L 12 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 Appendix L L PRO Setting Example 52 2 a Status 0 20 0 20 v T AsRedoee 1352 2 Once 82 65 P RSR aasma Figure L 24 ProLogic 4 52 2 a Status Testing The 79 1 Apply the previous settings to the relay Recloser 2 Set PL9 to TeManRedse Z 79 Aux Reclose 4 Set PL6 to used for monitoring purposes not 79 Lockout 0 00 Si a 79 Lead Lockout 79 Follow Lockout 5 Clear the event log D02333R0
99. 1 0 0 0 degrees 0 1 0 01 34 Bus Vc Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 1 0 00001 1 0 0 0 KV 0 1 0 00001 35 Bus Vc Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 degrees 0 1 0 01 36 Pos Seq Fre 2 0 Configurable 0 01 0 001 1 0 0 0 Hz 0 01 0 001 quency 37 P 2 0 Configurable 0 1 0 00001 1 0 0 0 MW 0 1 0 00001 38 Q 2 0 Configurable 0 1 0 00001 1 0 0 0 Mvar 0 1 0 00001 39 Pos Seq Voltage 2 0 Configurable 0 1 0 00001 1 0 0 0 KV 0 1 0 00001 40 Pos Seq Current 2 0 Configurable 1 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 01 41 Not used 2 0 0 1 0 0 0 NA NA Retained for legacy applica ions 42 Not used 2 0 0 1 0 0 0 NA NA Retained for legacy applica ions 43 Not used 2 0 0 1 0 0 0 NA NA Retained for legacy applica ions 44 Not used 2 0 0 1 0 0 0 NA NA Retained for legacy applica ions 45 Not used 2 0 0 1 0 0 0 NA NA Retained for legacy applica ions 46 Not used 2 0 0 1 0 0 0 NA NA Retained for legacy applica ions 47 Not used 2 0 0 1 0 0 0 NA NA Retained for legacy applica ions 48 Not used 2 0 0 1 0 0 0 NA NA Retained for legacy applica ions 49 Not used 2 0 0 1 0 0 0 NA NA Retained for legacy applica ions 50 Not used 2 0 0 1 0 0 0 NA NA Retained for legacy applica ions 51 Not used 2 0 0 1 0 0 0 NA NA Retained for legacy applica ions 52 Not used 2 0 0 1 0 0 0 NA NA Retained for legacy applica ions 53 Active Setting 2 1 8 1 0 0 0 NA 1 0 Group Number 54 Fault Information
100. 10 s TED w swen 070 12 Spare 12 010 s 13 Spare 13 040 s 14 Spare 14 0410 e Note The dropout time of contacts assigned to Scheme Send is overridden by TD3 L PRO Offliner Settings v10 Figure 5 8 Output Contacts 5 Offliner Settings Software A The Output Contacts are also identified during the setting procedure using meaningful names The dropout delay time settings are made here Output Contact Names Outputs 1 to 14 21 User defined Dropout Timer 0 00 to 1 00 s L PRO User Manual 2100 5 9 5 Offliner Settings Software Virtual Inputs DI Bile Edit Window Heb eju x e e m E Identification O Relay Virtual Input Names Analog Inputs f External Inputs C Output Contacts 4 Virtual input 1 41 Virtual input 11 a Virtual input 21 tel 2 Virtual input 2 12 Virtual Input 12 22 Virtual input 22 3 Virtual input 3 43 Virtual input 13 23 Virtual input 23 Record Length 4 Virtual input 4 44 virtual Input 14 24 Virtual input 24 EIL Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 virtual input 5 45 Virtual input 15 25 Virtual Input 25 Line Parameters il Ir L d 2t Shane Sekator amp Virtual input 6 46 Virtual Input 16 26 Virtual input 26 Breaker Status 7 Virtual input 7 47 Virtual Input 17 a7 Virtual input 27 EL Protection Functions 8 Virtual Input amp 48 Virtual Input 1
101. 14 831 0 Off inactive On active Group Logic 15 832 0 Off inactive On active Group Logic 16 833 0 Off inactive On active 79 Initiated 834 0 Off inactive 1 On active L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 D02333R05 00 Appendix E Modbus RTU Communication Protocol Read Coil Status Function Code 01 79 Blocked 835 0 Off inactive On active 50BF 1 Main 836 0 Off inactive On active 50BF 2 Main 837 0 Off inactive On active 50BF 1 Aux 838 0 Off inactive On active 50BF 2 Aux 839 0 Off inactive On active 79 Main Reclose 840 0 Off inactive 1 On active 79 Aux Reclose 841 0 Off inactive On active 79 Lead Lockout 842 0 Off inactive On active 79 Follow Lockout 843 0 Off inactive 1 On active 81 1 Trip 844 0 Off inactive On active 81 2 Trip 845 0 Off inactive On active 81 3 Trip 846 0 Off inactive On active 81 4 Trip 847 0 Off inactive On active 50BF Initiate 848 0 Off inactive On active ProLogic 11 849 0 Off inactive 1 On active ProLogic 12 850 0 Off inactive 1 On active Read Input Status Function Code 02 Channel Address Value External Input 1 0001 0 Off inactive 1 On active Externa
102. 2 Low 3 Ramp up the voltage frequency At 60 499 to 60 501 Hz 50 499 to 50 501 Hz for 50 Hz relay 81 1 High 81 2 Low Contact 8 Closed 4 Ramp down the voltage frequency At 59 501 to 59 499 Hz 49 501 to 49 499 Hz for 50 Hz Relay 81 1 Low 81 2 High Contact 8 Closed 5 Turn voltage source off 81 Rate of Change df dt Test Procedure 1 In Terminal Mode access relay Metering gt Logic gt Protection gt Logic Monitor 81 3 Trip Contact 9 2 Apply single phase nominal voltage to the L PRO terminals Ph A 330 333 66 4 V 60 Hz 50 Hz for 50 Hz Relay 81 3 Low 81 4 Low 3 Ramp the frequency at a rate of 0 99 Hz s for a duration of 2 seconds Observe 81 3 Low 81 4 Low Contact 9 Open 4 Restore nominal frequency 5 Ramp the frequency at a rate of 1 01 Hz s for a duration of 2 seconds Observe 81 3 High 81 4 Low Contact 9 Closed L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 D02333R05 00 6 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 6 Restore nominal frequency 7 Ramp the frequency at a rate of 0 99 Hz s of a duration of 2 seconds Observe 81 3 Low 81 4 Low Contact 9 Open 8 Restore nominal frequency Ramp the frequency at a rate of 1 01 Hz s for a duration of 2 seconds Observe 81 3 Low 81 4 High Contact 9 Closed 81 Timing Test Procedure Monitor Timer Stop on Output Contact 8 81 1 2 Set timer start on instantaneous frequency shift 66 4 V 60 Hz to 60 6 Hz tran
103. 2 0 65 535 1 0 0 0 NA 1 0 See description below on DNP Time High 16 how to access Fault Informa bits tion 55 Fault Information 2 0 65 535 1 0 0 0 NA 1 0 DNP Time Middle 16 bits 56 Fault Information 2 0 65 535 1 0 0 0 NA 1 0 DNP Time Low 16 bits 57 Fault Information 2 0 Configurable 0 1 0 0 Configura 0 1 Fault Distance ble 58 Fault Information 2 0 15 D 0 0 NA 1 0 Type 59 la Summated Mag 2 0 Configurable 1 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 01 nitude 60 la Summated 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 degrees 0 1 0 01 Angle 61 b Summated Mag 2 0 Configurable 1 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 01 nitude 62 Ib Summated 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 degrees 0 1 0 01 Angle 63 Ic Summated Mag 2 0 Configurable 1 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 01 nitude 64 Ic Summated 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 degrees 0 1 0 01 Angle Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile Transmitted Value Scaling x E Default Class Resolution Assigned to ai 1 a Multiplier d mrs t Name Events Minimum Maximum default range Offset Units default Description E 1 2 3 or none maximal a Theminimum and maximum transmitted values are the lowest and highest values that the outstation will report in DNP analog input objects These values are integers if the outstation transmits only integers If the outstation is capable of transmitting b
104. 2333R05 00 L PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix F 25 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile Object 110 and 111 are Octet String Object used to provide access to the Event Log text of the relay Object 110 always contains the most recent event in the relay Object 111 1s the corresponding change event object As stated in the DNP specifications the variation of the response object repre sents the length of the string The string represents the ASCII values of the event text The first two characters in the string can be used to quickly identify fault location events Fault locator events begin with the characters FL 0x46 0x4C hex The following example shows a fault distance event re turned through either of the octet string objects Event Message FL2000Sep21 20 16 16 966 21P1 AB 1 0km Trip DNP Octet string object components 0x46 Ox4C 0x32 0x30 0x30 030x 0x53 0x65 0x70 0x32 0x31 0x20 0x32 0x30 Ox3A 0x31 0x36 Ox3A 0x31 0x36 0x2E 0x39 0x36 0x36 0x20 0x32 0x31 0x50 0x31 0x20 0x41 0x42 0x20 0x31 0x2E 0x30 0x6B 0x6D Ox3A 0x20 0x54 0x72 0x69 0x70 Appendix F 26 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 Implementation Table Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile The following implementation table identifies which object groups and varia tions function codes and qualifiers the device supports in both requests and re sponses The Request columns identify all requests that may be sent by a Master
105. 28 index 07 08 limited qty 2 1 Binary Input Event Without time read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index 07 08 limited qty 2 2 Binary Input Event With absolute read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index time 07 08 limited qty I resp 2 3 Binary Input Event With relative read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index time 07 08 limited qty I resp 10 0 Binary Output Any Variation 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop 00 01 start stop 07 08 limited qty 17 28 index 10 2 Binary Output Output Status with 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop flag 00 01 start stop 07 08 limited qty 17 28 index eee 12 1 Binary Command Control relay 3 select 17 28 index 129 response Echo of request output block CROB 4 operate 5 direct op 6 dir op no ack D02333R05 00 L PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix F 27 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile DNP Object Group amp Variation Request Response Outstation parses Outstation can issue Group Var ant Function Codes Function Codes T8 Num Num Description dec Qualifier Codes hex dec Qualifier Codes hex 20 0 Geunter Any Variation 1 read 06 no range o
106. 3 Zone 3 Phase to ground compensated impedance Forward 17 7002 780 x 1 5697 3 5 27 76Q 276 5 Reverse 0 50 07 100 x 1 5697 3 5 0 78Q2 103 5 Compensated 21N4 Zone 4 phase to ground compensated impedance Forward 0 must be 0 for POTT Scheme Reverse 4 72 07 100 x 1 569 2 3 5 7 4007 103 5 OUT 21P3 21P4 21N2 21N3 21N4 46 50 DLPU STrip Send 68 681N 27 59 81 1 46 51 25C 51 OUTER 27 59 Main Aux 51N 21P2 50BF 50BF 50LS 50N 81 2 81 3 50 PLI pio 60 ep Aust Aux2 SOBF ls SE L PRO 2100 SIMPLIFIED REAR VIEW Auxilliary Line Currents Auxilliary Voltages Main Line Currents 324 325 326 327 OOOO For Prot Sync Rec These Currents only required for Ring Bus Application Regulated Voltage and Current Source Figure 6 8 Suggested Test Connections for Acceptance Tests 6 8 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 D02333R05 00 6 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide Where each test specifies Metering Logic you view the following terminal screens the Protection Logic is broken up into 2 screens to allow all elements to be displayed LPRO Unit ID ROGOL logic Protection User Access Level SERUICE 2002Aug1 89 18 prey menu Logic 2 Alarms S BF Main 1 21P2 Pickup S BF Main 2 21P3 Pickup S BF Aux 1 21P4 Pickup S BF fiux 2 81 0 F 1 21N2 Pickup 81 0 F 2 21N3 Pickup 81 U F 1 21N4 Pickup 81 U F 2 51 Pickup DeadLine Pickup LOW SiN
107. 4 52 1 A Y This symbol denotes a function which has not been enabled and is treated as a logic zero input PL 3 ProLogic 3 CPL 4 ProLogic 4 PL 5 ProLogic 5 CPL 6 ProLogic 6 J PL 7 ProLogic 7 PL 8 ProLogic 8 PL 9 ProLogic 3 PL 10 ProLogic 10 C Group Logic C Output Matrix Settings Summary O Setioa Groun 2 1Settine L PRO Offliner Settings v9 Figure 5 22 ProLogic Apply ProLogic to multiple inputs to create an output based on qualified in puts ProLogic enables up to 12 ProLogic control statements and programs those logics to output contacts You can name the function being created and set a pickup and dropout delay Start with input A by selecting any of the relay functions using the list for up to 5 possible inputs Put these inputs into AND NAND OR NOR XOR NXOR and LATCH logics by clicking on the gate Invert the input by clicking on the input line The output of ProLogic 1 can be nested into ProLogic 2 and so forth If de scribed you can illuminate the front target LED on operation of this function by enabling this feature The operation of the ProLogic statements are recorded in the events log This logic shows on the view fault records The 16 Group Logic statements reside in a slower processing thread within the relay protection algorithms The processing cycle happens once every half sec ond 0 5 s When using ProLogic statements you must keep in mind
108. 4 A 7 C Protection Functions o Z Circle Trigger Bvg Aux Voltage B 182 Aux Line Current B 4 Current 4 B C ProLogic BYG Aux Voltage C ICZ Aux Line Current C 1c4 Current 4 C Settings Summary C Setting Group 2 Setting Group 2 amp Setting Group 3 Setting Group 3 Setting Group 4 Setting Group 4 iting Group 5 Setting Group 5 Setting Group 6 Setting Group 6 E Setting Group 7 Setting Group 7 1 Setting Group 8 Setting Group 8 A L PRO Offliner Settings v8 Figure 5 6 Analog Inputs Analog Input Names screen identifies all the ac voltage and current inputs to the relay These names appear in any fault disturbance records the relay pro duces L PRO User Manual 2100 5 7 5 Offliner Settings Software 5 8 Analog Inputs Main Voltage LVA LVB LVC Main Current LA1 LB1 LC1 Aux Voltage BVA BVB BVC Aux Current IA2 IB2 IC2 Current IA3 IB3 IC3 IAM IBA IC4 External Inputs i File Edit Window Help n Dlelgl seS E Identification O Relay O Analog Inputs external inputs C Output Contacts Virtual Inputs Setting Groups System Parameters Record Length Ei Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 Line Parameters O Scheme Selector O Breaker Status SI Protection Functions O Z Circle Trigger C ProLogic Group Logic O Output Matrix O Settings Summary Setting Group 2 Setting Group 2 Se
109. 4 V 2 120 Ph N 333 3 Connect 3 phase current sources 4 24 A lagging voltages by 80 to the L PRO terminals Ph A 300 301 4 24 A Z 80 Ph B 302 303 4 24 A Z 200 Ph C 303 304 4 24 A 2 40 Observe 21P1 Trip Low 4 Simultaneously reduce 3 phase voltages At 21 0 to 19 0 V expect 20 0 V 21 Trip High Note that Contact 1 will probably close earlier than 21 1 Trip going high because Z2 and Z3 trip elements are mapped to the same output contact and the length of time this fault will be ap plied 6 12 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 21P2 Phase Distance Test D02333R05 00 6 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide Testing the Zone 1 Phase Time Delay 1 Monitor Timer Stop on normally open Output Contact 1 202 203 2 Set timer to start from 3 phase amp current transition i e current off to on 3 Apply keep on balanced 3 phase voltages 20 0 V to the L PRO termi nals Ph A 330 20 0 V Z0 Ph B 331 20 0 V Z 120 Ph C 332 20 0 V 2 120 Ph N 333 4 Apply 3 phase currents from 0 to 5 3 A to start the timer this is 8096 of Zone 1 Reach 64 of the line 12 4 miles Ph A 300 301 5 3 A Z 80 Ph B 302 303 5 3 A Z 200 Ph C 303 304 5 3 A 2 40 Expect operating time less than 1 3 cycles with CCVT algorithm dis abled End of 21P1 test Zone 2 Phase Under Impedance tested as 2 phase fault Settings Positive Sequence Secondary Line Impedance 100
110. 5 00 L PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix L 13 Appendix L L PRO Setting Example 6 Check the metering screen for ProLogic 52 1 and 52 2 should be low LPRO Unit ID UnitID Metering Logic User ficcess Level SERVICE 2001Dec17 16 18 prev menu Protection Setting Group Virtual Inputs ProLogic ProLogic Name State 1 52 1 Trip LOW 2 52 1 a status LOW 3 52 2 Trip LOW A 52 2 a status LOW 5 not 52 1 and 52 2 LOW 6 not 79 Lockout LOW E not Sync Check LOW 8 ProLogic 8 LOW 9 TP start LOW 10 TP end HIGH KF3 gt Quit lt F2 gt Freeze 7 Check the metering screen for Protection All 79 logic points should be low User Access Level SERUICE Logic Protection prev menu 20803May22 89 35 s Unit ID UnitID Logic 1 Logic 2 Other Logic 252759 Sync Check 27 Main U U 27 fiux U U 59 Main Ou 59 Aux 0 U S BF Initiate S LS Main S LS Aux 79 Initiated 79 Blocked 79 Lead Lockout 79 Follow Lockout 79 Main Reclose 79 Aux Reclose Com Scheme Send F3 gt Quit lt F2 gt Freeze Other Logic Z Circle Trigger Self Check Fail 8 Go to the Control Virtual Inputs and close 52 1 and 52 2 using the Pulse On action for the virtual inputs This will activate ProLogic 2 and 4 LPRO Unit ID UnitID Util Maintenance User flccess Level SERVICE prev menu Calibrate Outputs Control Virtual Inputs 2001Dec17 16 17 Erase Control Virtual Inputs Input Na
111. 5 of the L PRO relay is used to simulate the Main Breaker a Contact and Output Contact 6 is used to simulate the Aux Breaker a Contact The Main Breaker Status is monitored by External Input 1 and Auxiliary Breaker Status is monitored by External Input 2 Output 7 is used to simulate a protection operation It supplies a trip command via External Input 3 and initiates the 79 operation Connect a 125 Vdc supply to the L PRO relay output and input terminals as shown in for details see Figure 6 36 Test Connections for 4 Shot Recloser Test on page 6 46 OUT5 210 OUT 6 K OUT 7 amp 214 52a 52a Trip 211 213 215 100 102 104 EI EI2 EI3 Main Aux Trip and 79 Initiate Breaker Status Breaker Status 104 e 103 105 Figure 6 36 Test Connections for 4 Shot Recloser Test L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 D02333R05 00 6 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide ProLogic equations are used to activate and supervise the 79 test functions Normally each of these ProLogic equations would not be set to target but for this type of acceptance testing it s convenient for seeing operations as they happen Details of ProLogic Equations for this 79 Test Example ProLogic 1 This equation activates the reclose sequence It sets the breaker status closes Out 5 via ProLogic 3 ve ve M VI 2 SCADA Close Bkr 14 naue Figure 6 37 Simulating Main Breaker Close Command using Vir
112. 50BF Setting Group 3 tests elements 25 27 59 Sync Check 79 81 The file demonstrates all types of impedance characteristics available in the L PRO circle tomato lens quadrilateral Virtual Inputs are used to perform some input functions and demonstrate their use In addition to or exclusive of these tests you may wish to perform dynamic simulation tests on the L PRO to verify the relay operates as per protection scheme design using the settings that are applied for the particular line on which the L PRO will be installed L PRO User Manual 2100 6 5 6 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide Impedance Characteristics Available in L PRO Mho and Quadrilateral Reactive X Reactive X Forward Forward Characteristic Angle 90deg Angle lt 90deg Characteristic Figure 6 4 Mho Circle Characteristic Angle Reverse Directional 90 Available for 21P and 21N Supervision Figure 6 5 Mho Tomato Characteristic Angle lt 90 Available for 21P and 21N Reactive X Reactive X Forward Forward R1 T Resistive R2 CHARACTERISTIC Revere Directional ANGLE gt 90 Deg Supervision Figure 6 7 Quadrilateral Available for 21N Only Resistive R Reverse Directional Servet Figure 6 6 Mho Lens Characteristic Angle gt 90 Available for 21P and 21N 6 6 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 6 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide Basic Testing Calcul
113. 79 Aux Reclose lt shot 15 R 2082Sepi8 13 06 20 156 TP start PL 208028epi8 13 06 15 123 52 1 a status PL2 280802Sepi8 13 06 15 023 TP end PL18 2082Sepi8 13 06 14 923 79 Main Reclose lt shot 15 R5 28828epi18 13 06 14 923 IP start PL 2082Sepi8 13 06 04 704 52 2 Trip PL3 2082Sepi8 13 06 04 704 79 Initiated High 2082Sepi8 13 06 04 704 52 1 Trip PLA 2082Sepi8 13 06 04 702 52 1 52 2 Trip amp 9 UIS 2882Sepi8 13 84 19 884 79 Initiated High 28082Sepi8 13 84 19 882 Manual 79I UI6 2662Sepi8 13 03 50 723 not 79 Lockout PL6 n 14 Go to the Control Virtual Inputs and select 52 1 Trip 52 CS using the Pulse On action for the virtual inputs This will trip breaker 52 1 and after timer TC 52 2 follow breaker will move into the lead position 15 Go to the Control Virtual Inputs and select 52 1 52 2 Trip amp 791 using the Pulse On action for the virtual inputs This will trip breaker 52 2 and initi ate the reclosing sequence Appendix L 16 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 D02333R05 00 Appendix L L PRO Setting Example 16 Check the event log and confirm that only 52 2 breaker reclosed and was in the lead position Confirm that 52 1 breaker did not receive any reclose attempts LPRO Unit ID UnitID Main Menu User Access Level SERVICE 2001Dec17 17 10 ID Settings Metering Records Utilities Access Quit Event Log 2001Dec17 17 09 24 92 2 a status PL4 2001Dec17 17 09 24 TP end PL1
114. 790 0 and AngleDiff C 790 0 BG Fault AngleDiff B 45 0 and AngleDiff C 790 0 and AngleDiff A 290 0 CG Fault AngleDiff C 45 0 and AngleDiff A 790 0 and AngleDiff B 790 0 In the above criteria only one can become true at a time They are used to su pervise 21N A 21N B 2IN C respectively L PRO User Manual 2100 4 11 4 Protection Functions and Specifications 4 12 Angle Relationship of Negative and Zero Sequence Currents The angle comparison scheme is used to determine the faulty phase and the fault type The negative sequence 12 and zero sequence I0 current phase an gle relations are listed in the following table AG BG CG BCG ABG CAG Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Angle Diff between I2A and 10 0 120 120 0 120 120 Angle Diff between I2B and 10 120 0 120 120 120 0 Angle Diff between I2C and IO 120 120 0 120 0 120 Phase Selector Criteria for I2 and 10 The following criteria is used to determine the fault type and phase AG Fault AngleDiff A 25 0 BG Fault AngleDiff B 25 0 CG Fault AngleDiff C 25 0 Though AG type of fault will be declared for a BCG fault by the above angle criteria between I2 and I0 the characteristic of AG impedance prevents AG from tripping because the phase selector is used for supervision only i e the phase selector is not a tripping device Device 21P Supervision A 21P supervision logic is formed based on the above Phase Selector Criteria The pha
115. 8 28 Virtual Input 28 Elz orcs goar g Virtual input 9 49 Virtual input 19 29 Virtual input 29 E O ProLogic E O Group Logic 40 Virtual input 10 20 Virtual input 20 30 Virtual input 30 C Output Matrix O Settings Summary E O Setting Group 2 Setting Group 2 E Setting Group 3 Setting Group 3 E Setting Group 4 Setting Group 4 E Setting Group 5 Setting Group 5 E Setting Group 6 Setting Group 6 E O Setting Group 7 Setting Group 7 E O Setting Group 8 Setting Group 8 L PRO Offliner Settings v8 Figure 5 9 Virtual Inputs Virtual Inputs Virtual Inputs 1 to 30 User defined The relay can control its internal functions and connected devices both locally and remotely Thirty general purpose logic points are accessible via DNP3 and the terminal UI The 30 virtual inputs are individually controlled and include a set reset and pulse function The latch state 1s retained during setting changes and relay power down conditions The 30 virtual inputs conform to DNP3 standards Use the DNP3 functions such as SBO select before operate Direct Operate or Direct Operate with no acknowledge to control virtual inputs Use virtual inputs to control circuit breakers enable or disable reclosing enable or disable under frequency load shedding change setting groups provide interlocking between local remote supervisory control 5 10 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 D02333R05 00 Setting Groups L PR
116. 9 ERL L PRO Line Protection Relay Model 2100 2100E User Manual Version 5 0 Rev 0 Preface Information in this document is subject to change without notice 2015 ERLPhase Power Technologies Ltd All rights reserved Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of ERLPhase Power Technologies Ltd 1s strictly forbidden This manual is part of a complete set of product documentation that includes detailed drawings and operation Users should evaluate the information in the context of the complete set of product documentation and their particular applications ERLPhase assumes no liability for any incidental indirect or consequential damages arising from the use of this documentation While all information presented is believed to be reliable and in accordance with accepted engineering practices ERLPhase makes no warranties as to the completeness of the information All trademarks used in association with B PRO Multi Busbar Protection F PRO iTMU L PRO ProLogic S PRO T PRO TESLA I O Expansion Module TESLA Control Panel Relay Control Panel RecordGraph and RecordBase are trademarks of ERLPhase Power Technologies Ltd Windows is a registered trademark of the Microsoft Corporation HyperTerminal is a registered trademark of Hilgraeve Modbus is a registered trademark of Modicon Contact Information D02333R05 00 ERLPhase Power Technologies Ltd Website www erlphase com Email info ge
117. 9 Minimum Maximum default range Offset Units default Description E 1 2 3 or none maximal 1 Line Va Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 degrees 0 1 0 0 2 Line Vb Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 1 0 00001 1 0 0 0 KV 0 1 0 00001 3 Line Vb Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 degrees 0 1 0 0 4 Line Vc Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 1 0 00001 1 0 0 0 KV 0 1 0 00001 5 Line Vc Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 degrees 0 1 0 0 6 Line la Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 0 Y Line la Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 degrees 0 1 0 0 8 Linelb Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 0 9 Line Ib Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 degrees 0 1 0 0 10 Line Ic Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 01 11 Line Ic Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 degrees 0 1 0 0 12 12a Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 0 13 12a Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 degrees 0 1 0 0 14 I2b Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 0 15 I2b Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 degrees 0 1 0 0 16 De Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 01 17 I2c Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 degrees 0 1 0 0 18 13a Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 0 19 13a Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0
118. Address E 6 1 Port 200 L PRO Offliner Settings v12 4 Figure 5 12 SCADA Communication The L PRO relay has configurable SCADA communication parameters for both Serial Port 3 and Ethernet TCP and UDP For DNP3 Level 2 TCP up to three independent Masters are supported L PRO User Manual 2100 5 13 5 Offliner Settings Software DNP Configuration Point Map DNP Configuration Class Data 5 14 L PRO Offliner Settings Document 1 LZ File Edit window Help EC Identification C Relay Analog Inputs External Inputs C Output Contacts O Virtual Inputs Setting Groups C System Parameters SCADA Communication EC DNP Configuration Ill Point Map C Class Data C SCADA Settings Summary C Record Length E Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 C Line Parameters C Scheme Selector C Breaker Status C Directional Element O Protection Functions O Z Circle Trigger C ProLogic C Group Logic 1 Output Matrix Settings Summary Setting Group 2 Setting Group 2 Setting Group 3 Setting Group 3 Setting Group 4 Setting Group 4 Setting Group 5 Setting Group 5 Setting Group 6 Setting Group 6 1 Setting Group 7 Setting Group 7 O Setting Group 8 Setting Group 8 oleja e s Ex amp fa Group Name Point List Mapped To Binary Inputs External Input 1 External Input 2 External Input 3 External Input 4 External Input 5 External Input 6
119. B phase terminals All un used single phase inputs must be grounded for proper operation L PRO Offliner Settings Document 1 ioj x E Ele Edit window Help laj x Dlelgl tHe 5 ff EL Identification CE C Relay SCADA Communication C Analog Inputs E External Inputs IED Address 1 e Parity Output Contact 9200 z De put Cor s ier Baud Rate od C Virtual Inputs Setting Groups Serial Port 3 Data Link Timeout ms Oto disable C Eve C Modbus ASCII None Modbus RTU Point Map C DNP3 Level 2 Ie O Class Data Keep Alive Timeout 0 5 Oto disable SCADA Settings Summary Ethernet Network Port ee aes O Record Length DNP3 Level 2 TCP RE EM Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 C DNP3 Level 2 UDP Ur C Line Parameters Source Port of Reque C Scheme Selector C Breaker Status Connection Based On Directional Element Numer ot Masters 2 z p adrese C Protection Functions IER NET O Z Circle Trigger 2 ProLogic Master 1 C Group Logic C Output Matrix IPAddress 172 16 1 1 Port 20000 Settings Summary 7 Setting Group 2 Setting Group 2 Master 2 amp amp Setting Group 3 Setting Group 3 C Setting Group 4 Setting Group 4 IPAddress 172 16 1 2 Port 20000 C Setting Group 5 Setting Group 5 C Setting Group 6 Setting Group 6 p Master 3 C Setting Group 7 Setting Group 7 10 Setting Group 8 Setting Group 8 IP
120. Block tun ing 171 off D02333R05 00 L PRO User Manual 2100 4 25 4 Protection Functions and Specifications 81 Frequency 4 26 The relay has 4 frequency devices available Each frequency element can be set to operate either at a fixed level of under frequency a fixed level of over frequency or at a rate of change level df dt The df dt function can be set to operate for a positive rate of change or a negative rate of change Each frequency element has a definite time delay setting to create a time delayed output A fixed level of positive sequence volt age of 0 25 pu provides an undervoltage inhibit on each element Frequency all Ie Figure 4 17 Frequency Fixed Level df dt Mme urn Ie Figure 4 18 Frequency Rate of Change 81 Over Under Frequency 81 1 Disabled Fixed Level Rate of Change Pickup 50 000 to 59 995 or 60 005 to 70 000 fixed level 10 0 to 0 1 or 0 1 to 10 0 rate of change Pickup Delay 0 05 to 99 99 seconds fixed level 0 20 to 99 99 seconds rate of change 81 2 Disabled Fixed Level Rate of Change Pickup 50 000 to 59 995 or 60 005 to 70 000 fixed level 10 0 to 0 1 or 0 1 to 10 0 rate of change Pickup Delay 0 05 to 99 99 seconds fixed level 0 20 to 99 99 seconds rate of change 81 3 Disabled Fixed Level Rate of Change Pickup 50 000 to 59 995 or 60 005 to 70 000 fixed level 10 0 to 0 1 or 0 1 to 10 0 rate of change Pickup Delay 0 05 to 99 99 seconds
121. D3 Stretches the Scheme Send signal to ensure that it s received by the remote end relay Set longer than the channel pickup delay Notes Security Margin 0 5 to cycle or a percentage of total expected time to account for errors in scheme timing assumptions Parallel Line applications fault contribution can come from unfaulted line appearing as a Zone 2 fault at one end and zone 4 reverse fault at the other end Depending on the location of the fault on the faulted line and which breaker clears first the current may change direction and the 2 ter minals on the unfaulted line may change state from forward to reverse and reverse to forward The unfaulted line contribution may come either end on a networked system D02333R05 00 L PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix L 21 Index D02333R05 00 Numerics 21N ground distance 4 1 21P phase distance 4 1 25 27 59 sync check 4 28 46 50 51 67 negative sequence overcurrent 4 31 50 51 67 phase overcurrent 4 29 50BF breaker failure 4 28 50LS low set overcurrent 4 29 50N 51N 67 neutral overcurrent 4 30 5 21 59 overvoltage 4 22 4 23 60 loss of potential 4 32 5 21 68 out of step 4 32 79 recloser 4 20 81 frequency 4 26 81 over under frequency 5 21 A ac and dc wiring 7 1 access 3 15 active group 3 11 alarm 3 3 analog input 3 11 5 7 B backward compatibility 5 4 Base MVA 5 13 Baud rate direct serial link 2 7 modem link 2 7 C calibrate 3 14 6 2 calib
122. E Setting Groupi Se n7 amp L Setting Grourgs Setting Group 8 Station Name Station Number Location Station Name Location Line L PRO Offliner Settings v9 Unique relay serial number Nominal System Frequency set to either 50 Hz or 60 Hz Nominal CT Sec Current set to either 1Ao0r5A Figure 5 5 Relay Identification The first screen presents all the menu items in the left menu tree Access the menu items by clicking the tabs at the top of the screen or the item on the left menu tree Identification Settings Version Indicates the settings version number fixed Ignore Serial Number Bypass serial number check if enabled Serial Number Available at back of each relay Relay ID User defined up to 20 characters Nominal CT Format 5Aor1A Nominal System Frequency 60 Hz or 50 Hz Comments User defined up to 20 characters Setting Software Setting Name User defined up to 20 characters Date Created Modified Indicates the last time settings were entered Station Station Name User defined up to 20 characters Station Number User defined up to 20 characters Location L PRO User Manual 2100 User defined up to 20 characters D02333R05 00 D02333R05 00 5 Offliner Settings Software Equipment Protected User defined up to 20 characters Impo
123. Figure 2 2 External Modem Link Using an external modem you can also access the relay s user interface through a telephone link between the relay and your computer Connect the serial port on the external modem to the Port 2 on the relay s rear panel Both devices are configured as RS 232 DCE devices with female con nectors so the cable between the relay and the modem requires a crossover and a gender change Alternatively you can use the ERLPhase modem port adapter provided with the relay to make Port 2 appear the same as a PC s serial port A standard modem to PC serial cable can then be used to connect the modem and the relay For pin out details see Communication Port Details on page 2 9 Connect the modem to an analog telephone line or switch using a standard RJ 11 connector You must appropriately configure the relay s Port 2 to work with a modem Log into the relay through a direct serial link go to the Utilities gt Setup gt Ports screen and set Port 2 Modem option to Yes Set the Baud Rate as high as pos sible most modems handle 57 600 bps The Initialize setting allows you to set the control codes sent to the modem at the start of each connection session The factory defaults are MOSO 0 amp B1 for an external modem and MOS0 0 for an internal modem L PRO User Manual 2100 2 3 2 Setup and Communications Modem Link Internal Network Link 2 4 Analog Analog Port 5 RJ 11 modem Tel
124. Input A El 1 Selector 1 e Input B El 2 Selector 2 Input C El 3 Selector 3 Input D PL 8 Block Group Logic d Input E El 4 43CS Local Remote Figure L 12 Group Logic 11 Out EI 1 low El 2 high and El 3 high Group Logic 10 Go to Group 6 IV Enabled Name Goto Group 6 AND Setting Group to Activate SG 6 Setting Group 6 hd CUR UCET Pickup Delay 5 seconds DN NE 1 1 reg Al a Setor vj Input B szmeesez zl Input C eisisetector3 v Input PL 8 Block Group Logic Y Input E El 4 43CS Local Remote Figure L 13 Group Logic 10 o o o Out D02333R05 00 L PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix L 7 Appendix L L PRO Setting Example EI 1 high El 2 high and El 3 high Group Logic 9 Go to Group 8 v Enabled Setting Group to Activate Name Goto Group 8 AND SG 8 Setting Group 8 K Pickup Delay 5 seconds alalolo jojojo joj jo Input A El 1 Selector 1 Input B El 2 Selector 2 D Input C El 3 Selector 3 D Input D PL 8 Block Group Logic D Out Input E El 4 43CS Local Remote Figure L 14 Group Logic 9 Qualily Group L to You can select from any available ProLogic inputs to make specific blocking Qu LOUP Logic logic to be used as a qualifier for any group logic decisions In this example we use either the zone 1 or zone 2 phase distance elements or th
125. J 45 IRIG B Wiring D02333R05 00 The relay s three serial ports Ports 1 2 and 3 are configured as EIA RS 232 Data Communications Equipment DCE devices with female DB9 connec tors This allows them to be connected directly to a PC serial port with a stan dard straight through male to female serial cable For pin out details see Communication Port Details on page 2 9 An adapter is available for connecting an external modem to Port 2 For details see Modem Link External on page 2 3 The relay may have an optional internal modem or an optional internal 10BaseT Ethernet port Connection to either of these is via the relay s Port 5 RJ 45 receptacle Labeling above the port will indicate which option if any has been installed The relay accepts both modulated and unmodulated IRIG B standard time sig nals with or without the IEEE 1344 extensions The IRIG B connector on the back of the relay is BNC type L PRO User Manual 2100 7 1 8 Cyber Security System Access Control and Authorisation Access to L PRO is protected by login name and password Each login name is associated with an Access Level Section 3 Terminal Mode provides de tails on the Access Levels and login names Password Password maximum length is 22 characters Password may contain Complexity e Lower case letters a z e Upper case letters A Z e Numeric characters 0 9 Special characters as follows
126. L REN EE NE E E E C C TL rr Q A E 21N Zone 4 Enabled 68 Off Dead Line Pickup Enabled Weak Infeed Enabled 25 Sync Check Enabled Dead Main Live Aux DMLA Enabled Live Main Dead Aux LMDA Enabled Dead Main Dead Aux DMDA Enabled 79 Enabled 59 Main Enabled 59 Aux Enabled 27 Main Enabled 27 Aux Enabled 60 Enabled 81 1 Fixed Level 81 2 Fixed Level 81 3 Rate of Change 81 4 Rate of Change 50LS Main Input 1 Enabled 50LS Aux Input 2 Enabled 50LS Input 3 Enabled 50LS Input 4 Enabled 50BF Main Enabled 50BF Aux Enabled 50 Enabled 51 Enabled 50N Enabled 51N Enabled 46 50 Enabled 46 51 Enabled 21P Phase Distance Zone 1 21P Zone 1 Enabled Forward Reach 11 52 ohm 0 05 to 66 00 Mho Char Angle 90 0 deg 70 0 to 140 0 Pickup Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 0 20 Delta Current Supervision 5 0 A 0 2 to 50 0 21P Phase Distance Zone 2 21P Zone 2 Enabled Forward Reach 17 28 ohm 0 05 to 66 00 Appendix B 6 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 D02333R05 00 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges L PRO Settings Summary Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 Mho Char Angle 90 0 deg 70 0 to 140 0 Pickup Delay 0 40 s 0 00 to 2 00 Delta Current Supervision 5 0 A 0 2 to 50 0 21P Phase Distance Zone 3 21P Zone 3 Enabled Forward Reach 28 80 ohm 0 05 to 66 00 Revers
127. Logic 25127159 Sync Check Exin C Output Matrix 25 Sync Check T so IR L Settings Summary IF Dead Main Live Aux SONIS 5 Setting Group 2 Setting Group 2 C Live Main Dead Aux MEME 0 Setting Group 3 Setting Group 3 Dead Main Dead Aux T em T sin C Setting Group 4 Setting Group 4 C Setting Group 5 Setting Group 5 58 Overvotage 48 50 51 Neg Seq Overcurrent C Setting Group 6 Setting Group 6 Mein ms 4550 l 4551 C Setting Group 7 Setting Group 7 C Setting Group 8 Setting Group 8 27 Undervoltage 81 OveriUnder Frequency Main IT Aux 81 1 Disabled 81 2 Disstiea zl B1 3 Disabled hd 81 4 Disabled L PRO Offliner Settings v9 s Figure 5 21 Protection Functions For a detailed description see Protection Functions and Specifications on page 4 1 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 ProLogic Group Logic D02333R05 00 5 Offliner Settings Software L PRO Offliner Settings Document 1 E E Ele Edit Window Help le Gleis Asile ProLogic 1 ProLogic 1 Enabled Name ProLogic 1 E C Identification Pickup Delay 000 s S O Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 Line Parameters C Scheme Selector Breaker Status E Protection Functions C Z Circle Trigger EX ProLogic C System Parameters Record Length Dropout Delay 000 s v Target Enabled HeFe metaf ammo zl mm InutE 1
128. Magnitude 40257 KV 10 Line Va Angle 40258 Degrees 10 Line Vb Magnitude 40259 KV 10 Line Vb Angle 40260 Degrees 10 Line Vc Magnitude 40261 KV 10 Line Vc Angle 40262 Degrees 10 Line la Magnitude 40263 A 1 Line la Angle 40264 Degrees 10 Line Ib Magnitude 40265 A 1 Line Ib Angle 40266 Degrees 10 Line Ic Magnitude 40267 A 1 Line Ic Angle 40268 Degrees 10 Da Magnitude 40269 A 1 Da Angle 40270 Degrees 10 12b Magnitude 40271 A 1 I2b Angle 40272 Degrees 10 I2c Magnitude 40273 A 1 12c Angle 40274 Degrees 10 13a Magnitude 40275 A 1 13a Angle 40276 Degrees 10 I3b Magnitude 40277 A 1 I3b Angle 40278 Degrees 10 I3c Magnitude 40279 A 1 I3c Angle 40280 Degrees 10 l4a Magnitude 40281 A 1 l4a Angle 40282 Degrees 10 l4b Magnitude 40283 A 1 14b Angle 40284 Degrees 10 L PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix E 5 Appendix E Modbus RTU Communication Protocol Channel Address Units Scale l4c Magnitude 40285 A 1 l4c Angle 40286 Degrees 10 Bus Va Magnitude 40287 KV 10 Bus Va Angle 40288 Degrees 10 Bus Vb Magnitude 40289 KV 10 Bus Vb Angle 40290 Degrees 10 Bus Vc Magnitude 40291 KV 10 Bus Vc Angle 40292 Degrees 10 Not used 40293 Not used 40294 Not used 40295 Not used 40296 Not used 40297 Not used 40298 Not used 40299 Not used 40300 Not used 40301 Not used 40302 Not used 40303 Not used 40304 PosSeq Fr
129. Manual 2100 Appendix F 9 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile 1 6 Fill Out The Following iconfidurable Items For Outstations Capabilities Current Value 5 g list methods Only 1 6 1 Timeout waiting for None 5 000 ms Application Confirm of I Fixed at 5 000 ms solicited response Configurable range to ms message Configurable selectable from ms Configurable other describe Variable explain 1 6 2 How often is time IX Never needs time synchronization Within seconds after IIN1 4 is set required from the Periodically every seconds master 1 6 3 Device Trouble Bit Never used IIN1 6 IX Reason for setting Unable to access requested data or execute CROB assuming a valid request has been received 1 6 4 File Handle Timeout I Not applicable files not supported Fixedat ms Configurable range to ms Configurable selectable from ms Configurable other describe Variable explain 1 6 5 Event Buffer Overflow Discard the oldest event Behaviour I Discard the newest event Other explain 1 6 6 Event Buffer Single buffer for the Object Groups 2 and 32 size Organization 200 Separate buffer for the Object Group 111 size 100 Separate buffer for the Fault Locator events size 100 1 6 7 Sends Multi Fragment I Yes Responses No 1 6 8 DNP Command Assign Class Not supported Settings preserved Analog Deadbands through a device reset Data Set Prototypes
130. O 1 operates and if the received per missive transfer trip signal from L PRO 2 still exists the POTT scheme on L PRO 1 will trip breaker 1 To prevent this unwanted tripping on the parallel line the L PRO relay has current reversal logic The L PRO current reversal logic prevents the false trip during this current reversal condition Gate 116 of the functional logic diagram and timer TL1 and TDI stretch the zone 4 logic and block the POTT scheme from tripping the breaker or sending the transfer trip signal to the remote end L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 Appendix L L PRO Setting Example Communication The basic selection does not provide any communication aided logic for local aided Tripping or remote protections Scheme Timer Considerations Week Infeed Enable Switch 51NAlam e SONG7F e 21P2 DD 21N2 Trip Figure L 26 Communication aided Scheme D02333R05 00 L PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix L 19 Appendix L L PRO Setting Example Appendix L 20 L PRO Scheme Timers Summary DCB Scheme Timers Timer Considerations TD2 Upon receipt of a Blocking Signal at the local end from the remote end TD2 extends the Blocking Sig nal to prevent a Scheme Trip The Blocking Signal should be extended by Time for the local 21 2 to de assert 1 cycle Blocking Signal Channel Reset Time i e the time for the removal of the Block to propagate from the remote en
131. O Offliner Settings Document 1 EM Identification O Relay L Analog Inputs External Inputs Coup Contacts 0 System Parameters 0 Record Length E C Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 7 Line Parameters Protection Functions OZ Circle Trigger LJ Prologic EL Group Logic Figure 5 10 Setting Groups 5 Offliner Settings Software Setting Groups Setting Groups 1 to 8 L PRO User Manual 2100 User defined 5 11 5 Offliner Settings Software System Parameters 5 12 Lot Us vun muer um amp 9 RS E Dell Afs Identification System Parameters O Relay C Analog Inputs External Inputs Bess MVA wes Output Contacts Virtual Inputs Phase Rotation ABC v Setting Groups Aux Voltage Input 3 Phase item Parameters V Target Latching On global IV Fault Location Display Fault Location Initiated by 21 Alarm Record Length zT ume pena Setting Group 1 Setting Group 4 Setting Group 2 Setting Group 2 Main CT Turns Ratio L Setting Group 3 Setting Group 3 Auxiliary CT Turns Ratio C Setting Group 4 Setting Group 4 g Ring Bus Configuration Aux CT Line Input 240 00 1 For Protection and Recording 300 00 1 For Protection and Recording 40000 1 For Recording and ProLogic Input 500 00 4 For Recording and ProLogic Input E E x x 1 7 Setting Group 5 Setting Group 5 S E E Current Input 3 CT
132. Overvoltage 4 22 L PRO provides overvoltage protection from both the bus and line PTs These functions are definite time delay functions Gate Switch Setting 59 Va Main 59 Vb Main 59 Vc Main S Figure 4 14 59 Main Overvoltage The definite time delay main overvoltage function similar to the undervoltage function looks at all 3 phase to neutral voltages This function uses the RMS voltages to make this determination of overvoltage and is settable to an AND or OR logic The auxiliary overvoltage function operates exactly the same way as the main overvoltage function except that it uses the voltages from the auxiliary PT in puts 59 Overvoltage Main Enable disable Gate Switch AND or OR Pickup 1 0 to 138 0 volts secondary Pickup Delay 0 00 to 10 00 seconds Auxiliary Enable disable Gate Switch AND or OR Pickup 1 0 to 138 0 volts secondary Pickup Delay 0 00 to 10 00 seconds L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 4 Protection Functions and Specifications 27 Main Auxiliary L PRO provides undervoltage protection from both the bus and line PTs Undervoltage These functions are definite time delay functions The definite time main undervoltage function looks at the phase to neutral voltage of all 3 phases to determine an undervoltage condition The fundamen tal RMS voltage is used for this calculation If any of the phase to neutral volt ages Is below the set value the function starts the
133. POE 0 ZOE LOC 00 _ L E G our Deel mcm SLD eur V V Appendix l 1 L PRO User Manual 2100 Figure 1 1 L PRO AC Schematic D02333R05 00 Appendix J DC Schematic Drawings 5A Supply ML NE Relay Standard Output Relay Contacts All Chassis Inoperative 200 202 24 op 208 210 212 214 216 ls Les Les 224 226 228 Aa NC out GI ou On Om om GI ou om Doug Out Dm Dun outta 1 201 208 205 207 209 2n 213 215 217 Is m pe 225 227 229 Sm A A S Optional Output Relay Contacts 4U Chassis 335 422 424 426 428 430 432 434 Dous Ote Out7 Outi8 Outo Ouz0 Ou2t 425 425 427 420 491 438 435 5A Supy 3 Standard Extemal Inputs All Chassis 0100 Zem 0104 910 7108 0110 Zem 014 0116 O G ol ol Am Ans oj 17 Optional Extemal Inputs 4U Chassis K 0400 7402 Fo404 Fo406 9408 Fo410 9412 tem tem Toi 9420 b401 H e bas o Notes 1 IRIG B and comm ports shown separately on L PRO rear panel layout drawing 2 All output relays can be programmed to operate on any relay function 3 All outputs are rated tripping duty interrupting via breaker aux a contact Figure J 1 L PRO DC Schematic D02333R05 00 L PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix J 1 Appendix K Function Logic Diagram Diagram in plastic sleeve D02333R05 00 L PRO User Manual 2100 Append
134. Pickup Con Scheme LOW a Pickup or 68 OutBlinder LOW 68 InnBlinder LOW u 68 Out of Step LOW F3 gt Quit lt F2 gt Freeze LPRO Unit ID ROBBAL Logic Protection User Access Level SERUICE 2062Aug19 89 06 prev menu Logic 1 Logic 2 Other Logic Other Logic 252759 Sync Check Z Circle Trigger 27 Main U U LO 27 Aux U U 59 Main 0 U 59 Aux 0 U 5BBF Initiate 5BLS Main 5BLS Aux 79 Initiated 79 Blocked 79 Lead Lockout 79 Follow Lockout 79 Main Reclose 79 Aux Reclose Com Scheme Send F3 gt Quit lt F2 gt Freeze Figure 6 9 Logic Metering Screens L PRO User Manual 2100 6 9 6 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 60 Loss of Potential Settings LOP Test Voltage 0 75 per unit phase to neutral fixed In this case minimum op erate 0 75 per unit 0 75 Vnominal 0 75 66 4 V 49 8 V 1 Blocking 10 0 A positive sequence current that blocks LOP if exceed ed 310 Blocking 1 0 A zero sequence current that blocks LOP if exceeded 27 VLa 0 75 pu fixed 27 Vb 0 75 pu fixed 27 Vic 0 75 pu fixed 59 VLa 0 1 pu fixed 59 VLb 0 1 pu fixed 59 VLc 0 1 pu fixed deelt gt 3Vioyde dVpos dt 3V cyde ABS dlpos at gt 0 1A cyde 50 Ipos 50310 50 ILA 4961 nominal 50 ILB 4 nominal 50 ILC 4 nominal Figure 6 10 Loss of Potential Logic 60 60 Test Procedure 1 In Terminal Mode access relay Metering gt Logic gt Pro
135. RIG B Functional Service Required Test Mode Alarm Online Mode Terminal Mode L PRO User Manual 2100 1 1 1 Overview In offline mode you can use Offliner Settings and RecordBase View software to create and review relay settings analyze fault waveforms store records In addition to the protection functions L PRO provides fault recording 96 samples cycle to facilitate analysis of the power system after a disturbance has taken place The triggers for fault recording are established by programming the output matrix and allowing any internal relay function or any external input to initiate recording Bus2 Bus 1 Rr EL a i ul 24 AA ia PT 50 67 51 67 51N 46 50 46 51 p MM 50N S 3 BEA 21N 68 e e e pe Rec 4 Zones 4 Zones Dead hd 50 Line 52 1 BF iP uuo Pickup d 27 E 52 2 5 60 81 W D GLA CEJ 59 27 Swing Recording Fault Recording Lina PT 6Analog 9 External 14 Output Contacts Positive Sequence Voltage 6 Voltages Currents Inputs 1 Relay Inoperative Positive Sequence Current 12 Currents Alarm Contact System Frequency Protection Elements SSS SSS EE ea ES I External Inputs Optional UO 111 External 7 Output Contacts i Active Setting Group I Inputs Figure 1 1 L PRO Function Line Diagram Front View G9 L PRO Relay Functional Line Protection Relay Model 2100 IRIG B Functional te amp Vi Service Required Dat en View Time Readings Logs Prev
136. Ranges Appendix B 16 L PRO Settings Summary Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt ProLogic 10 ProLogic 10 ProLogic 10 Disabled Target Enabled Pickup Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt ProLogic 11 ProLogic 11 ProLogic 11 Disabled Target Enabled Pickup Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt ProLogic 12 ProLogic 12 ProLogic 12 Disabled L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 D02333R05 00 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges L PRO Settings Summary Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 Target Enabled Pickup Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Oper
137. Ratio C Setting Group 6 Setting Group 6 Current Input 4 CT Retio C Setting Group 7 Setting Group 7 Setting Group 8 Setting Group 8 PT Turns Ratio Main PT Turns Ratio Auxiliary PT Turns Ratio Une TI CCVT Transient Compensation on All 21 Devices 200000 4 For Protection and Recording 200000 4 For Protection and Recording Line to Line Voltage Distance Unit km 230 00 Ky Pri L PRO Offliner Settings v10 Figure 5 11 System Parameters System Parameters System Parameters Base MVA 1 00 to 1000 00 MVA primary Target Latching On global Enable disable Phase Rotation ABC or ACB Aux Voltage Input 3 phase 1 phase Fault Location Initiated by 21 Alarm Enable disable CT Turns Ratio Ring Bus Configuration Aux CT Line Enable disable Input Main CT Turns Ratio 1 00 to 1000 00 For protection and recording Aux CT Line Input Enable disable Auxiliary CT Turns Ratio 1 00 to 10000 00 For protection and recording Current Input 3 CT Ratio 1 00 to 10000 00 For recording and ProLogic Current Input 4 CT Ratio 1 00 to 10000 00 For recording and ProLogic PT Turns Ratio Main PT Turns Ratio 1 00 to 20000 00 For Protection and Record ing Auxiliary PT Turns Ratio 1 00 to 20000 00 For protection and recording Line Line to Line Voltage 1 00 to 1000 00 kV Primary
138. Settings Offliner disabled Weak Infeed Test Procedure 1 Activating this Virtual Input by accessing the L PRO Terminal Mode Util ities Maintenance Control Virtual Inputs 2 Press the lt Enter gt or the lt Space gt keys to scroll Virtual Inputs to the Input Name PerTripRec Simulate Virtual Input 13 3 Press the lt Arrow gt key to activate the action section Select the Pulse On option 4 Press the lt F2 gt Key to execute the PerTripRec Simulate as shown in the following screen shot LPRO Unit ID R00001 Util Maintenance User Access Level SERVICE 2002Aug15 09 054 prev menu Calibrate Outputs iR RULES Frase r Control Virtual Inputs Input Name Action PerTripRec Simulate KF3 gt Quit lt F2 gt Execute Figure 6 17 Virtual Input Control HyperTerminal Observe Relay Target POTT Trip WI 0 0 mi Note The 0 0 mi indicates that there was 0 impedance measured due to 0 line voltage being applied End of Weak Infeed test L PRO User Manual 2100 6 21 6 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide Dead Line Pickup Dead Line Pickup operates on 3 basic conditions Taai 1 Zero Positive Sequence Polarizing Voltage 27Vpos for at least 2 seconds prior to line energization 2 Zero Current less than 496 of nominal prior to the application of the fault i e line goes from dead to energized state 50ILa b c 3 Instantaneous Phase or Neut
139. The equation and the pa rameters of Device 50 51 67 are listed below Table 4 1 IEC and IEEE Curves No Curve Type A B p TR 1 IEC Standard Inverse 0 14 0 00 0 02 13 5 2 IEC Very Inverse 13 50 0 00 1 00 47 3 3 IEC Extremely Inverse 80 00 0 00 2 00 80 4 IEEE Moderately Inverse 0 0103 0 0228 0 02 0 97 5 IEEE Very Inverse 3 922 0 0982 2 00 4 32 6 IEEE Extremely Inverse 5 64 0 0243 2 00 5 82 7 User defined 0 001 1000 0 0 10 0 0 01 10 0 0 1 100 For I gt pickup For I lt pickup TU TMS B S T D TMS R Pickup Pickup 50 51 67 Phase Overcurrent 50 Enable disable Directional Forward reverse or non directional Pickup 0 50 to 50 00 5 A 0 10 to 10 00 1 A Pickup Delay 0 00 to 99 99 seconds non directional 0 01 to 99 99 seconds directional 51 Enable disable Directional Forward reverse non directional Pickup 0 50 to 50 00 5 A 0 10 to 10 00 1 A Curve Type For details see for details see Table 4 1 IEC and IEEE Curves on page 4 29 TMS 0 01 to 10 00 A 0 0010 to 1000 0000 0 0000 to 10 0000 p 0 10 to 10 00 TR 0 10 to 100 00 L PRO User Man ual 2100 4 29 4 Protection Functions and Specifications 50N 51N 67 Neutral Overcurrent 4 30 Neutral overcurrent provides backup protection for line to ground faults You can define forward reverse or non directional control on either 50N or 51N functio
140. Tp is used for the delay Note Tp is the setting which is less than 20ms could be Oms The threshold is equal to 2 PickupLevel if pickup is between 40 Inominal and Inominal i e between 2A and 5A for SACT The threshold is equal to 40 Inominal if 2 PickupLevel 40 INominal The threshold is equal to Inominal if 2 PickupLevel gt Inominal Directional overcurrent elements use the same directional element as the mho distance elements Overcurrent elements will operate depending on directional setting and fault direction when the directional element has a valid output If the directional element can not declare a valid direction overcurrent elements will operate as non directional elements See Directional Element on page 4 7 Figure 4 21 Z Circle Trigger Z Circle Trigger Z Circle Trigger Enable disable Positive Sequence Impedance 0 1 to 50 0 ohms secondary 5 A 0 5 to 250 0 ohms secondary 1 A The Impedance Circle Trigger Z Circle Trigger triggers the relay to record on a dynamic swing disturbance only used to trigger a recording This trigger is usually set outside the last protection zone used and blocked during LOP con ditions L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 Fault Locator D02333R05 00 4 Protection Functions and Specifications Whenever a fault occurs and the line trips the fault locator calculates the fault type and the distance to the fault This information is available from the
141. Unit ID UnitID P Settings Metering Records Utilities Access Quit Event Log TIME 2662Sep18 11 12 79 Lead lockout High 2882Sep18 11 11 79 Initiated High 2882Sep18 2 11 11 52 2 Trip PL3 2882Sep18 11 11 52 1 Trip PLi 208028ep18 e 52 1 52 2 Tr ip amp 79 UI5 208028ep18 11 08 at PL2 2062Sep18 11 88 d PL18 2882Sep18 11 07 79 Main Reclose lt shot 1 gt R5 28828ep18 11 807 TP start PL9 28828ep18 716 57 79 Initiated High 20828Sep18 18 57 T 20802Sep18 28828ep18 L PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix L 17 Appendix L L PRO Setting Example Communication aided Tripping Schemes Current Reversal Logic example Appendix L 18 21 Go to the Control Virtual Inputs and select 52 1 Close 52 CS using the Pulse On action for the virtual inputs This will close breaker 52 1 and after a fixed delay of TD seconds the recloser will reset L PRO 2 Figure L 25 Current Reversal Logic example L PRO Relays are installed and provide line protection by the tripping Breaker 1 and Breaker 2 respectively A ground fault occurs at location F in the par allel line Initially 21N2 of L PRO 2 picks up and sends a permissive transfer trip signal to L PRO 1 Since L PRO 1 detects a reverse fault 21N4 picks up it neither trips the breaker nor sends a permissive transfer trip signal When breaker 3 opens due to a zone trip the current reversal condition oc curs on L PRO 1 If the 21P2 on L PR
142. a status PL2 2003May22 09 40 31 731 52 1 Close 52 CS UI1 High amp C DOWN move one line P age doun T Top B Bottom L PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix L 15 Appendix L L PRO Setting Example 12 Go to the Control Virtual Inputs and select 52 1 52 2 Trip amp 79I using the Pulse On action for the virtual inputs This will trip both breakers and ini tiate the reclosing sequence LPRO Unit ID UnitID Util Maintenance User Access Level SERVICE 2001Dec1 16 32 prev menu Calibrate Outputs RPM REUS Erase Control Virtual Input Input Name fiction 92 1 52 2 Trip amp 91 Latch Off KF3 gt Quit F2 Excecute 13 Check the event log and confirm that 52 1was the first breaker and 52 2 was the second breaker Check open interval time and follower time the close pulse can be measured from the time between PL9 and PL10 going high T1 Open interval time equals time from 79 Initiate event to 79 Main Re close shot 1 event TP Close pulse time equals time from TP start PL9 event to TP end PL10 event TF Follow breaker time equals time from 52 1 a status PL2 event to 79 Auxiliary Reclose shot 1 event Main Menu User Access Level CHANGE 208028ep18 13 06 ID Settings Metering Records Utilities Access Quit ist Unit ID Unit ID Event Log ME 2002Sep18 13 06 20 356 52 2 a status PL4 208028epi8 13 06 20 256 TP end PL18 20802Sepi8 13 06 20 156
143. abled looks at the voltage steady state angle between the bus and the line PT voltage If this angle is within a plus minus specified value 1 to 50 degree magnitude range of setting available the function enables a definite time delay pickup user selectable 0 to 10 00 seconds after which time an output is produced The line sync reference voltage is taken from a bus source L PRO can bring one single phase to neutral voltage Logic within the relay allows the single phase quantity to be either A B or C phase All unused single phase inputs must be grounded for proper operation The Dead Main Live Auxiliary Live Main Dead Auxiliary and Dead Main Dead Auxiliary logic functions use fixed values of main and auxiliary positive sequence secondary voltages to determine the sync check condition The volt age is fixed at 20 volts secondary voltages below 20 volts are declared a dead state and voltages above 20 volts are declared a live state When enabled this function checks that the voltage angle between the line PT and bus PT are within a specified value You can use this function to ensure that closing a line to a system will result in acceptable power flow The func tion uses positive sequence voltage and therefore can accommodate single phase sources as well as 3 phase sources If a single phase source is used it must be connected to the corresponding phase designation on the relay input For example If only a B phase bus PT is av
144. active On active ProLogic4 802 0 Off inactive On active ProLogic5 803 0 Off inactive On active ProLogic6 804 0 Off inactive On active ProLogic7 805 0 Off inactive On active ProLogic8 806 0 Off inactive On active ProLogic9 807 0 Off inactive On active ProLogic10 808 0 Off inactive On active 68 OutBlinder Alarm 809 0 Off inactive 1 On active 68 InBlinder Alarm 810 0 Off inactive 1 On active 27 Main Trip 811 0 Off inactive 1 On active 27 Aux Trip 812 0 Off inactive 1 On active 59 Main Trip 813 0 Off inactive 1 On active 59 Aux Trip 814 0 Off inactive 1 On active 50LS Main 815 0 Off inactive On active 25 27 59 Sync Check 816 0 Off inactive 1 On active 50LS Aux 817 0 Off inactive On active Group Logic 1 818 0 Off inactive On active Group Logic 2 819 0 Off inactive On active Group Logic 3 820 0 Off inactive On active Group Logic 4 821 0 Off inactive On active Group Logic 5 822 0 Off inactive On active Group Logic 6 823 0 Off inactive On active Group Logic 7 824 0 Off inactive On active Group Logic 8 825 0 Off inactive On active Group Logic 9 826 0 Off inactive On active Group Logic 10 827 0 Off inactive On active Group Logic 11 828 0 Off inactive On active Group Logic 12 829 0 Off inactive On active Group Logic 13 830 0 Off inactive On active Group Logic
145. aided logic for local or remote protections Figure 4 23 Communication aided Scheme D02333R05 00 L PRO User Manual 2100 4 41 4 Protection Functions and Specifications POTT Logic 4 42 The POTT logic is used for tripping schemes where the local end over reaches the remote end for forward fault conditions for details see Figure 4 23 Com munication aided Scheme on page 4 41 The local end sends a permissive trip signal to the remote end when one ofthe forward directional elements operates The scheme send signal permissive transfer trip send is time delayed by timer setting TL3 the local end is required to sense a forward fault for durations greater than TL3 The local end does not produce a scheme trip output unless the remote has detected a forward directional fault and sends the similar per missive trip signal to the local end The local end senses a permissive trip re ceive signal and the scheme trip closes the output contacts and removes the fault contribution from the local end The remote end acts in a similar fashion and the fault contribution is removed from the remote end Current reversal logic guards against incorrect permissive tripping for installa tions with parallel lines where one end of the un faulted line is contributing fault current and the other end of the un faulted line is over reaching and send ing a permissive trip signal The local reverse directional elements are used with the permissive receive sig
146. ailable it should be connected to the relay input B phase terminals In this example the voltage and angle limit is 20 degrees with no pickup or drop out delay The Dead Main Live Auxiliary Live Main Dead Auxiliary and Dead Main Dead Auxiliary logic functions use fixed values of main and auxiliary positive sequence secondary voltages to determine the sync check condition The volt age is fixed at 20 volts secondary Voltages below 20 volts are declared a dead state and voltages above 20 volts are declared a live state 25 27 59 Sync Check 25 Sync Check Enable disable Maximum Voltage 60 0 to 138 0 volts secondary Minimum Voltage 40 0 to 69 9 volts secondary Angle Difference 1 0 to 50 0 degrees Pickup Delay 0 00 to 10 00 seconds Main Aux Enable Dead Main Live Aux DMLA Enable disable Enable Live Main Dead Aux LMDA Enable disable Enable Dead Main Dead Aux DMDA Enable disable L PRO User Manual 2100 4 19 4 Protection Functions and Specifications 79 Recloser 4 20 The relay has a dedicated auto reclosure logic function The recloser supports up to 4 shots of reclosing with complete ring bus circuit breaker control with or without synchronism check supervision or dead bus dead line Lead and fol low breaker settings combined with out of service timers for each breaker are used to create flexible configuration options The output matrix is used to map the inputs and outputs ofthe 79
147. assword Figure 2 6 Maintenance Password Prompt 5 Enter password 6 A menu appears as below 2 12 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 2 Setup and Communications L PRO 2100 System Utility v1 4 ERLPhase Power Technologies Ltd Customer support 204 477 0591 support erlphase com Modify IP Address subnet mask and default gateway if applicable View system diagnostics Retrieve system diagnostics Restore ALL default settings including calibration xRestore only default configuration settings channel definitions device settings Restore only default system setup ports time settings Force hardware reset Network utilities if qpplicable Monitor SCRDR i Enoble Disable Internal Modem if one exists xit port 1 access only Please enter a command 1 11 Maintenance Menu Commands D02333R05 00 Figure 2 7 Maintenance Menu Please enter a command 1 11 1 Modify IP Address subnet mask and default gateway if applicable 2 View system diagnostics 3 Retrieve system diagnostics 4 Restore all default settings including calibration 5 Restore only default configuration settings channel definitions device settings 6 Restore only default system setup ports time settings 7 Force hardware reset 8 Network utilities if applicable 9 Monitor SCADA 10 Enable disable internal modem if one exists 11 Exit Commands 1 4 5 6
148. ating a Setting 1 Offliner Settings displays a default setting file on start up showing the set AUR an Older tings version in the bottom status bar As an example L PRO Offliner is shipped with a set of default sample files of older settings versions These sample files are v1 sample lps v2 sample lps v3 sample lps etc Each sample file contains default values of an older settings version For a 5 4 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 5 Offliner Settings Software new installation these sample files are placed in the default directory C Program Files ERLPhase L PRO Offliner Settings or you can choose the path during the Offliner software installation If an older version of L PRO Offliner was previously installed on your PC then the default directo ry may be C Program Files APT L PRO Offliner Settings 2 Opena sample file of the desired version Use File Save As to save the sam ple file to a new file name Then edit the setting file and the serial number save it and load it into the relay RecordBase View Software GE De Wee Gab Mesue Zeg epes reb Bms po sie jae miaj x ale tin aj nj j lej Lal T33 2000 04 30 K a 403 ee T DS 2000 04 30 00 01 EA High Speed Deech g NIC cns en accen Figure 5 4 RecordGraph Use RecordBase View and RecordGraph to analyze the records from a relay 1 Set the receive directory on your terminal program to point to a convenient
149. ation AUTH User authentication Security Management SECU Access to IED Security data Passwords Syslog Configuration System state change SYST IED system state has changed or change is imminent Security Notifications are available via Cyber Security Notification messages L PRO provides Cyber Security Notification messages to an external relative to L PRO Syslog server Syslog server interface complies with RFC5424 The Syslog protocol and RFC5426 Transmission of Syslog messages over UDP standards Cyber Security Notification messages are issued in real time and can be used for both logging and supervisory monitoring Syslog server settings are available in Syslog Configuration submenu Ter minal Mode on page 3 5 for details D02333R05 00 L PRO User Manual 2100 8 3 8 Cyber Security Cyber Security Notification message format 84 71 2015 09 24T16 12 13 06 00 LPRO 2100 110614 01 secmgr ACCS Configuration 46483 1 act write status success user maintenance di Message priority Message Date 8 4 Cyber Security Notification message message is a text line Message exam ple is shown below IP address 1 message priority 2 message date 3 time of day 4 time zone offset 5 Host Name 6 message ID 7 message data 8 optional description Message priority defines message relative importance The lower the priority value the more important
150. ations Nominal primary voltage 230KkV kV 230kV to oe I5V Nominal secondary phase to phase voltage PTRatio 2000 Nominal secondary phase to neutral voltage a 66 4V SS 3 Zero Sequence Impedance calculations for phase to ground impedance ele ment tests using secondary Positive and Zero Sequence Line Impedances Zl 5 90780 1 03 5 81 Z0 1600774 441 15 38 22071 3xZl Equation 1 KO 4 41 1 03 15 38 5 81 _ 3 38 49 57 _ 10 15 270 52 3 x 5 9 280 17 7 280 17 7Z80 0 57Z 9 5 The multiplier used to compensate phase to ground impedances Equation 2 K0 1 0 572Z 9 5 1 0 562 0 094 1 562 j0 094 1 569 73 5 21N Reach Settings Zone 1 Reach Mho 4 72 Q Zone 2 Reach Quadrilateral X 7 38 Q R 6 00 Q Zone 3 Reach Mho Forward 17 7 Reverse 0 50 Q Zone 4 Reach Mho Forward 0 00 Reverse 4 72 Q Compensated 21N1 setting 4 72 Q Zone 1 phase to ground compensated Mho impedance 4 72 1780 x 1 5697 3 5 7 40 2 776 5 D02333R05 00 L PRO User Manual 2100 6 7 6 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide Compensated 21N2 Setting 7 38 Q Zone 2 phase to ground compensated quadrilateral impedance Reactive 738080 x 1 569 73 5 11 580776 5 Resistive 600 09 x 1 569 7 3 5 9410 7 3 5 The pure resistive component 9 410 x cos 3 5 9 39070 Compensated 21N
151. ator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt Group Logic 1 Group Logic 1 Group Logic 1 Disabled Setting Group to Activate none Pickup Delay 0 s 0 to 999 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt Group Logic 2 Group Logic 2 Group Logic 2 Disabled Setting Group to Activate none Pickup Delay 0 s 0 to 999 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt L PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix B 17 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Appendix B 18 L PRO Settings Summary Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 EE EE ERE DELE ME E E EE Eee Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt Group Logic 3 Group Logic 3 Group Logic 3 Disabled Setting Group to Activate none Pickup Delay 0 s 0 to 999 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt Group Logic 4 Group Logic 4
152. auuuusdiluuuL VI 17 SCADA17 cu OOOOOOODOOOOODOO ww ww VI18 SCADA 13 D 00 0 CJ CJ OOOOO O 00 0 Lu vasaamiOoOOOOOOOOOOoOoO Oo oO o oO D Figure A 1 Output Matrix The 79 can also automatically move the follow breaker into the lead position if the lead breaker has been out of service for an extended period of time The out of service indication is also used to prevent reclosing attempts to the main or auxiliary breaker In our example a breaker has to be opened and stay open for a time of 120 0 seconds TC The 79 can also be configured with the follow breaker switch setting In this example we are using the TF follow time of 5 0 seconds for the 2nd breaker open interval The user can use the recloser reset time of TD by selecting the close after recloser reset time setting 52 Breaker Status Main Breaker EI 3 Spare 3 Aus Breaker lt cisabled gt z This symbol denotes a function which has not been enabled and is treated as a logic zero input Breaker Status is used in the Sync Check and Recloser functions Figure L 18 Breaker Status 52 Breaker Status can use any external input or ProLogic statement The re closer does not have to be enabled for this logic to work The 2 circuit breakers cannot share the same input Appendix L 10 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 Test Configuration Virtual Inputs D02333R05 00 Appendix L L PRO Setting Examp
153. ccept SG x to SG y Changes and waits for No User I P A e No Yes Yes y y System cancels System copies No SG xto SGy SG xto SGy A v v v A Settings 4 37 D02333R05 00 L PRO User Manual 2100 4 Protection Functions and Specifications The following is the flow of events that can occur in the Load Settings Screen Load Settings Acess System opens Level Change or Service gt Load Setting Screen System receives user file processes user file File Correct No View Yes X No Yes System Saves all Changes Settings 4 38 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 D02333R05 00 4 Protection Functions and Specifications Manual Settings Change Relay configuration changes during a user initiated manual setting the change does not disrupt the relay protection functions The relay logs an acceptance of the change request and puts the new setting file in service When the new set ting file is queued the relay loads the new setting configuration for protection functions to the protection processor The relay loads the new name definitions for indication and recording functions to the interface processor When the re lay has completed loading the ancillary settings for indication purposes to the interface processor an event is logged to show completion of the request There is some lag time during the load request and the completion of the re que
154. ce 7 38 Q Line Angle 80 Fault Voltage 34 5 V 7 90 using the calculated voltage phasors Fault Current greater than 1 6 A Z 90 80 greater than 1 6 A 7 170 21P2 Test Procedure 1 In Terminal Mode access relay Metering Logic Protection Logic 1 Monitor the following element for pickup 21P2 Pickup 2 Apply the following 3 phase voltages to the L PRO main ac volts terminals Ph A 330 66 4 V 20 Ph B 331 37 4 V Z 152 5 Ph C 332 37 4 V Z 152 5 Ph N 333 3 Connect variable single phase current source lagging phase to phase fault voltage by 80 to the L PRO main line current terminals Jumper Termi nals 303 amp 305 Ph B C 302 304 1 5 A Z 170 Observe 21P2 Alarm Low 4 Increase current At 2 23 to 2 45 A expect 2 34 A 2 P2 Alarm High 5 Turn off voltage and current sources End of 21P2 test D02333R05 00 L PRO User Manual 2100 6 17 6 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 21N2 Ground Zone 2 Phase to Neutral Under Impedance Distance Test Settings e Positive Sequence Secondary Line Impedance 100 of line 5 9 Q Positive Sequence Line Angle Z1 80 21N2 7 38 O Maximum Reach 125 of line at maximum torque angle of 80 compensated as per 21N calculations to 11 58 Q 276 5 Resistive Component compensated to 9 41 Q Z 3 5 Time Delay 0 expect 1 3 cycles 22 ms or less 310 Current Supervision 1 5 A minimum zero sequence current to allow 21N2 to operate e I
155. cheme 5 19 Q quadrilateral 4 5 6 6 quit 3 16 R recloser L 9 record duration and extension 4 46 initiation 4 46 length 5 16 storage retrieval and analysis 4 46 RecordBase View software 5 5 recording 4 45 swing 4 45 records 3 13 relay functional 3 1 3 2 retrieve to Offliner 3 12 S SCADA 3 14 accessing 2 8 communication parameters 2 8 diagnostics 2 8 monitor 2 13 protocol selection 2 8 scheme selector 5 19 service 3 2 setting group change 6 25 setting groups 3 11 5 11 5 17 L 2 settings 3 11 setup 3 14 start up 3 1 L PRO User Manual 2100 system parameters 5 12 system requirements hardware 5 1 operating system 5 1 T terminal mode 3 5 test mode 3 1 3 2 testing 21N2 ground distance 6 18 21P1 phase distance 6 11 21P2 phase distanc 6 13 25 27 59 sync check 6 44 27 undervoltage 6 26 46 50 46 51 negative sequence overcurrent 6 34 50 51 phase overcurrent 6 31 50BF breaker fail 6 38 50LS low set overcurrent 6 38 50N 51N neutral overcurrent 6 29 59 overvoltage 6 28 60 loss of potential 6 10 68 out of step 6 23 79 recloser 6 46 81 overfrequency 6 41 81 underfrequency 6 41 dead line pickup 6 22 directional element 6 36 external inputs 6 3 output relay contacts 6 3 weak infeed 6 20 testing procedures 6 1 time 3 14 U utilities 3 14 V version descriptions 2 vii view 3 15 view logs 3 3 view readings 3 3 view settings 5 23 virtual inputs 3 12 3 14 5 10 L 11 W weak infeed 4 18 weak
156. cking device or tripping device The 68 Out of Step 68 Trip or 68 Block 68 Inner and 68 Outer blinder logic points are available in the output matrix These logic points are also logged as event messages in the event log for details see Event Messages in Appendix D In addition the outputs from the inner and outer blinders are available for use with ProLogic to create any application scheme required If you select Device 68 to block for OOS conditions the relay energizes the front panel alarm LED when the 68 elements are blocking If you select the 68 to trip for OOS conditions the relay energizes the front panel target light Inner Blinder Alarm Enable an Outer Blinder Alarm 50 6 SE d 50 310 E 68 Bloc Out of Step 8 Tri Figure 4 12 Out of Step L PRO User Manual 2100 4 15 4 Protection Functions and Specifications 4 16 68 Out of Step Mode Block Off Trip Zone Blocking Zone 1 Blocking Enable disable Zone 2 Blocking Enable disable Zone 3 Blocking Enable disable Zone 4 Blocking Enable disable Out of Step Swing Timer 0 00 to 1 00 seconds 11 Supervision 0 5 to 50 0 A secondary 5 A 0 1 to 10 0 A secondary 1 A 3lo Blocking 0 5 to 50 0 A secondary 5 A 0 1 to 10 0 A secondary 1 A Blocking Reset Time 0 25 to 2 00 seconds LHS Binder Outer R1 100 0 to R2 ohms secondary 5 A 500 0 to R2 ohms secondary 1 A Inner R2 R1
157. cluded I Always in Class 0 response Never Only if point is assigned to Class 1 2 or 3 Based on point Index add column to table below 2 3 5 How Deadbands are A Global Fixed L PRO Offliner set B Configurable through DNP I C Configurable via other means D Other explain Based on point Index column specifies which of the options applies B C or D 2 3 6 Analog Deadband Simple Algorithm Integrating simple just compares the difference from Other explain the previous reported value 2 3 7 Definition of Analog Fixed list shown in table below Default list is L PRO Offliner Input Point List Configurable shown in table Other explain below Appendix F 22 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile 1 Analog Inputs are scanned with 500 ms resolution 2 Nominal values in calculations for the following table are based on 69V sec ondary voltage PT ratio for voltage channels and either 1 A or 5A secondary current CT ratio for current channels dependent upon the format of CT installed NOTES in the L PRO 3 Analog Input data points are user selectable the data points available in the device for any given Analog Input point selection can be obtained through the L PRO Offliner software see SCADA Setting Summary Transmitted Value Scaling E pe a Multipli Resolution Name EDS
158. critical is the message The list of message priori ties is as follows Table 8 3 Message Priority List Message Priority Severity RFC 5424 Security Alarms 32 Emergency 33 Alert 34 Error Security Events 81 Alert 82 Critical 83 Error 84 Warning 85 Notice Message date has format Y Y Y Y MM DD L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 Time of Day Time Zone Offset 8 Cyber Security Time of day has format HH MM SS Time zone offset has format HH MM If time zone offset equals 0 UTC then Z notation is used instead as shown in the example below 8421 2015 09 24T16 12 13Z 192 168 103 10 secmgr ACCS Configuration 46483 1 act write status success user maintenance IP address Host Name Mode Port IP fiddress Host Name rSyslog Configuration UDP Li 1 ae etting current address 122 169 103 2 Current IP address is 192 168 103 10 sA Current subnet mask is 299 0 Unit IP Address Host Name field identifies IED issuing the Syslog Notification message The field can be configured to contain one of the following values Unit IP Address Unit Serial Number Unit ID Selection of the Host Name field value is available in the Syslog Configu ration menu Figure 8 1 Figure 8 2 and Figure 8 3 below illustrate relationship between Syslog Configuration menu selection and Host Name field Maintenance Menu P
159. ctive baud rates are described above except that you modify the Port 2 baud rate on the relay and the properties of the modem in Hy perTerminal L PRO User Manual 2100 2 7 2 Setup and Communications Accessing the Relay s SCADA Services Protocol Selection Communication Parameters Diagnostics 2 8 The relay supports DNP3 Level 2 and Modbus SCADA protocols as a stan dard feature on all ERLPhase relays DNP3 is available through a direct serial link or the Ethernet LAN on top of either TCP or UDP protocols The Modbus implementation supports both RTU binary or ASCII modes and is available through a direct serial link The relay s Port 3 is dedicated for use with Modbus or DNP3 serial protocols Port 3 uses standard RS 232 signalling An external RS 232 lt gt RS 485 con verter can also be used to connect to an RS 485 network For details on connecting to serial Port 3 see Communicating with the Relay IED on page 2 2 and Communication Port Details on page 2 9 The DNP3 protocol can also be run across the optional Ethernet LAN Both DNP over TCP and DNP over UDP are supported For details on connecting to the Ethernet LAN see Network Link on page 2 4 Complete details on the Modbus and DNP3 protocol services can be found in the Appendices for details see Modbus RTU Communication Protocol in Appendix E and DNP3 Device Profile in Appendix F To select the desired SCADA protocol open the setting file
160. current and the zero se quence 310 current The loss of potential LOP function uses rate of change values for the positive sequence voltage and current signal along with voltage and current supervision to detect loss of potential conditions This function operates very fast and been field proven to block the distance elements during potential transferring be tween buses The function looks for a negative rate of change on the positive sequence volt age while determining if the positive sequence current is changing A loss of potential in itself should result in only a loss of voltage or a negative rate of change of voltage A fault results in a high rate of change of current as well In some rare cases there is a negative rate of change of fault current therefore we use an absolute rate of change of current When the loss of potential condition is detected it is latched until all the 3 phase voltages are above 75 or a pos itive rate of change of voltage is detected So the circuit detects a loss of poten tial that results in a voltage of less than 75 Select positive and zero sequence current blocking functions above the maximum load current this ensures that LOP does not pick up on fault A dropout timer has been added on the di dt signal in front of gate 169 to en sure that the di dt signal won t reset earlier than the dv dt signal This change improves the security of the algorithm in some particular fault situations 60 Loss
161. d Line Impedance Line Z Angle Reverse Figure 4 7 Fault Direction The directional element in the L PRO is always enabled The directional ele ment actually consists of three separate internal elements a negative sequence element a zero sequence element and a positive sequence element The neg ative sequence and zero sequence elements use directly measured currents and voltages The positive sequence element uses directly measured current and a memory voltage from the ring filter The sensitivity for the negative and zero sequence elements may be set by the user to correctly account for load condi tions and system configuration Both of these elements may be disabled as well The positive sequence element is always active L PRO User Manual 2100 4 7 4 Protection Functions and Specifications ZO ES 4 3P Fault m R Ki F N Minimum Sensitivity l Threshold i A7 N gt Forward 5 gt i N i LU a K Y Directional gt Forward Y a Element LE EN a Asserted NL d fa Ki E Forward x M d v Directional gt Element e wi Valid Figure 4 8 Directional Element Logic For three phase faults the directional element will only use the positive se quence element For all other faults the directional element will consider in order the negative sequence calculation the zero sequence calculation and the positi
162. d follow lockout indication is set for a fixed time delay pickup of the close signal time TP plus 1 0 second When the recloser goes to the lead lockout condi tion the breaker out of service timers are set to zero seconds and automatically pick up Ifthe recloser is in the lead lockout state the logic remains in that state for setting TD seconds after the main or auxiliary breaker is manually closed The follow lockout condition occurs when the follow breaker receives a close signal and the breaker remains open If the recloser is in the follow lockout state the logic remains in that state for setting TD seconds after the follow breaker is manually closed L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 D02333R05 00 4 Protection Functions and Specifications 79 Recloser 79 Recloser Enable disable Number of Shots 1to4 First Reclose T1 0 1 to 999 9 seconds Second Reclose T2 1 0 to 999 9 seconds Third Reclose T3 1 0 to 999 9 seconds Fourth Reclose T4 1 0 to 999 9 seconds Close Time Tp 0 1 to 1 0 seconds Lockout Time TD 0 0 to 999 9 seconds Initiate Reset TDI 0 0 to 999 9 seconds Recloser Mode Main only Block Reset TDB 0 0 to 999 9 seconds Follower Time TF 0 0 to 24 9 Breaker Out of Service TC 0 0 to 999 9 seconds Follower Sequence Switch Close after the Recloser Follower Time TF On off Close after the Recloser Reset Tim
163. d in an Configurable range to Application Layer Configurable selectable from Fragment containing Configurable other describe File Transfer 1 5 8 Maximum number of I Fixed at 2048 2048 octets that can be Configurable range to Received in an Configurable selectable from Application Layer Configurable other describe Fragment 1 5 4 Timeout waiting for None 2 000 ms Complete Application I Fixed at 2 000 ms Layer Fragment Configurable range to ms Configurable selectable from ms Configurable other describe Variable explain 1 5 5 Maximum number of Kl Fixed at 16 16 objects allowed in a Configurable range to single control request Configurable selectable ffrom for CROB group 12 Configurable other describe Variable explain 1 5 6 Maximum number of Fixed at Analog Outputs objects allowed ina Configurable range to not supported single control request Configurable selectable from for Analog Outputs Configurable other describe group 41 Variable explain 1 5 7 Maximum number of Fixedat Data Sets not objects allowed in a Configurable range to supported single control request Configurable selectable from for Data Sets groups Configurable other describe 85 86 87 Variable explain 1 5 8 Supports mixing object Not applicable controls are not supported Analog Outputs groups AOBs CROBs Yes not supported and Data Sets in the I No same control request D02333R05 00 L PRO User
164. d to the local end Security Margin TL2 Delays the local 21 2 from producing a Scheme Trip for at least as long as it would take a Blocking Signal to arrive from the remote end Should be set longer than the remote end 21 4R OR 50 67R detection time 1 cycle Blocking Channel Time Security Margin POTT Scheme Timers Timer Considerations TL1 TL 1 is intended for Parallel Line applications Delays or prevents scheme trip upon detection of a current reversal at the local end Time Delay should be set to less than Remote End 21 2 Detection Time 25msec Total End to End Channel Time TD1 Also for Parallel Line Applications Extends current reversal blocking of the Scheme Trip and Send Should be set such that it will not block the local relay if the fault becomes forward and internal However it needs to be set long enough to allow the permissive trip from the remote end to de assert in the event that the remote fault reverses remote external reverse fault So set local TD2 to Remote 21 2 Reset Time Channel Reset Time Security Margin L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 Appendix L L PRO Setting Example Scheme Selector Timers Timer Considerations TL3 Local fault duration must be greater than this time in order to produce a Scheme Send POTT and PUTT Permissive Trip DCB Block Signal derived from 21 4R OR 50N 67R AND NOT 21 2 T
165. e 1 2 Serial Connections 1 2 7 X Receiver Inter character Timeout Capabilities I Not checked No gap permitted Fixed at bit times Fixed at ms Configurable range to bittimes Configurable range to ms Configurable Selectable from bittimes Configurable Selectable from ms Configurable other describe Variable explain Current Value If configurable list methods 1 2 8 Inter character gaps in transmission D02333R05 00 I None always transmits with no inter character gap Maximum bit times Maximum ms L PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix F 5 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile See If configurable 1 3 IP Networking Capabilities Current Value list methods 1 3 1 Port Name Port 5 Network 1 3 2 Type of End Point TCP Initiating Master Only Not configured L PRO Offliner I TCP Listening Outstation Only for DNP TCP Dual required for Masters I UDP Datagram required 1 3 3 IP Address of this 192 168 100 10 L PRO Mainte Device 1 nance utilities 1 3 4 Subnet Mask Not set L PRO Mainte nance utilities 1 3 5 Gateway IP Address Not set L PRO Mainte nance utilities 1 3 6 Accepts TCP Allows all show as in 1 3 7 Limits based on L PRO Offliner Connections or UDP Limits based on an IP address an IP address Datagrams from Limits based on list of IP addresses Limits bas
166. e quence voltage This memory voltage lasts for approximately 150 cy cles even if all voltage inputs from the line VTS go to zero A practical effect of using a memorized voltage is to expand the mho characteristic by the source impedance This expansion of the characteristic ensures correct operation for zero voltage faults at the relay location and for for ward capacitive faults X No Memory Voltage Full Memory Voltage R L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 2 Setup and Communications Power Supply Case Grounding A wide range power supply is standard The nominal operating range is 48 to 250 Vdc 120 Vac 50 60 Hz To protect against a possible short circuit in the supply use an inline fuse or circuit breaker with a 5 A rating Make the chassis ground connection to ensure proper operation and safety There are no power switches on the relay When the power supply is connect ed the relay starts its initialization process and takes about 40 seconds to com plete showing the green Relay Functional LED You must ground the relay to the station ground using the case grounding ter minal at the back of the relay for details see Figure 1 3 L PRO Rear View on page 1 3 WARNING To ensure safety and proper operation you must connect the relay to the station ground using the rear grounding terminal on the relay Ground the relay even when testing Do not rely on the rack mounting screws to provide ca
167. e TD On off Sync Control Enabled disable The recloser provides flexibility with lead and follow breaker options The lead breaker is in the main or auxiliary position This allows you to control the lead circuit breaker with complete Dead Main Live Auxiliary Live Main Dead Auxiliary Dead Main Dead Auxiliary or Live Main Live Auxiliary supervi sion angle limit and voltage limit You also have the ability to control the 79 remotely or locally with external or virtual inputs The 79 recloser monitors the breaker contact a status and automatically moves the follow breaker into the lead position when the lead breaker is removed from service after an out of service time delay setting For details of auto recloser examples see L PRO Setting Example in Appendix L Sync Control The flexibility provided with device 79 allows you to control 1 or 2 circuit breakers with complete Dead Main Live Auxiliary Live Main Dead Auxiliary Dead Main Dead Auxiliary or Live Main Live Auxiliary supervision slip fre quency Sync control is provided on the lead breaker only because the follow breaker always recloses after the lead breaker has successfully closed ProLog ic can be used to supervise follow breaker closing attempts if an external input is used to signal that the follow breaker has a valid sync check signal from an external device e g PLC L PRO User Manual 2100 4 21 4 Protection Functions and Specifications 59 Main Auxiliary
168. e 0 0 A to 12 00 A transition this equates to 4x pickup Time Delay TMSx B ee lea 0 02434 HAE 3 0 x 0 02434 et 1 2015 PERPE DE 44 1 15 multiple 3 Inject fault Observe Relay Target 46 51 Trip End of 46 51 test L PRO User Manual 2100 6 35 6 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide Directional Element see OR 265 for details see Figure 6 27 Directional Element Logic on page 6 Positive Sequence 32 Threshold S0lL pos resno OS Test pos Settings Directional e 50ILpos Positive Sequence I1 Low Set 0 2 A fixed 46 50 Pickup 5 0 A 46 50 Directional Control If Directional T must be greater than 10 ms 288 s Out8 50 12 Sms Al arm Timer is active only if it s directional 46 51 Directional Control an 289 m 4 Out 9 Figure 6 29 Negative Sequence Instantaneous and Time OverCurrent Logic 46 50 46 51 Test Calculations The L PRO directional element has a fixed positive sequence current setting of 4 of Inominal that is used to supervise the directional control If the positive sequence current falls below 4 of Inominal the directional control becomes non directional So for directional control of the 46 element you require Negative Sequence Current 12 greater than pickup AND Positive Se quence Current I1 greater than or equal to 0 2 A 4 Inominal For this test inject a Revers
169. e Curves Figure A 7 Time delay Error at 2 Seconds Figure A 8 Time Delay Error at 1 Second and Figure A 9 Time Delay Error at 10 Seconds show operating times for the L PRO frequency rate of change elements at different time delay set tings and rate of change settings The diagrams show operating times at each test point including output contact operate time Operating times are the same for both 50 Hz and 60 Hz Time Delay Error 0 2s 9 0 1 Hz s N 1 Hz s 90 10 Hzls Delay error ms Hals Pickup Multiple Figure A 7 Time delay Error at 2 Seconds Time Delay Error 1s MT 180 165 150 135 120 105 a 1 Hzls 10 Hz s Time Delay Error ms 0 1 Hz s Multiple of Hz s Pickup Figure A 8 Time Delay Error at 1 Second Appendix A IED Specifications Time Delay Error 10s 4 0 1 Hzls G Hz s Time Delay Error ms Multiple of Hz s Pickup Figure A 9 Time Delay Error at 10 Seconds External Input Pickup Filter To guarantee security from spurious voltage pulses an external input pickup filter setting has been introduced This setting is made in terminal mode under Utilities Setup External Inputs The setting is an integer number representing the n
170. e Digital Signal Processor DSP on a MPB performs the protective relaying functions of the relay separate from the 486 CPU It has its own flash memory and self checking for fully independent operation The Main Processor Board has 24 channels of high speed 12 bit plus sign analog to digital conversion Re programmable flash memory for the DSP allows independent relay op eration and field software upgrades Floating point DSP for fast capture and manipulation of data Standard RS 232 serial communications ports High speed link between DSP and 486 processors Time synchronism processor with automatic detection of modulated and unmodulated IRIG B Sophisticated fault detection and watchdog recovery hardware A 486 class CPU provides data storage information management housekeep ing and communications for the relay The 486 runs a real time operating sys L PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix C 1 Appendix C Hardware Description Front Panel Board Appendix C 2 tem optimized for high speed high precision computing The 486 provides sophisticated facilities for communications and field software updates Local and wide area networking is supported by providing the relay with a path to fu ture networking capability A highly reliable solid state flash disk on the CPU board provides the operat ing software for the 486 and stores the relay s recordings The Front Panel Board provides visual indication of the status o
171. e Example FL2000Sep21 20 16 16 966 21P1 AB 1 0km Trip Register Value Meaning 40518 0x32 0x30 2 0 40519 0x30 0x30 0 0 40520 0x53 0x65 S e 40521 0x70 0x32 p 2 40522 0x31 0x20 1 lt sp gt 40523 0x32 0x30 2 0 40524 Ox3A 0x31 EE 40525 0x36 Ox3A KN 40526 0x31 0x36 RS 40527 Ox2E 0x39 See 40528 0x36 0x36 e e 40529 0x20 0x32 lt sp gt 2 40530 0x31 0x50 TV P 40531 0x31 0x20 1 lt sp gt 40532 0x41 0x42 A B 40533 0x20 0x31 lt sp gt 1 40534 Ox2E 0x30 uuo 40535 0x6B Ox6D Km 40536 Ox3A 0x20 lt sp gt 40537 0x54 0x72 Tt 40538 0x69 0x70 i p Appendix E 9 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile Device Properties Unless otherwise noted multiple boxes in the second column below should be selected for each parameter to indicate all capabilities supported or required Parameters without checkboxes in the second column do not have capabilities and are included so the current value may be shown in the third column The items listed in the capabilities column below may be configurable to any of the options selected or set to a fixed value when the device was designed Item 1 1 10 contains a list of abbreviations for the possible ways in which the configurable parameters may be set Since some parameters may not be acces sible by each of these methods supported an abbreviation for the configuration methods supported by each parameter is shown in
172. e I1 formula to calculate Inew because we know the required value of I1 0 2 A Iold 5 1 A I2 pickup plus margin I1 Inew Iold 3 0 2 Inew Iold 3 Inew 0 6 5 1 Inew 5 7 A Directional Element 50ILpos Threshold Test Procedure 1 In Terminal Mode access relay Metering Logic Protection Logic Monitor 46 50 Trip 2 Apply single phase polarizing voltage to L PRO terminals Ph A 330 333 66 4 V Z0 3 Apply 3 phase negative sequence currents to L PRO terminals Ph A 300 301 5 1A Z 80 Ph B 302 303 5 1A 2 40 Ph C 303 304 5 1A 2 160 Observe 46 50 Trip High 4 Slowly ramp up Phase A current to activate Directional Control At 5 67 to 5 73 A expect 5 7 A 46 50 Trip Low 5 Turn currents off End of Directional 50ILpos Threshold test L PRO User Manual 2100 6 37 6 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 50BF Red Fail and 50LS Low Set Overcurrent Tests 6 38 Settings Main 50LS Pickup 1 0 A Time Delay 0 00 seconds SOBF Time Delay 1 5 0 seconds 50BF Time Delay 2 10 0 seconds Auxiliary 50LS Pickup 1 0A Time Delay 0 00 seconds 50BF Time Delay 1 5 0 seconds 50BF Time Delay 2 10 0 seconds Input 3 e 50LS Pickup 0 3 A Time Delay 1 00 second SOLS used with Virtual Input 3 to make Breaker Fail for Breaker 3 Input 4 50LS Pickup 0 3 A Time Delay 1 00 second SOLS used with Virtual Input 4 to make Breaker Fail for Breaker 4 Main a
173. e Modem Adapter converts this port to a Data Termi nal Equipment DTE to simplify connection to an external modem Default Setting 9 600 baud 8 data bits no parity 1 stop bit Port 2 is disabled if the relay is equipped with an internal modem see Port 5 Rear Panel RS 232 DCE female DB9 Used for SCADA communication Default Setting 9 600 baud 8 data bits no parity 1 stop bit Rear Panel Not used Rear Panel RJ 11 RJ 45 receptacle When equipped with optional internal modem Used for user interface access via modem When equipped with optional internal Ethernet card User interface access DNP SCADA access Default Ethernet IP address 192 168 1 100 L PRO User Manual 2100 2 9 2 Setup and Communications 2 10 Notes Relay is DCE PC is DTE Pins 1 and 6 are tied together internal to the relay Signal Name Direction Pin on the PC lt gt Relay Relay Port DCD lt 1 RxD lt 2 TxD gt 3 DTR gt 4 Common 5 DSR c 6 RTS gt 7 CTS lt 8 No connection 9 Male DB 9 Cable End for Female DB 9 Cable End for Relay Port Computer Port Pin on Cable Pin on Cable 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 D02333R05 00 2 Setup and Communications Notes Signal Name Direct
174. e Negative Sequence fault With the I1 Directional Supervision threshold not exceeded the directional unit is disabled therefore the directional element will be non directional This means that the 46 element is able to operate in the reverse direction as well as in the forward direction When the I1 Directional Supervision is exceeded the 46 drops out as it has now become Directional forward only Testing 1s accomplished by applying 3 phase balanced I2 quantities sufficient to pickup the 46 element and then increasing the magnitude of any single phase For example for our 46 50 pickup of 5 0 A use I2 of 5 1 A This is sufficient I2 magnitude to solidly pickup the 46 50 element at the line angle Note that the line angle is the Positive Sequence Forward Direction but is the Negative Sequence Reverse Direction IA 7 5 1 A Z 80 IB 5 1 A 2 40 IC 2 5 1 A Z 160 6 36 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 D02333R05 00 6 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide The symmetrical components using Equations 5 to 7 I1 0 I2 5 1 A Z 80 310 0 Now vary single phase current to obtain sufficient I1 to enable the directional element 0 2 A Vary Phase A for this test Redefine the symmetrical components to determine test quantities Because IA will change call it Inew IB and IC are equal and do not change so call them Iold n Mew Total 3 l alt Id alt e ae ld or 12 Tasa WEIER 3 310 Bnew Told Use th
175. e Reach 1 44 ohm 0 05 to 66 00 Mho Char Angle 90 0 deg 70 0 to 140 0 Pickup Delay 1 00 s 0 00 to 5 00 Delta Current Supervision 5 0 A 0 2 to 50 0 21P Phase Distance Zone 4 21P Zone 4 Enabled Forward Reach fixed at 0 secondary ohm for POTT or Block ing scheme Reverse Reach 11 52 ohm 0 05 to 66 00 Mho Char Angle 90 0 deg 70 0 to 140 0 Pickup Delay 2 00 s 0 00 to 5 00 Delta Current Supervision 5 0 A 0 2 to 50 0 Load Impedance common for 21N 21P and 68 Load Resistance R 20 0 ohm 150 0 to 150 0 Load Reactance X 15 0 ohm 150 0 to 150 0 21N Ground Distance Zone 1 21N Zone 1 Enabled Type Mho Forward Reach 11 52 ohm 0 05 to 66 00 Left Reach R1 4 00 ohm 0 05 to 66 00 Right Reach R2 4 00 ohm 0 05 to 66 00 Mho Char Angle 90 0 deg 70 0 to 140 0 Pickup Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 0 20 Phase Current Supervision 5 0 A 0 2 to 50 0 310 Supervision 2 0 A 0 2 to 50 0 21N Ground Distance Zone 2 21N Zone 2 Enabled Type Mho Forward Reach 17 28 ohm 0 05 to 66 00 Left Reach R1 6 00 ohm 0 05 to 66 00 Right Reach R2 6 00 ohm 0 05 to 66 00 Mho Char Angle 90 0 deg 25 0 to 140 0 L PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix B 7 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges L PRO Settings Summary Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 Pickup Delay 0 40 s 0 00 to 2 00 Phase Current Supervision 5 0 A 0 2 to 50 0 310 Supervision 2 0 A 0 2 to 50 0 21N Ground Distance Zone 3 21N Zone 3 Enabled
176. e Relay IED 2 2 Using HyperTerminal to Access the Relay s User Interface2 5 Setting the Baud Rate sseeeeeeeesssss 2 7 Accessing the Relay s SCADA Services 2 8 Communication Port Details ssssssssss 2 9 Maintenance Men 2 12 Firmware Update sse 2 15 3 Using the IED Getting Started 3 1 el fie RE EI 3 1 Front Panel eet 3 2 Terminal Mode 3 5 Metering Data rire Pr P iden eden tg E 3 16 4 Protection Functions and Specifications 4 1 Protection and Recording Functions 4 1 Communication Aided Gcheme 4 40 Recording Functions uerge cseteris e dn 4 45 FOGGING E GN Tote e EE 4 47 5 Offliner Settings Software 5 1 INtrodUCtON pe m 5 1 Installing PC Software ree tk theod 5 2 Offliner Features ssssssssHHe m 5 2 L PRO User Manual 2100 Table of Contents Handling Backward Compatibility 5 4 RecordBase View Software 5 5 Main Branches from the Tree View sss 5 6 Settings From a Record sseeeeeeeess 5 24 6 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 6 1 Acceptance Testing mee t tn tete ita ens 6 1 L PRO Acceptance Test Procedure Outline 6 4 T Installation s ee osque i E 7 1 Physical Oe lu Le L
177. e Revision History L PRO User Manual 2100 vii 1 Overview Introduction D02333R05 00 The L PRO model 2100 is a microprocessor based relay providing compre hensive distance based line protection fault oscillography dynamic swing re cording and event logging with one integrated technology The primary protection is line protection with 4 zones of phase and ground dis tance functions user defined Mho or quadrilateral shapes and communication based schemes To provide a complete package of protection and control L PRO provides oth er functions such as 1 0 to 1 3 cycle operation at 80 reach ideal for transmission line appli cations ring bus capability breaker failure and individual breaker monitoring 4 shot recloser with dead line dead bus control and sync check ProLogic addresses special protection needs 8 setting groups with setting group logic back up overcurrent protection over under rate of change frequency devices Optional expanded I O up to 20 external inputs and 21 outputs L PRO has 2 working modes online and offline In the online mode you can use any communication software package e g Procomm or HyperTerminal to connect to the L PRO using VT100 terminal emulation In online mode you can change and review relay settings view event and metering information initiate and retrieve recordings and retrieve settings L PRO Line Protection Relay Relay Functional I
178. e communications trip or the communications send or the Out of Step outer blinder alarm to drive the Block Group Logic statement There is no intentional pickup delay and 0 5 second drop out delay to hold the block on after the block condition has reset ProLogic 8 Block Group Logic v Enabled Name Block Group Logic ae Pickup Delay 0 00 seconds Dropout Delay 050 seconds v Target Enabled 2 2 olo o 2 o o oj o Input amp 21P1 Trip v Input B 21P2 Trip X Input Comm Scheme Trp zl i Out Input D Comm Scheme Send x Input E Not used 59 Main Overvoltage h has not been 58 Aux Overvoltage lc zero input 60 Alarm 68 Trip 58 OuterBind Alarm 58 InnerBind Alarm Figure L 15 ProLogic 8 Appendix L 8 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 Appendix L L PRO Setting Example 79 Auto recloser examples 79 Recloser Settings D02333R05 00 You can program up to 4 shots or reclose attempts with the 79 function with various lead and follow breaker options Create settings by using the Offliner settings software or by using the terminal mode 79 Recloser I Enabled Number of Shots MM ja Recloser Mode Main then Aux E First Reclose T1 100 s Block Reset TDB 05 s Second Reclose T2 150 s Follower Time TF 50 s Third Reclose T3 ID s Breaker Out of Service TC 1200 s Fourth Reclose T4 250 s Follower Sequencer Switch Close Time T
179. e detection time inherent contact time approximately 1 0 to 1 3 cycles after fault inception Testing Other Zones You can test all other zones 21P3 4 and 21N1 and 21N3 4 using the same process as the 21P1 21P2 and 21N2 zones except that you need to substitute the impedance and timing settings for those zones End of 21 tests Weak Infeed tripping operates on 4 basic conditions 1 Low Positive Sequence Voltage 27V1 or High Neutral Voltage 59V0 2 No Zone 2 or Zone 4 reverse element picked up 3 Loss of Potential 60 element dropped out 4 Permissive trip received from the remote end 21 2 6ms J 108 21 4R TWD1 Lo 3ms p Wie TW 20 Receiver yz 0 112 Weak 2v1 Infeed ww 3 Enable Switch al SI Scheme Scheme Trip Send Figure 6 15 Weak Infeed Logic For this test apply 0 voltage and 0 current to the relay with no prefault This causes the first 3 conditions to be met 27V1 NOT Zone 2 OR Zone 4R NOT Loss of Potential In this case a Virtual Input is set up to simulate the Permissive Trip Receive contact via ProLogic L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 6 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide D02333R05 00 Scheme Selector Scheme Selelection POTT 1 m Communication Aided External Inputs 1 to 9 and ProLogic 1 to 10 Receiver 1 Receiver 2 PL 8 PerTrip Rec via V 1 Figure 6 16 Scheme Selector
180. e of the relay s serial ports can be shown on the relay s front panel display From the main Date amp Time display press the Next button For a direct serial connection both the relay and your computer must be set to the same baud rate To change the baud rate of a relay serial port 1 Access the relay s user interface through any of the available ports 2 Log in to the user interface and go to the Utilities Setup Ports menu for details see Terminal Mode on page 3 5 3 Select the desired baud rate for the appropriate port by toggling through the options using the Space or Enter keys Save the new setting with the F2 key The message New communications settings loaded will appear The new baud rate will be used on that port the next time you log in to it To change the baud rate on your computer s serial port 4 From within HyperTerminal bring up the Properties dialogue press the Configure button and set the baud rate field to the desired value 5 Savethe changes Unlike a direct serial link the baud rates for a modem link do not have to be the same on your computer and on the relay The modems automatically nego tiate an optimal baud rate for their communication The baud rate set on the relay only affects the rate at which the relay commu nicates with the modem Similarly the baud rate set in HyperTerminal only af fects the rate at which your computer communicates with its modem Details on how to set these respe
181. e phase current source to the L PRO terminals Ph A 300 301 1 58 A Z 76 5 Observe 21N2 Pickup Low 4 Reduce Phase A voltage At 17 4 to 19 2 V expect 18 3 V 21N2 Pickup High After 400 ms 21N2 Trip High 21N2 Resistive Test Procedure 1 In Terminal Mode access relay Metering Logic Protection Logic 1 Monitor 21N2 Pickup 2 Apply balanced 3 phase nominal voltages 66 4 V to the L PRO terminals Ph A 330 66 4 V Z0 Ph B 331 66 4 V Z 120 Ph C 332 66 4 V 2 120 Ph N 333 3 Connect single phase current source to the L PRO terminals Ph A 300 301 1 58 A Z43 5 Observe 21N2 Pickup Low 4 Reduce Phase A voltage At 15 6 to 14 2 V expect 14 9 V 21N2 Pickup High After 400 ms 21N2 Trip High Testing the Zone 2 Neutral Time Delay 1 Monitor Timer Stop on normally open Output Contact 1 202 203 2 Settimer to start from single phase current transition 1 e current off to on 3 Apply the following 3 phase voltages to the L PRO terminals Ph A 330 66 4 V Z0 Ph B 331 66 4 V Z 120 Ph C 332 66 4 V Z 120 Ph N 333 L PRO User Manual 2100 6 19 6 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide Weak Infeed Test 6 20 4 Apply single phase current from 0 to 6 0 A to start the timer 9596 of Zone 2 Reach 119 of the line 23 1 miles Ph A 300 301 6 0 A Z 76 5 Expected operate time 400 ms 1 0 to 1 3 cycle 417 ms 2 5 Note The zone timer starts when the fault is detected th
182. e settings summary contains all the information from the Re lay Identification screen The setting summary provides a list of all the current and voltage analog input quantity names used for protection and recording External Inputs and Output contact names are also identified on this summary L PRO Settings Summary Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 Name Symbol Value Unit Range Relay Identification Settings Version 10 Ignore Serial Number No Serial Number LPRO 2100 991001 01 Unit ID UnitID Setting Name Default Settings Nominal CT Secondary Current 5A Nominal System Frequency 60 Hz Standard I O 9 External Inputs 14 Out put Contacts Optional I O Not Installed Comments Comments Date Created Modified 2000 09 06 16 21 22 Station Name Station Name Station Number 4 Location Location Line D245 Analog Input Names LVA Main Voltage A LVB Main Voltage B LVC Main Voltage C LIA Main Line Current A LIB Main Line Current B LIC Main Line Current C 1A2 Aux Line Current A IB2 Aux Line Current B IC2 Aux Line Current C L PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix B 1 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Appendix B 2 L PRO Settings Summary Setting Group
183. ed by Hyper Terminal if the record already exists in the downloads folder When using HyperTerminal use Z modem no crash recovery files are received and auto incremented Metering S F ubmenus Analog External Inputs Output Contacts Logic or a detailed description see Metering Data on page 3 16 Analog Analog Inputs Provide secondary values of the ac analog voltages and currents Line Quantities Provide primary voltage kV phase phase of each line External Inputs Displays the current state of the External Inputs Output Contacts Displays the current state of the Output Contacts Logic Protection Protection Functions ProLogic Provides the present status of the internal logic states When a logic level becomes active its state changes from low to high Setting Group Displays current active Setting Group and Group Logic Virtual Inputs Provide the present status of the virtual input logic states When a logic level becomes active its state changes from low to high 3 12 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 3 Using the IED Getting Started Records Submenus List Fault Recording Swing Recording Event Recording Contains the means for initiating and retrieving recordings List Lists all records Fault Recording Creates fault records Swing Recording Creates swing records Event Recording Creates event records Retrieve Records from
184. ed on a wildcard IP address Limits based on list of wildcard IP addresses Other validation explain 1 3 7 IP Address es from 192 168 1 1 L PRO Offliner which TCP Connections or UDP Datagrams are accepted 1 3 8 TCP Listen Port Not Applicable Master w o dual end point 20 000 L PRO Offliner Number Fixed at 20 000 I Configurable range 1025 to 32737 Configurable selectable from Configurable other describe 1 3 9 TCP Listen Port I Not Applicable Outstation w o dual end point NA Number of remote Fixed at 20 000 device Configurable range to Configurable selectable from Configurable other describe 1 3 10 TCP Keep alive timer Fixed at ms Disabled L PRO Offliner B Configurable range 5 to 3 600 s Configurable selectable from ms Configurable other describe 1 3 11 Local UDP port Fixed at 20 000 20 000 L PRO Offliner I Configurable range 1025 to 32737 Configurable selectable from i Configurable other describe Let system choose Master only 1 3 12 Destination UDP port NA for DNP3 Requests Master Only 1 3 13 Destination UDP port I None NA for initial unsolicited null Fixed at 20 000 responses UDP only Configurable range to Outstations Configurable selectable from j Configurable other describe Appendix F 6 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile If configurable 1 3 IP Networking Capabilities Current Value stmeinbds 1 3 14 Destination UDP
185. elay Functional LED or can be of the opposite state depending on the nature of the problem The following items bring up this LED DSP failure protection difficulties within the relay Communication failure within the relay Internal relay problems Test Mode Occurs when the relay output contacts are intentionally blocked Possible reasons are Relay initialization on start up User interface processor has reset and is being tested You cannot communicate with the relay through the ports until the front display becomes active and the Test Mode LED goes out Normally the red Target LED remains off after this start up unless the relay had unviewed target messages Output contacts are controlled from the Utilities menu L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 Push Buttons D02333R05 00 3 Using the IED Getting Started Alarm Occurs when an enabled relay function picks up The red Alarm LED should be off if there are no inputs to the relay If the Alarm LED is on check the event log messages on the front dis play by pressing the View Logs button Target Indicates that a fault has taken place An event message with date and time is presented in the display Date amp Time Pressing the Date amp Time button displays the date and time stored on the relay If the time is incorrect use the Utilities gt Setup gt Time function in the Terminal Mode user interface to set it manually or connect
186. elay Inoperative Contact closed Output Contacts held open Event Log Message XXIX X X XxX Status available through SCADA The Self Check Fail signal which is available in the Output Matrix TUI me tering and SCADA can be used to signal an alarm Note that if this signal is mapped to an output contact the contact which it is mapped to will only be closed for an alarm condition If the relay is in the Block condition the Relay Inoperative contact must be used to signal an alarm The status of the Self Check Fail is available through the SCADA services pro vided by the L PRO The digital signal Self Check Fail will indicate that DSP has detected a continuous dc level and the analog metering value Self Check Fail Parameter is used to indicate which condition Alarm or Block The failure types and which analog values they are associated with are described in the ta ble below Both signals are available in DNP and Modbus Point Value Condition 0 Normal 1 Alarm 2 Block 3 Alarm has evolved to block The Alarm condition is allowed to reset if the continuous dc level drops below the pickup level The Block condition has no reset level If power is cycled to the relay it will go into its normal state until the continuous dc level is detected again L PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix D 5 Appendix D Event Messages Self Check Fail appears as Aux Failure Alarm in the settings ver si
187. elow or less than 3 volts cycle AND an absolute value of rate of change of positive sequence current below or less than 0 1 A cycle AND not have a positive sequence load current 50 Ipos above the setting OR not have 3 times zero sequence fault current 3lo above the setting of 3lo 170 LOP is declared by this logic element logic high when any of the phase currents are above 0 2 A 171 Has an output when o p from 168 is high AND o p from logic 173 is high AND NOT logic 176 high Positive sequence rate of change voltage is not greater than 3 volts cycle and not 3 phase voltage greater than 0 1 pu 172 Has an output when o p from 170 is high AND positive sequence rate of change voltage is not greater than 3 volts cycle 173 Has an output when o p from 171 is high OR timed o p from logic 169 is high 174 Has a Loss of Potential LOP output when o p from 168 is high AND o p from logic 172 is high AND o p from logic 173 is high The output is timed on drop out This output is sent to other elements of the relay to give indication and block voltage elements such as impedance from tripping falsely from loss of potential condition 175 Phase voltage A and B and C greater that 0 1pu will have output HIGH 176 Logic element 175 HIGH AND positive sequence rate of change voltage is not greater than 3 volts cycle output HIGH will invert into element 171 to
188. els 6 voltages and 12 currents 96 samples cycle up to the 25th harmonic External inputs 1 ms resolution Protection element output signals 8 samples cycle ProLogic signals 8 samples cycle Active setting group Parameters that are user selectable with respect to recording transients Record length 0 2 to 2 0 seconds gt 12 to 120 cycles 60 Hz Base with automatic extension to capture successive triggers Recorder triggering by any internal logic or external input signal The L PRO records dynamic system responses allowing you to analyze system stability and to provide a larger context for fault analysis Swing records con tain positive sequence phasor measurements and system frequency calculated at a rate of 1 phasor per cycle Swing records can extend to 3 minutes in dura tion The quantities recorded are Positive sequence impedance magnitude Positive sequence voltage magnitude Positive sequence current magnitude 3 Phase Vars reactive power 3 Phase Watts real power The event recording provides permanent storage for the event log You can cre ate an event record automatically or manually When the event auto save is en abled an event record is created approximately every 230 events You can initiate an event manually though the terminal user interface The command Event Recording is available under the Records Event Recording menu L PRO User Manual 2100 4 45 4 Protection Functions a
189. en to Man Only Make sure to do that in all setting groups Figure L 17 Invalid Action Most protection schemes require the ability to block the 79 when certain events happen In our example we are using Virtual Input 7 VI 7 to block The 79 blocking is set to last for an additional time of 1 0 seconds TDB L PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix L 9 Appendix L L PRO Setting Example 79 initiation is done by simply setting the desired function in the output matrix Output Contact Block amp Initiate Recording Device 1 2 3 4 s e 7 e s 10 11 12 13 14 796 79 Bi Fault Swing VI1 52 1 Close 2 CS X vi2i24Tips2cs OOOO OOOO OOOO Oyo DO DI DIE DI VI 3 52 2 Close 52 CS x vaE22mecsi OOOOOOOOOOOOO 0 0 o o0 Of wspa1 s22mpaz X MOOOOOOOOOO O0 SUD D vem O O O O O OOOO OOOO LEON OE VI 7 79CS Enable Disable visca O L L CD C CD C CJ CI C DI CI BON NC ON VIS SCADA 9 o oD 0 EL ELE OOOOO 0 oc oe vunn D D0DDD0DD0DDD0DiD Di VI11 SCADA 11 vii2 capat2 O D O C DI DI CDI DI I m m m m m m m m VI 13 SCADA 13 SSC nd O OOO OO OOOOOOOUOO OO d D wisisca0A 15 O OO OOOOOOOOOOO O 0o ojo DJ wescaisripnuuudgaagaa
190. ence quantity by L PRO Therefore if it is absent there is not a locked valid relationship among all of the analog quantities To test the external inputs connect the relay to a laptop in Terminal Mode Ser vice level Metering I O This screen displays the status of the Input and Out put Contacts Placing a voltage of 125 Vdc nominal 150 V maximum to each of the external inputs in turn causes the input to change from Low to High status These inputs are polarity sensitive and this screen has a 0 5 second up date rate Test the output relays to verify their integrity using the Utilities Mainte nance gt Outputs The output contacts are closed by pressing the Enter key Tog gle the output contacts from open to closed by pressing the Enter key Verify the output contact status using an ohmmeter When you exit this sub menu each contact status reverts to the open position L PRO User Manual 2100 6 3 6 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide L PRO Acceptance Test Procedure Outline Devices to Test Download Acceptance Test File 6 4 60 AC Loss of Potential e 21P Phase to Phase Impedance 21N Phase to Neutral Impedance Weak Infeed Dead Line Pickup 68 Out Of Step 27 Undervoltage 59 Overvoltage e 50N 51N Neutral Overcurrent 50 51 Phase Overcurrent 46 50 46 51 Negative Sequence Overcurrent SOLS Low Set Definite Time Overcurrent SOBF Breaker Fail Example of Inputs 3 and 4 being used
191. ent Auto Save DI Group Logic C Output Matrix M SeMinee Summers af L PRO Offliner Settings v9 Figure 5 16 Record Length Record Length Fault Fault Record Length 0 2 to 2 0 seconds Swing Fault Record Length 6 to 120 seconds Event Auto Save Enable disable The L PRO Relay has recording and logging functions to analyze faults and dynamic swing and to review the operation of the overall protection scheme This item identifies the amount of time that each fault record Prefault is fixed at 0 16 second There are 2 types of recording provided and the record length times available for each type of recording transient or swing produce a sepa rate record L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 Setting Groups D02333R05 00 5 Offliner Settings Software L PRO Offliner Settings Document 1 ii Bile gdt window Help Dell sae lt a B E O Identification C Relay Analog Inputs External Inputs Comments C Output Contacts x C Virtual Inputs C Setting Groups C System Parameters C Record Length Setting Grou e C Line Parameters C Scheme Selector C Breaker Status Protection Functions Z Circle Trigger H 0 ProLogic H Group Logic C Output Matrix E C Settings Summary E Setting Group 2 Setting Group 2 Ir 7 Setting Group 3 Setting Group 3 IL 7 Setting Group 4 Setting Group 4 Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1
192. entification L PRO System Parameters Bela Settings Identification Settings Version 12 L PRO Serial Number LPR0 2100 110614 01 Default Settings 15 Nov 25 20 00 58 Line XYZ IED1 Setting Name Date Created Modified Unit ID 84 1 2015 09 24T16 12 13 06 00 Line XYZ IEDI Fecmgr ACCS Configuration 46483 1 act write status success user maintenance IP address Message Data 8 6 Figure 8 3 Unit ID as Host Name Message data provides Security Notification details It starts with the message data ID that uniquely identifies the purpose of data followed by parameter val ue pairs In the above examples on Figure 8 1 through Figure 8 3 message data ID is Configuration 46483 1 The list of message data IDs is as follows Table 8 4 Message Data ID List Message Data ID Message ID Description Login 46483 1 AUTH User login Logout 46483 1 AUTH User logout Accounts 46483 1 SECU Access to IED password settings SyslogConfig 46483 1 SECU Access to IED Syslog Configuration Configuration 46483 1 ACCS Access to IED configuration data Settings 46483 1 ACCS Access to IED settings data Firmware 46483 1 ACCS IED firmware update information Records 46483 1 ACCS Access to Control of IED Records EventLog 46483 1 ACCS Access to IED Event Log Virtuallnputs 46483 1 ACCS IED Virtual Inputs control OutputContacs 46483 1 ACCS IED Output Contacts control T
193. ents that are currently high and reports states of all the events that remain high after a setting change To view the active setting group and status of the group logic functions in real time via the terminal UI enter the Metering Logic Setting Group menu choice To view a snapshot of the group logic data enter the Settings Active Group menu choice View the active setting group with the relay front panel display There is no ca pability to change active setting group with the front panel The front panel dis plays 2 lines of data the first line contains the Active Setting Group x where x is the current setting group and flashes The second line of data dis plays the user defined setting name for the current setting group To view the active setting group press the Previous or Next buttons to cycle through the time date indication and the serial port settings The flash memory on the main processor board is capable of approximately one hundred thousand erases The retention of the active setting group causes 2 bytes to be written to a memory block in the flash Each memory block writes about 65 Kbytes before an erase is performed on the flash memory An average of 14 setting group changes per day for the 25 year life of a relay results in the flash memory being erased only 4 times Latch states from ProLogic and Group Logic also performs writes to the flash memory increasing the number of erases performed on the flash L PRO User Ma
194. ephone Telephone Telephone Line CODEC Desktop Computer Figure 2 3 Internal Modem Link You can access the relay s user interface through a telephone link between the relay and your computer using an optional internal modem If the modem has been installed Port 5 on the rear panel is labelled INTERNAL MODEM Connect the relay s Port 5 to an analog telephone line or switch using a stan dard RJ 11 connector When an internal modem is installed the relay s Port 2 is used to interface to the modem internally Appropriate Port 2 settings are configured at the factory when the internal modem is installed The factory defaults are M0S0 0 amp B 1 for an external modem and M0S0 0 for an internal modem PC with TCP IP 10BaseT TCP IP Network Port 5 RJ 45 Network Figure 2 4 Network Link An optional Ethernet TCP IP LAN link lets you access both the relay s user in terface and DNP3 SCADA services simultaneously through the same network port If the Ethernet option has been installed Port 5 on the rear panel will be labelled NETWORK The user interface accessed through the LAN is the same as that available through a direct serial connection or a modem link but requires the use of a Telnet client on your PC The HyperTerminal program which is included in Windows XP and is also available separately as HyperTerminal PE provides Telnet services To select Telnet go to HyperTerminal s Prope
195. equency 40305 Hz 100 P 40306 MW 10 Q 40307 Mvar 10 Pos Seq Voltage 40308 KV 10 Pos Seq Current 40309 A 1 Active Setting Group Number 40310 la summated Magnitude 40311 A 1 la summated Angle 40312 degrees 10 Ib summated Magnitude 40313 A 1 Ib summated Angle 40314 degrees 10 Ic summated Magnitude 40315 A 1 Ic summated Angle 40316 degrees 10 Self check fail parameter 40317 N A 1 Read Input Register Function Code 04 No input registers supported Response from IED indicates ILLEGAL FUNCTION Force Single Coil Function Code 05 Only the hold readings coil can be forced When active this coil locks all coil input and holding register readings simultaneously at their present values When inactive coil input and holding register values will read their most recently available state Channel Type Address Value Hold Readings Read Write 01 0000 Readings update normally inactive FF00 Hold readings active Appendix E 6 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 Appendix E Modbus RTU Communication Protocol Preset Single Register Function Code 06 Channel Address Value Scaled Up By Event Message Control See below for details of use Refresh event list 40513 No data required N A Acknowledge the cur 40514 No data required N A rent event and get the next event Get the next event 40515 No data required N A without acknowl edge Event Buffe
196. er Virtual Terminal Mapping to IEC 61850 Object Models defined in a DNP3 XML file 1 1 9 Notable Additions Start stop qualifier codes 0x00 and 0x01 limited quantity qualifier codes 0x07 and 0x08 and indi ces qualifier codes 0x17 and 0x28 for Binary In puts Binary Outputs and Analog Inputs object groups 1 10 and 30 32 bit and 16 bit Analog Inputs with and without flag variations 1 2 3 and 4 Analog Input events with time variations 3 and 4 Fault Location information as analog readings Event Log messages as Object groups 110 and 111 1 1 10 Methods to set Configurable Parameters XML Loaded via DNP3 File Transfer XML Loaded via other transport mechanism Terminal ASCII Terminal Command Line Wl Software Vendor software named L PRO Offliner Proprietary file loaded via DNP3 file transfer Proprietary file loaded via other transport mech anism Direct Keypad on device front panel Factory Specified when device is ordered Protocol Set via DNP3 e g assign class Other explain 1 1 11 DNP3 XML files available On Line Appendix F 2 RdWrFilenameDescription of Contents dnpDP xml Complete Device Profile dnpDPcap xml Device Profile Capabilities dnpDPcfg xml Device Profile config val ues xml The Complete Device Profile Document contains the capabilities Current Value and configurable methods columns The Device Profile Capabilities contains on
197. erive the formula Zx2xl 4 testmin V faultmin 7 380 x2 x 1 64 23 6volts 3 Now determine the 3 phase voltage phasors Only B C fault is shown here but the same principle applies for A B or C A faults Since neutral is not involved in this type of fault the faulted voltage phasors collapse toward each other along the phase to phase line 7X c 120 deg i bo I I D DI al a 1 M I HEALTHY voLTs FAULT VOLTS T 1 NL Figure 6 12 Phasor Representation of an Ideal Phase to Phase Fault 6 14 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 6 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide The following tables show the voltages to inject for a variety of fault voltage levels using 115 V secondary phase to phase nominal 66 4 V phase to neutral nominal A B Fault C phase voltage 66 4 V 7 120 The resultant angle of A B voltage always 30 Reduction 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 Fault Volts 103 5V 92 0V 80 5 V 69 0 V 57 5 V 46 0 V 34 5 V 23 0 V 11 5 V Fault Volt Angle 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 Voltage A B 61 5 V 56 7 V 52 2 V 47 9 V 43 9 V 40 4 V 37 4 V 35 1 V 33 7 V A Angle 2 7 5 8 9 5 13 9 19 1 25 3 32 5 40 9 50 2 B Angle 117 3 114 2v 110 5 106 1 100 9 94 7 87 5 79 1 69 8 B C Fault A phase voltage 66 4V 7 0 The resultant angle of B
198. es Bums nd no peo 7 onsouBeiq T 55929 Sjndu jeujejx3 S Geen vavos Buipuooey syndu sbumes T suog 92ueusjule A yne4 IEUISINZ T SS920y out l dnog dmeas IJ dme 6 MIIA jes 1S ojeuy eAnov uno SSo22y son 607 u 44 Sp4028M Duuaiam sbumes D02333R05 00 3 Using the IED Getting Started ID Passwords Syslog Password Update View Change Service Secadmin Maintenance Update Syslog Configuration Mode Disabled IP Adress 10 0 0 0 Port 514 Host Name Unit IP Address Update password for View level Enter new passwor Figure 3 4 Terminal Mode Menus for secadmin Login The Main Menu display is Quit ID Settings Metering Records Event Log Utilities Access Quit Provides the device serial number hardware revision software version re quired settings version nominal system values and external input board rating There are no user settings here L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 Settings D02333R05 00 3 Using the IED Getting Started Submenus Active Group Settings Load from Offliner Retrieve to Offliner Allows input of all the setting information for the relay Includes all the sub menus to change relay settings related to protection functions when settings are changed they are not saved until you confirm the changes Save and Load Setting Changes Now y n
199. es that have trans formers connected and the PT connected on the line side of the breaker In this logic the present positive sequence voltage is compared with the posi tive sequence voltage of 2 cycles previously In an energization situation the VposOld would be near zero volts and the present Vpos would be approxi mately the nominal As time goes by the old Vpos gets updated with the nom inal voltage and would eventually equal the present When it gets within 10 volts secondary the top input to the AND gate would reset go to zero and reset the blocking function The second input is the previous 2 cycle positive sequence voltage and has an undervoltage setting of 30 volts This input goes high to block the distance re lays only if the positive sequence voltage from 2 cycles back was less than 30 volts approximately 50 nominal so for a line that has been previously en ergized and now experiences a fault no distance relay blocking takes place The third input the bottom one produces an output only if the positive se quence line current is less than 4 nominal or 4 0 of 5 A secondary 0 20 A secondary If this current has been that low for the 1 second pickup time de lay this input to the AND gate would go high For a de energized line this input would normally be high to allow the blocking scheme to operate if the other two inputs are high This input along with input two are present to help prevent any distance relay blocking f
200. es2 cS gg JSCADA11 Virtualingut 21 2 s21Tipszcs 12 scaom2 22 Virtuana 3 522cose52c5s 13 scana 23 Virtualinput23 4 sz2Tips2cs a14 SCADA14 aanere 5 521 522 Tripaz3 gg scapats as Virtual Ing e Manuas aelsoapanmg ag Virtuana 7 79CSEnableDisable 47 SCADAIT p Virtualinput27 slcapag melsoapnam Vitalin 2 alscapang malsoapam ag Virtuana 10 scanat 20 scapa20 so vrusmpas0 Figure L 20 Virtual Inputs L PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix L 11 Appendix L L PRO Setting Example Main and Auxiliary ProLogic statement 1 and 3 are used to provide a common tripping logic point Geck Breaker Trip for the circuit breaker this 1s analogous to creating a dc trip bus to gather the oa trip and no reclose or trip and reclose signals VI2 and VI4 are VI2 for main and VIA for auxiliary the trip and no reclose while VIS is the trip and reclose common to main and auxiliary signal ProLogic 1 52 1 Trip Iv Enabled Name 52 1 Trip AND Pickup Delay 0 00 seconds Dropout Delay 000 seconds v Target Enabled Input A VI2 52 1 Trip 52 CS Out Input VI5 52 1 52 2 Trip amp 79 x Figure L 21 ProLogic 1 52 1 Trip leie 2 elsle lien ProLogic 3 52 2 Trip Iv Enabled Name 52 2 Trip OR Pickup Delay 000 seconds Dropout Delay 000 seconds v Target Enabled Input Vvi4 52 2Trip52CS e Out Input VIS 52
201. est Guide 51 Timing Test 1 Monitor Timer Stop on Output Contact 11 2 Settimer start from single phase 0 0 A to 6 00 A transition this equates to 4x pickup Time Delay TMS x 0 5 x 0 00 13 5 F 0 5 x 0 00 Bir 2 255 p multiple 1 4 I 3 Inject fault Observe Relay Target 51 Trip on A 51 Directional Test Settings 51 Settings as above Line Angle 80 i e current lags voltage by 80 Note Operating Range 90 from line angle 51P Forward 266 m E 278 51P directional control 267 o Non directional SOP Forward 268 E 50P directional control SOP Reverse 278 269 lo Non directional el 51N Forward ie e ILpos E E 280 51N directional control 59 Vpos Main 2 volts RMS fixed Non directional 50N Forward o Non directional 272 50 ILpos 4 nominal RMS fixed Nds 50N Reverse 273 Non directional 46 51 Forward 274 ab E 282 46 51 directional control 275 Non directional 46 50 Forward 276 p ER 46 50 directional control 277 Non directional Figure 6 27 Directional Element Logic 6 32 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 D02333R05 00 6 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 51 Directional Test Procedure 1 y In Terminal Mode access relay Metering Logic Protection Logic Monitor 51 Pickup Alarm Apply single
202. ew Change or Service Ser Decisio View Only Y select lt F2 gt Quit F2 or lt F3 gt to continue System Es d Nop refreshes AG Screen Yes Invalid No A y System System cancels changes AG AG change atu Ms Any Ke y y y y Settings L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 4 36 4 Protection Functions and Specifications Settings Saved You can change the active setting group while saving setting changes or load ing settings from Offliner The relay prompts you for a setting group to acti vate you can keep the current setting group or switch to a new setting group following the settings save The following is the flow of events that can occur in the Editing Settings Screen Edit Settings Acess Level View Change or Service v Select Copy Accept ser I Group Changes Quit Selects Setting Quit M A Setting without F3 Quit Load Save E a lt Enter gt view i No System Yes opens Copy Copy Y SG Screen group System Saves all System Yes Changes keeps A Y Changes Exit Es Y Space System asks user for SG Y to activate System Setting T updates Copy Copy Quit
203. ewed through the RecordBase View analysis software While viewing a recording in RecordBase View select the View Setting button to dis play the settings RecordBase View will automatically launch L PRO Offliner to display the settings in summary form If the record contains Setting Groups the Offliner displays all Setting Groups in the summary Bold text in the tree view indicates an active Setting Group the Setting Group used at the time the record was captured The setting sum mary is read only To edit the setting file associated with the summary you must use File Save As to save the summary to a file Then close the summary screen and open the setting file for editing L PRO Offliner Settings UNITID 2001 10 16_09 27 36 992 Ips in x D Edt window Help laj x Dag selek Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 x S Selting Group 2 Seting Group 2 Sets Summary kees Setting Group 3 Setting Group 3 L PRO Settings Summary Setting Group 2 Setting Group 2 Setting Group 4 Setting Group 4 Setting Group 5 Setting Group 5 Setting Group 6 Setting Group 6 Setting Group 7 Setting Group 7 Name SymbolValue Setting Group 8 Setting Group 8 Relay Identification Settings Version 5 Serial Number LPRO 2100 000915 13 Nominal CT Secondary Current 5A Nominal System Frequency enne Relay ID UnitiD Comments Date Created Modified pt Oct 16 09 26 13 Station Name Station Name Station Number i Locat
204. f enabled can be configured to drive the carrier start logic The 51N is configured in the 50N 51N screen while the 50N 67F is configured in the scheme selector screen both elements are forward directional elements The carrier block logic is traditionally initiated by the Zone 4 distance ele ments but the L PRO provides one directional neutral overcurrent element that can be used in addition to the Zone 4 distance elements The device 50N 67R if enabled can be configured to drive the carrier block logic The 50N 67R is configured in the scheme selector screen and is a reverse directional element The scheme selector can also be configured to enable the 50N 67F and 50N 67R directional overcurrent elements as inputs to ProLogic statements The 50N 67F element can be set to either forward directional or non directional when you select the action ProLogic Only If the pickup delay setting Tp lt 9ms Oms will be used for the delay Other wise Tp will be used for the delay This change is always applied regardless of the direction setting Non dir FWD REV and the 310 pickup level L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 4 Protection Functions and Specifications Note If the directional element can not determine a valid direction the direc tion is set to forward the 50N 67F may operate and the 50N 67R element is blocked See Directional Element on page 4 7 Basic Logic The basic selection does not provide any communication
205. f the relay an alphanumeric display and keypad for system monitoring and a front panel RS 232 port Relay Output and DC Analog Input Board External Input and Comm Board Power Supply AC Analog Board Input Board 486 CPU Board Main Processor Board Front Panel Board L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 Appendix D Event Messages D02333R05 00 L PRO Event Messages Event Log Message Notes 21P1 ABC 12 3km Trip 21P2 ABC 12 3km Trip 21P3 ABC 12 3km Trip 21P4 ABC 12 3km Trip The possible phase information for 21P1 21P4 will be AB BC CA AB BC AB CA CA BC ABC ABG BCG CAG ABGBC BCGCA CAGAB ABCG 21N1 AG 12 3km Trip 21N2 AG 12 3km Trip 21N3 AG 12 3km Trip 21N4 AG 12 3km Trip The possible phase information for 21N1 N4 will be AG BG CG ABG BCG CAG ABCG 21P2 ABC 12 3km Alarm 21P3 ABC 12 3km Alarm 21P4 ABC 12 3km Alarm The possible phase information for 21P2 21P4 will be AB BC CA AB BC AB CA CA BC ABC ABG BCG CAG ABGBC BCGCA CAGAB ABCG 21N2 AG 12 3km Alarm 21N3 AG 12 3km Alarm 21N4 AG 12 3km Alarm 51N AG 12 3km Trip 50N AG 12 3km Trip The possible phase information for 21N2 N4 and 50N 51N will be AG BG CG ABG BCG CAG ABCG 46 51 Trip 46 50 T
206. for Breaker Fail 81 Over Under Rate of Change of Frequency 25C Sync Check 79 Recloser 1 Browse to find the following Offliner Setting file LPROaccTestsetting60hz in C Program Files ERLPhase L PRO Set tings 2 Double click the Setting file to open Enter the serial number of the relay you re testing or check Ignore Serial Number checkbox identification Cl Relay Relay Identification C Analog Inputs identification External Inputs GE Output Contacts Dos ven a Virtual Inputs Ignore Serial Number Setting Groups i rm en ee sere number s ashe os RE on the back of the relay System Parameters Unit ID R00001 Record Length S Setting Group 1 B0 21 68AAVDLPu Nominal CT Sec Current 5A ei Line Parameters Nominal System Frequency 60Hz v Scheme Selector 14 Breaker Status Standard 1 0 9 External Inputs 14 Output Contacts amp amp Protection Functions Optional IO Not installed EN Z Circle Trigger Comments 230kV i ProLogic Group Logic Software Setting L Output Matrix Setting Name Demonstration C Settings Summary 1 Setting Group 2 OverCurrent 27 59 Date CreatediModified D003 05 07 15 03 55 o 7 Setting Group 3 25 81 79 I T C Setting Group 4 Setting Group 4 Station 7 Setting Group 5 Setting Group 5 Station Name Sub ABC 83 Setting Group 6 Setting Group 8 Stetion Number 1234 7 Setting Group 7 Set
207. g Groups Line Length 20000 km System Parameters O Record Length Sequence Impedance E Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 E Line Parameters Positive Sequence Impedance Z1 1440 ohm Scheme Selector Positive Sequence Angle Z1 800 deg C Breaker Status 56 Protection Functions Zero Sequence inpecence Z0 3500 ohm C Z Circle Trigger Zero Sequence Angle Z0 700 deg 1 ProLogic Group Logic C Output Matrix C Settings Summary C Setting Group 2 Setting Group 2 E Setting Group 3 Setting Group 3 E L Setting Group 4 Setting Group 4 5 Setting Group 5 Setting Group 5 C Setting Group 6 Setting Group 6 4 Setting Group 7 Setting Group 7 IL 7 Setting Group 8 Setting Group 8 ed KO Magnitude 051 KO Angle 165 deg L PRO Offiiner Settings v8 Setting Gr Figure 5 18 Line Parameters L PRO User Manual 2100 5 17 5 Offliner Settings Software 5 18 Line Parameters Line Line to Line Voltage kV Primary Line Length 0 50 to 2000 00 km or 0 31 to 1250 miles Sequence Impedance Positive Sequence Impedance Z1 0 05 to 66 00 ohms secondary 5 A 0 25 to 330 00 ohms secondary 1 A Positive Sequence Angle Z1 45 0 to 89 0 degrees Zero Sequence Impedance Z0 0 05 to 66 00 ohms secondary 5 A 0 25 to 330 00 ohms secondary 1 A Zero Sequence Angle Z0 45 0 to 89 0 degrees KO KO Override Enable disable
208. h 10262 0 Off inactive 1 On active External Input 7 Change of state latch 10263 0 Off inactive 1 On active External Input 8 Change of state latch 10264 0 Off inactive 1 On active External Input 9 Change of state latch 10265 0 Off inactive 1 On active External Input 10 Change of state latch 10266 0 Off inactive 1 On active External Input 11 Change of state latch 10267 0 Off inactive 1 On active L PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix E 3 Appendix E Modbus RTU Communication Protocol Appendix E 4 Read Input Status Function Code 02 External Input 12 Change of state latch 0268 0 Off inactive On active External Input 13 Change of state latch 0269 0 Off inactive On active External Input 14 Change of state latch 0270 0 Off inactive On active External Input 15 Change of state latch 0271 0 Off inactive On active External Input 16 Change of state latch 0272 0 Off inactive On active External Input 17 Change of state latch 0273 0 Off inactive On active External Input 18 Change of state latch 0274 0 Off inactive On active External Input 19 Change of state latch 0275 0 Off inactive On active External Input 20 Change of state latch 0276 0 Off i
209. hannels of external inputs provided by the External Input and Comm Board Inputs are optically isolated factory pre set to the cus tomer s requested voltage level Two dual range user selectable external input voltage level model of the External Input and Comm Board are available This allows you to select between 48 Vdc and 125 Vdc or 125 Vdc and 250 Vdc nominal on a per input basis The External Input and Comm Board also provides the relay with 2 rear panel RS 232 ports IRIG B time synchronization input and optional network or telephone connection The RS 232 ports are female DB 9S connectors IRIG B is a male BNC and network or telephone is a female RJ 45 modular jack The Relay Output Board provides 14 normally open contact outputs for relay ing alarms and control one normally closed output contact for indicating proper relay operation The power supply operates from 40 to 300 Vdc or 120 Vac 20 at 50 60 Hz This wide operating range provides easier installation by eliminating pow er supply ordering options The AC Analog Input Board has 12 current transformer inputs and 6 potential transformer inputs for ac current and voltage inputs On board anti aliasing fil ters provide accurate and secure digitization of the ac input signals The MPB has analog data acquisition high speed digital signal processing for triggering and data conversion communications and interface logic to per form the core functions of the relay Th
210. he relay use HyperTerminal s Call Connect function When the connection is established press ENTER in the terminal window to bring up the following login prompt Log in using one of the following usernames view read only access to settings and readings change read write access to settings and readings service full access to all functions Port 1 access only maintenance access to the maintenance menu update to load a firmware update Port 1 access only Notes Serial and modem connections have a 60 minute inactivity timeout Usernames and passwords are case sensitive login Instructions on logging in and running the user interface are given in Terminal Mode on page 3 5 If you see incorrect characters on a direct serial connection it may mean there is a mismatch between the relay s baud rate and that of the PC Use the Quit function in the relay s user menu to end a session This will close the interface and require the next user to log in to the relay The relay automatically ends a session when it detects the disconnecting of a direct serial cable or a modem hang up For other types of connections e g se rial switches or Ethernet you are advised to use the Quit function to ensure the interface is closed and login protection is activated L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 2 Setup and Communications Setting the Baud Rate Direct Serial Link Modem Link D02333R05 00 The baud rat
211. high after the 10 00 second delay if EI 1 is low ProLogic 9 is set for a 0 26 second dropout time to be used with ProLogic 10 dropout timer allowing for the slower pro cessing thread where Group Logic is processed and providing a definite timed pulse to the group logic ProLogic 9 ProLogic 9 Iv Enabled Name ProLogic 9 AND Pickup Delay 10 00 seconds 0 o 0 Dropout Delay 0 26 seconds HC Um ac v Target Enabled IB 1 ae Out InputA El Selector 1 Figure L 1 ProLogic 9 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 D02333R05 00 Appendix L L PRO Setting Example Prologic 10 has no intentional delay and becomes high for the combined drop out time of ProLogic 9 and 10 equalling 0 52 seconds ProLogic 10 ProLogic 10 Iv Enabled Name ProLogic 10 AND Pickup Delay 0 00 seconds D Dropout Delay 026 seconds 0 1 D JV Target Enabled Input A El 1 Selector 1 Input B PL 9 ProLogic 9 x Figure L 2 ProLogic 10 Group Logic is used to switch to the new setting group there is no intentional delay You can also provide 4 additional logic inputs to be used to provide qualifiers before switching setting groups The example uses a ProLogic state ment and an external input as qualifiers see example Using ProLogic to Qual ify Group Logic Statements in Appendix L on page Appendix L 8 Group Logic 1 Group Logic 1 v Enabled Mame Group Log
212. ic C Group Logic C Output Matrix 5 Setting Group 2 Setting Group 2 C Setting Group 3 Setting Group 3 C Setting Group 4 Setting Group 4 Setting Group 5 Setting Group 5 C Setting Group 6 Setting Group 6 Setting Group 7 Setting Group 7 EcL Setting Group 8 Setting Group 8 L PRO Settings Summary Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 Symbol Value Relay Identification Settings Version 8 Serial Number LPRO 2100 991001 01 Relay ID UnitiD Setting Name Nor ondary Current Defaut Settings 5A m Frequency Nor 60Hz Comments Comments Date Created Modified 2000 09 06 16 21 22 Station Name Station Name Station Number Location Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 Setting Group Comments 4 Location Analog Input Names LVA Main Voltage A LVB Main Voltage B LBC Main Voltage C LIA Main Line Current A LiB LIC Main Line Current B Main Line Current C TES ner L PRO Offliner Settings v8 Figure 5 24 Settings Summary Select Settings Summary to view and print the relay settings in text form for details see IED Settings and Ranges in Appendix B L PRO User Manual 2100 5 23 5 Offliner Settings Software Settings From a Record 5 24 The settings on the relay at the time of a recording are included in every record and can be vi
213. ic 1 AND Setting Group to Activate sc 2 Setting Group 2 Pickup Delay D seconds 0 1 it 2 o o o J o jo Input A PL 10 ProLogic 10 Input B PL 8 Block Group Logic x Out Input C El 4 43CS Local Remote EI Figure L 3 Group Logic 1 L PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix L 3 Appendix L L PRO Setting Example Setting Group 2 Logic Statements When setting group 2 becomes active either through a setting group change or is the default group after relay power up ProLogic 9 becomes high after the 10 00 second delay if external input one is low The example shows ProLogic 9 set for a 0 26 second dropout time to be used with ProLogic 10 dropout timer allowing for the slower processing thread where Group Logic is processed and providing a definite timed pulse to the group logic ProLogic 9 ProLogic 9 I v Enabled Name ProLogic 9 AND Pickup Delay 10 00 seconds Ema D Dropout Delay 026 seconds 9 2 1 v Target Enabled 1 Out Input A El 1 Selector 1 Figure L 4 ProLogic 9 Prologic 10 has no intentional delay and becomes high for the combined drop out time of ProLogic 9 and 10 equalling 0 52 seconds ProLogic 10 ProLogic 10 V Enabled Name ProLogic 10 AND Pickup Delay 0 00 Seconds EgE Dropout Delay 026 seconds v Target Enabled Input A El 1 Selector 1 X Input B PL 9 ProLogic 9 Figure L 5 ProL
214. ic 3 ProLogic 3 Disabled Target Enabled Pickup Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt ProLogic 4 ProLogic 4 ProLogic 4 Disabled Target Enabled Pickup Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 L PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix B 13 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Appendix B 14 L PRO Settings Summary Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt ProLogic 5 ProLogic 5 ProLogic 5 Disabled Target Enabled Pickup Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt ProLogic 6 ProLogic 6 ProLogic 6 Disabled Target Enabled Pickup Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Dr
215. ient distorted voltage waveforms This combination of tech niques provides a secure method for detecting and correcting CCVT transient phenomena On one hand it improves the reach accuracy of 21 devices dra matically during the period of the CCVT subsidence transient On the other hand it won t sacrifice the relay operation speed very much It does not add any additional delay when the SIR is low lt 1 2 In the worst case it adds about one cycle delay when the SIR is high 715 For the operation time details refer to IED Specifications in Appendix A This compensation algorithm can be enabled or disabled through settings Note that this algorithm is applied to all 21 devices once it s enabled For the applications without CCVTs this compensation al gorithm should be disabled so as to eliminate the possible additional delay introduced by this algorithm L PRO User Manual 2100 4 13 4 Protection Functions and Specifications Line Energization Supervision Logic 4 14 Vpos VposOld gt 10 volts VposOld lt 30 volts Block all 21 devices 1 sec Ipos lt 4 of Nominal Current 50ms Note Vpos is the present positive sequence voltage VposOld is the positive sequence voltage at two cycles before Figure 4 10 Line Energization Supervision Logic This logic has been introduced in order to prevent potentially erroneous oper ations of the 21 upon energizing of T tapped transmission lin
216. iew Previous Next Clear Time Reading Logs Target View Readi hc Z View Logs 2000Jun28 Line 5 Dey 9 34 31 823 ce 51 Trip Previous Next Active Setting Group 1 lt Group Name gt Port 1 38400bps N 8 1 Port 2 9600bps N 8 1 Figure 3 2 Display examples Pressing Previous and Next navigates through the Active Setting Group L PRO Front Panel Display Messages PRI V I P Q Va la magnitude and angle Vb Ib magnitude and angle Vc Ic magnitude and angle Frequency Fault location trip date and time and all functions L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 3 Using the IED Getting Started Terminal Mode D02333R05 00 LPRO Unit ID UnitID Main Menu User Access Level VIEW 2015Nov17 22 28 ME Settings Metering Records Event Log Utilities Access Quit Establish terminal mode connection for details Using HyperTerminal to Access the Relay s User Interface on page 2 5 2 Login as one of view change service or secadmin lower case These 4 login names provide differing levels of permission 3 When connection is established and the terminal mode program appears on your screen the following prompt should appear If it doesn t appear press Enter ERLPhase L PRO 2100 Terminal User Interface login Log in using one of the following usernames uiew read only access to settings and readings change read write access to settings and readings
217. imeSettings 46483 1 ACCS IED Time Settings change Calibration 46483 1 ACCS IED Calibration Settings change SysArchive 46483 1 ACCS Access to IED System Archive Event 46483 1 SYST IED System Event L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 IP Ports and Services D02333R05 00 8 Cyber Security Table 8 5 IP Ports and Services describes IP ports and services available within L PRO Table 8 5 IP Ports and Services Port Control Protocol Service Comments 23 Always enabled TCP Telnet User interface access 20000 Enabled disabled TCP UDP DNP3 DNP3 communication Port number is configurable Port is disabled if DNP3 SCADA communication over Ethernet is disabled 514 Enabled disabled UDP Syslog Syslog server communication Port number is configurable L PRO User Manual 2100 8 7 8 Cyber Security IEEE 1686 Table of Compliance ais Clause sub Clause Title Status Comment 5 IED cyber security features Acknowledge 5 1 Electronic access control Exception 5 1 1 IED access control overview Comply 5 1 2 Password defeat mechanisms Comply 5 1 3 Number of individual users Exception Number of individual users is 6 5 1 4 Password construction Exception Password complexity rules are not enforced but can be validated 5 1 5 IED access control Exception 5 1 5 1 Authorization levels by password E
218. index 30 3 Analog Input 32 bit without flag 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop 00 01 start stop 07 08 limited qty 17 28 index 30 4 Analog Input 16 bit without flag 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop 07 08 limited qty 17 28 index 32 0 Analog Input Event Any Variation 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index 07 08 limited qty 32 1 Analog Input Event 32 bit without 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index time 07 08 limited qty 430 unsel resp 32 2 Analog Input Event 16 bit without 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index time 07 08 limited qty 430 unsel resp 32 3 Analog Input Event 32 bit with time 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index 07 08 limited qty 32 4 Analog Input Event 16 bit with time 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index 07 08 limited qty 40 0 Analeg Output Status Any Vara 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response tion Appendix F 28 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile DNP Object Group amp Variation Request Outstation parses Response Outstation can issue Group Var Yl Function Codes W i Function Codes Wa Num Num Description dec Qualifier Codes hex dec Qualifier Codes hex 40 2 Analeg Gutput Status
219. infeed logic 4 44 D02333R05 00
220. ion Location Setting Group 2 Setting Group 2 al p Setting Group Comments APT L PRO Offliner Settings v6 Setting Group 2 Figure 5 25 View Setting Summary in RecordBase View L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 6 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide Acceptance Testing Test Equipment Requirements D02333R05 00 ERL Phase relays are fully tested before leaving the factory A visual inspec tion of the relay and its packaging is recommended on receipt to ensure the re lay was not damaged during shipping The electronics in the relay contain static sensitive devices and are not user serviceable If the front of the relay is opened for any reason exposing the electronics take extreme care to ensure that you and the relay are solidly grounded Generally an analog metering check as well as testing the I O External Inputs and Output Contacts is sufficient to ensure the functionality of the relay Fur ther tests can be performed on delivery and acceptance of the purchaser s op tion according to the published relay specifications in IED Settings and Ranges in Appendix B The following acceptance test section is intended to be a guide for testing any and all protection elements in the relay The most convenient time to perform these tests is on delivery prior to applying in service settings Once in service settings are applied ERLPhase recommends that you test enabled funct
221. ion Pin on the Modem lt gt Relay Modem Adapter DCD E 1 RxD gt 2 TxD c 3 DTR lt 4 Common 5 DSR gt 6 RTS lt 7 CTS E 8 No connection 9 Relay with modem adapter is DTE modem is DCE Pins 1 and 6 are tied together internal to the relay L PRO User Manual 2100 2 Setup and Communications Maintenance Menu The relay has a Maintenance Menu that can be accessed by connection through a VT 100 terminal emulator such as the HyperTerminal program Using ei ther direct serial or modem connection 1 Use the terminal program to connect to the serial port either through direct serial link or modem 2 Select Enter the relay responds with a login prompt ERLPhase L PRO 2100 Terminal User Interface login Log in using one of the following usernames view read only access to settings and readings change read write access to settings and readings service full access to all functions Port 1 access only secadmin access to security configuration maintenance access to the maintenance menu update to load a firmware update Port 1 access only Notes Serial and modem connections have a 60 minute inactivity timeout Usernames and passwords are case sensitive login Figure 2 5 Login Prompt 3 Login as maintenance in lower case 4 Relay responds with password prompt login maintenance Last login Mon Nov 16 22 47 57 2015 on 1 dev ser1 Mon Nov 16 22 53 23 2015 p
222. ion x where x is the newer version A dialogue box pops up prompting Offliner for a new file name Use either the same file name or enter a new file name The con version process inserts default values for any newly added devices in the new setting file When the conversion is complete Offliner Settings dis plays the new file Sae as 2ixi Save in C L PRO Settings J er E d sample ke Save as type Settings File Ekel zi Figure 5 3 Converting Setting Files Sending a New 1 Make sure the settings version and the serial number of the relay in the set Setting File to the ting file match The relay will reject the setting file if either the serial num Relay ber or the settings version do not match A serial number discrepancy message may appear This is to en sure that you are aware of the exact relay in which settings are to be loaded If this happens check the relay serial number using the terminal mode ID menu item Type this serial number into the L PRO Serial No box in the Identification tab display area of Offliner Settings Alternately you may check the Ignore Serial Number check box to bypass serial number supervision 2 Check the serial number and the settings version of the relay for details see ID on page 3 10 The Device Serial Number and Required Settings Ver sion on the Identification screen indicate the serial number and the settings version of the relay Cre
223. ions to ensure the designed application is fulfilled 3 ac voltage sources variable frequency capability e 3 ac current sources 1 ohmmeter e 1 125 Vdc test supply Set nominal CT secondary current to either 5 A or 1 A and nominal system frequency to either 60 Hz or 50 Hz This example uses 5 A 60 Hz L PRO User Manual 2100 6 1 6 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide Calibration 6 2 The relay is calibrated before it leaves the factory but if component changes are made within the relay you may need to do a re calibration Before you begin a new calibration establish the accuracy of the equipment being used To perform a calibration you must be logged into the relay in Terminal Mode at the Service access level Proceed to the Utilities Maintenance Calibrate The Calibrate menu leads you through every analog input and prompts you to apply the appropriate quantity e COM 2 HyperTerminal E lojxj Ele Edt View Cal Transfer Help BE AE EAEE LPRO Unit ID UnitID Util Maintenance User flccess Level SERVICE 2003Jun23 13 21 prev menu utputs Control Virtual Inputs Erase Calibration ENG Co VO Main Main VC Main IA Calibrate AC Input Channel Main IB Main IC Channel Main VA x IA fux B Enter Actual Applied Signal Level 69 Vrms nominal ESAT Vrms IA3 Aux VA v KENTER gt Calibrate lt F2 gt Accept lt F3 gt Quit Connected 1 56
224. ious Next Q Test Mode Alarm Port 1 1 Front display of time alarms and relay target 2 Relay target LED red 3 LEDs indicating status of relay 4 Communications serial port 1 for laptop computer 5 Clear target push button 6 Push buttons to manipulate information on LED display Figure 1 2 L PRO Front View 1 2 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 Rear View amp D02333R05 00 1 Overview ub ESL MN M Network mer Pot2 Porta Direct Modem SCADA Je Output Contacts BC 300 10 192 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 SE Qut 1 7 Out 23 7 Out 3 a H Out A Out BN F Out 7 Out 8 T Out 8 Out 10 Out 1A Out 1 0u 134 0u 1 ENE 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 Seva ere AR EE Se 2 2 E eee Peeeeeeee eee e 7T
225. ipping scheme Logic for 2 communication receivers can be used for 3 terminal lines or if the telecommunications use 2 separate communication channels You can set the communications receivers to use one of 9 external inputs or one of the 12 Pro Logic statements The same input cannot be shared between the 2 communica tion receivers The output matrix is used to configure the communications scheme send per missive trip or block and the communications scheme trip local tripping to any combination of the 14 available output contacts The user set dropout ex tension on output contacts is eliminated on any contact that is configured to op erate for the communication scheme send signal you can provide your own dropout time delay with timer setting TD3 The communications aided tripping scheme options use the general distance and overcurrent protection functions of the L PRO along with directional overcurrent elements specifically included in the scheme These elements use the memory polarization as described in the Relay Method of Memory Polar ization on page 4 5 and the directional element as described in Directional Element on page 4 7 The carrier start logic is traditionally initiated by the Zone 2 distance elements but the L PRO provides 2 directional neutral overcurrent elements that can be used in addition to the Zone 2 distance elements The device 51N time over current element and the 50N 67F instantaneous overcurrent i
226. is test inject only single phase current This method introduces an equal proportion of positive and negative sequence current This assures that there is sufficient positive sequence current to enable directional control of the nega tive sequence element if a polarizing voltage is also applied Positive sequence I1 Negative Sequence I2 Zero Sequence 310 are cal culated by using the following equations L alg a lc 3 Equation 5 I where a 1 7120 I 8 Ip alc 3 Equation 6 I where a 1 7120 Equation 7 310 I4 Igt Ic 6 34 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 D02333R05 00 6 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide Using Equation 6 notice that there is a need to triple the pickup setting current on one phase to obtain the pickup value of negative sequence current For example injecting 1 0 A on Phase A only Phase B Phase C 0 and with no voltage applied the 46 51 element becomes non directional even though the setting is directional 2 R WEE E 0 334 46 51 Test Procedure 1 In Terminal Mode access relay Metering Logic Protection Logic Monitor 46 51 Alarm 2 Apply single phase current to the L PRO terminals as follows Ph A 300 301 2 5 A 3 Slowly ramp the current up At 2 9 to 3 1 A expect 3 0 A 46 51 Pickup Alarm High 4 Turn current source off 46 51 Timing Test 1 Monitor Timer Stop on Output Contact 9 2 Settimer start from single phas
227. ix K 1 Appendix L L PRO Setting Example Protection Timers and I O Status Latch Status Event Status Reset Viewing Active Setting Group Front Panel Active Setting Group Flash Memory Write D02333R05 00 The relay does not block any protection functions or external inputs during the setting save or active group change but the external output contacts are reset for one cycle The relay applies the setting parameters resets all protection functions resets all timers and continues to process the protection algorithms but does not apply any action to the output contacts for one cycle For close in heavy fault con ditions that occur at the time of a setting change the relay performance has a maximum increase in output delay of one cycle For light fault conditions the relay performance does not have a noticeable change There is normally a one cycle decision making process The relay algorithms have been processing and when the one cycle blocking ends and the contacts are closed immediately 3ms hardware delay The relay does not reset any ProLogic Group Logic or Virtual Input latch func tions during the setting save or active group change Retaining latch status al lows the relay continuous access to specific latched logic states This is useful when the relay has ProLogic Group Logic or Virtual Input functions used to block protection or ancillary functions for specific operating conditions The relay resets all the ev
228. ker failure protection functions 50BF Main and 50BF Auxiliary one for each breaker When breaker failure is initiated by a trip or other internal logic user settable through the output matrix and the breaker current still ex Ists 2 timers T1 and T2 user settable are started When these timers are timed out and if the current still exists which indicates breaker failure the output of this function is set high Use the 2 outputs of this function to trip an other trip coil or the next level of breakers such as bus breakers Phase current supervision is fixed at 4 of I nominal and is shown for a 5 A relay 50 1a fixed 0 2 amps 50 1b fixed 0 2 amps 50 1c fixed 0 2 amps Ts Output2 Figure 4 20 50BF Main Breaker Failure Breaker failure Initiator from Output Matrix 50 Breaker Failure Main Enable disable Pickup Delay 1 0 01 to 99 00 seconds Pickup Delay 2 0 01 to 99 00 seconds Auxiliary Enable disable Pickup Delay 1 0 01 to 99 00 seconds Pickup Delay 2 0 01 to 99 00 seconds L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 50 51 67 Phase Overcurrent D02333R05 00 4 Protection Functions and Specifications Phase Overcurrent provides backup protection to the line You can define for ward reverse or non directional control on either 50 or 51 functions Device 51 provides 3 IEC inverse time curve types 3 IEEE inverse time types of overcurrent protection and one user defined curve
229. l Input 2 0002 0 Off inactive 1 On active External Input 3 0003 0 Off inactive 1 On active External Input 4 0004 0 Off inactive 1 On active External Input 5 0005 0 Off inactive 1 On active External Input 6 0006 0 Off inactive 1 On active External Input 7 0007 0 Off inactive 1 On active External Input 8 0008 0 Off inactive 1 On active External Input 9 0009 0 Off inactive 1 On active External Input 10 0010 0 Off inactive 1 On active External Input 11 0011 0 Off inactive 1 On active External Input 12 0012 0 Off inactive 1 On active External Input 13 0013 0 Off inactive 1 On active External Input 14 0014 0 Off inactive 1 On active External Input 15 0015 0 Off inactive 1 On active External Input 16 0016 0 Off inactive 1 On active External Input 17 0017 0 Off inactive 1 On active External Input 18 0018 0 Off inactive 1 On active External Input 19 0019 0 Off inactive 1 On active External Input 20 0020 0 Off inactive 1 On active External Input 1 Change of state latch 10257 0 Off inactive 1 On active External Input 2 Change of state latch 10258 0 Off inactive 1 On active External Input 3 Change of state latch 10259 0 Off inactive 1 On active External Input 4 Change of state latch 10260 0 Off inactive 1 On active External Input 5 Change of state latch 10261 0 Off inactive 1 On active External Input 6 Change of state latc
230. l cur rent specified when ordered The range is 0 05 to 66 00 ohms for a 5A nominal relay and 0 25 to 330 00 ohms for a 1A nominal relay Figure 4 1 Phase and Ground Mho The shape of the phase and ground distance relays is adjustable For the circu lar Mho characteristic the characteristic angle is 90 degrees Determine this angle by drawing 2 lines from any point on the impedance locus to the diameter of the characteristic Produce a tomato shaped characteristic by selecting an angle less than 90 degrees or a lens shaped characteristic with angles greater than 90 degrees Line angle Line angle Circle 90 Tomato lt 90 Lens gt 90 L PRO User Manual 2100 4 1 4 Protection Functions and Specifications Figure 4 2 Mho Characteristic Shapes The shape ofthe Mho characteristic means that significant extensions are made to the relay characteristics in the R region of the R X plane for ground faults You can restrict the reach in the R region for the phase distance relays where load encroachment is an issue The shaped Mho characteristic provides the best fit for the application keeping the number of relay settings at a minimum and provides the benefits associated with the Mho characteristic The Mho characteristic used by the relay is developed by the classical ap proach using the measurement of the angle between 2 vectors These vectors are defined as A IxZ V where V is the actual line voltage for ground di
231. l event log is available through the Event Log menu of the terminal user interface This display is a snapshot of the event list which must be manually refreshed to display new events that occur while the display is up There is a list of Event Messages for details see Event Messages in Appendix D L PRO User Manual 2100 4 47 5 Offliner Settings Software Introduction PC System Requirements D02333R05 00 L PRO Offliner Settings Document 1 2 Elle Edit Window Help lolx 18 xl oejm B ee in f am R elay Identification Setting Groups System Parameters Record Length C Setting Group 1 Setting Group 4 Line Parameters Scheme Selector Breaker Status C Protection Functions O Z Circle Trigger O Relay 7 Analog inputs PENNE External Inputs SCT C Output Contacts i Virtual Inputs T Ignore Serial Number Serial Number LPRO 2100 asioo1 or Reter to the Seier Unit io unio Nominal CT Sec Current 58 zl Nominal System Frequency sa Hz x Standard uo S External inputs 14 Output Contacts Optional IO Not installed Comments Comments Settings Summary 0 Setting Group 2 Setting Group 2 HO ProLogic C Group Logic Software Setting C Output Matrix Setting Name Default Settings Date CreatediModified 2000 09 06 16 21 22 E Setting Group 3 Setting Group 3
232. le Invalid Selection x Main Breaker and Aux Breaker are not allowed to connect to the same input Figure L 19 Invalid Selection Examples to test the 79 functions using Virtual Inputs and ProLogic to simu late the reclose initiation and breaker contact a status are shown below Virtual Inputs are multi use logic points that are accessed remotely via SCA DA control and or locally via the terminal user interface UI We will set up 6 virtual inputs to trip and close each breaker and to initiate the 79 You could also use external inputs to provide the breaker a trip close and initiate signals but by using virtual inputs and ProLogic testing is quicker and does not require an external DC supply or relays to simulate the circuit breakers The Virtual Input VI names are used for descriptive purposes This name will appear in the event log when the logic point becomes active The L PRO Relay supports 2 circuit breakers and in this example we will name the main circuit breaker 52 1 and the auxiliary circuit breaker 52 2 Virtual Inputs 1 2 3 and 4 will be used as control switches CS for tripping and closing while Virtual Input 7 will be used to enable or disable the 79 Virtual Input 5 is used to trip circuit breakers 52 1 and 52 2 and to provide recloser initiation Virtual Input 6 is used to provide recloser initiation without any tripping used to help test logic Virtual Input Names 4 521 Clos
233. lease enter a command Current default ay is 192 168 100 2 ant to change the IP address 84 71 2015 09 24T16 12 13 06 00 192 168 103 10 secmgrn ACCS Configuration 46483 1 act write status success user maintenance IP address Mode IP fiddress Port f Host Name Figure 8 1 Unit IP Address as Host Name rIdentification rSyslog Configuration UDP 192 168 103 2 914 Unit Serial Number Device Serial Number Software Version Required Settings Vers B LPRO 2100 110614 01 VU Nominal System Fr 60 Hz Nominal Curren oA Standard I 0 125V 250V External Inputs 9 Output Contacts 14 lt 84 gt 1 2015 09 24T16 12 13 06 00 LPRO 2100 110614 01 secmgr ACCS Configuration 46483 1 act write status sucess user maintenance IP address D02333R05 00 Figure 8 2 Unit Serial Number as Host Name L PRO User Manual 2100 8 5 8 Cyber Security rSyslog Configuration Mode UDP IP Address 192 168 103 2 Port M4 Host Name rLPRO Unit ID Line_X 2_TED1 Main Menu Settings User Access Level VIEW prev menu Active Group Load from Offliner Retrieve to Offliner 2015Nov25 22 44 Line Parameters common Setting Group Setting Group Setting Group Setting Group Setting Group Setting Group Setting Group Setting Group Recording DO zl Ch E Cre r L PRO Settings i P Nidentification
234. lts At 70 to 74 V expect 72 V 59 Aux O V High 59 Main O V High Contact 14 Closed End of 59 test 50N 51N Neutral Neutral Instantaneous and Time Overcurrent Test Overcurrent Test Settings Both Directional 50N Pickup 10 0 A SIN Pickup 1 0 A Time Curve IEEE Moderately Inverse A 0 0103 B 0 0228 p 0 02 TMS 3 0 50N directional control if Directional T must be greater than 10 ms 50 310 5ms 0 Alarm Timer is active only if it s directional Figure 6 25 Neutral Instantaneous and Time Overcurrent Logic 50N 51N 51N directional control 51310 D02333R05 00 L PRO User Manual 2100 6 29 6 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 50N and 51N Test Procedure Note with 0 voltage applied the unit becomes non directional i e picks up in both forward and reverse directions 1 In Terminal Mode access relay Metering Logic Protection Logic Monitor 51N Alarm Output Contact 6 50N Trip 2 Apply single phase current to the L PRO terminals as follows Ph A 300 301 0 5 A 3 Slowly ramp the current up At 0 95 to 1 05 A expect 1 0 A 51N Alarm High 4 Continue to raise current At 9 5 to 10 5 A expect 10 0 A 50N Trip High Contact 6 Closed 5 Turn current off 51N Alarm Low 50N Trip Low Timing Test 1 Monitor Timer Stop on Output Contact 7 2 Settimer start from single phase 0 0 A t
235. ly the capabilities and configurable methods columns The Device Profile Config Values contains only the Current Value column L PRO User Manual 2100 Not supported D02333R05 00 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile If configurable dnpDPcap xml Device Profile Capabilities dnpDPcfg xml Device Profile config val ues xml The Complete Device Profile Document contains the capabilities Current Value and configurable methods columns The Device Profile Capabilities contains only the capabilities and configurable methods columns The Device Profile Config Values contains only the Current Value column 1 1 Device Identification Capabilities Current Value x list methods 1 1 12 External DNP3 XML Rd WrFilenameDescription of Not supported files available Off line Contents dnpDP xml Complete Device Profile 1 1 13 Connections Supported D02333R05 00 I Serial complete section 1 2 I IP Networking complete section 1 3 Other explain L PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix F 3 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile If configurable 1 2 Serial Connections Capabilities Current Value f list methods 1 2 1 Port Name Port 3 1 2 2 Serial Connection Asynchronous 8 Data Bits 1 Start Bit 1 Stop Not configured L PRO Offliner Parameters Bit No Parity for DNP I Other explain Asynchronous with selectable parity 1 2 3 Baud Rate Fixed at N
236. mary Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 Follower Sequencer Switch Close after the Recloser Follower Time TF 59 Overvoltage 59 Main Enabled Gate Switch AND Pickup 50 0 V 1 0 to 138 0 Pickup Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 10 00 59 Auxiliary Enabled Gate Switch AND Pickup 50 0 V 1 0 to 138 0 Pickup Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 10 00 27 Undervoltage 27 Main Enabled Gate Switch AND Pickup 10 0 V 1 0 to 120 0 Pickup Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 10 00 27 Auxiliary Enabled Gate Switch AND Pickup 10 0 V 1 0 to 120 0 Pickup Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 10 00 Loss Of Potential Alarm 60 60 Enabled 11 Blocking 10 0 A 0 5 to 50 0 310 Blocking 2 0 A 0 5 to 50 0 81 Over Under Frequency 81 1 Fixed Level Pickup 60 005 Hz 50 000 59 995 or 60 005 70 000 Pickup Delay 2 00 s 0 05 to 99 99 81 2 Fixed Level Pickup 60 005 Hz 50 000 59 995 or 60 005 70 000 Pickup Delay 2 00 s 0 05 to 99 99 81 3 Rate of Change Pickup 10 0 Hz s 10 0 0 1 or 0 1 10 0 Pickup Delay 2 00 s 0 20 to 99 99 81 4 Rate of Change Pickup 10 0 Hz s 10 0 0 1 or 0 1 10 0 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 D02333R05 00 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges L PRO Settings Summary Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1
237. me 52 1 Close 52 CS Action KF3 gt Quit lt F2 gt Excecute Appendix L 14 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 D02333R05 00 Appendix L L PRO Setting Example 9 Check the event log for VII and VI3 along with PL2 and PLA Main Menu User Access Level SERUICE 2003May22 99 34 LPRO Unit ID UnitID is Settings Metering Records Utilities Access Quit Event Log TIME aaa 7 864 52 2 C High 52 1 a 3Ma v H 2003May22 89 33 02 439 52 1 Close 52 CS UI1 High B Bottom C UP amp C DOWN move one line age doun T Top F3 Quit 10 Go to the Control Virtual Inputs and select Manual 79 I using the Pulse On action for the virtual inputs This will initiate the recloser but no action will be taken because the circuit breakers remain closed LPRO Unit ID UnitID Util Maintenance User Access Level SERVICE 2001Dec1 16 23 prev menu Calibrate Outputs E ad MUN Erase Control Virtual Inputs Input Name Action Manual 791 KF3 gt Quit F2 Excecute 11 Check the event log and confirm there was no reclosure action LPRO Unit ID UnitID Main Menu User Access Level SERVICE 20803May22 89 43 ID Settings Metering Records Utilities Access Quit Event Log EVENT 2083May22 79 Initiated High 20803May22 Manual 79I UI6 High 2083May22 52 2 a status PL4 20803May22 89 52 2 Close 52 CS UI3 High 1 2003May22 09 40 41 900 52 1
238. meas 129 response D02333R05 00 L PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix G Mechanical Drawings z E jiss gt asg o go S Oo 25 6 4 mm 18 31 Figure G 1 Mechanical Drawing 3U Chassis D02333R05 00 L PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix G 1 Appendix G Mechanical Drawings 120 7 mm 5 3 mm 21 E P o g S E o EGE Lr Nero E Dio ho 3 Dorm O 5 o o o Figure G 2 Cut out Template 3U Chassis Appendix G 2 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 Appendix G Mechanical Drawings p n zi LA E Ei D E EN EL o ER B BB of gt S o S i o on E ED Fe nE EG d ip Ez je TO a Sq S J ye el A 0 mm E P 3i o og Q SO HO io BO ii es E Bi E gO E EE gt mE S ES S eg P os ER n as y D gt D Ho el T H DE 3E SE co L Figure G 3 Mechanical Drawing 4U Chassis L PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix G 3 D02333R05 00 Appendix G Mechanical Drawings E rs Y 9 6 a K L ER ER d SR o d E 3 E z Es Slo y Y o e amp t Figure G 4 Cut out Template 4U Chassis Appendix G 4 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 Appendix G Mechanical Drawings 9 mm 12 12 161 9 mm 6 38 L
239. ms tems 0 2083 ms for 50 Hz sys tems 1 8 8 Maximum Event Time 0 1736 ms for tag error for local I O 60Hz sys other than Binary and tems Double bit data types 0 2083 ms for ms 50 Hz sys tems Appendix F 12 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 Capabilities and Current Settings for Device Database Outstation Only Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile The following tables identify the capabilities and current settings for each DNP3 data type Each data type also provides a table defining the data points available in the device or a description of how this information can be obtained if the database 1s configurable 2 1 Single Bit Binary Inputs If configurable Static Steady State Group Number 1 Capabilities Current Value d Event Group Number 2 list methods 2 1 4 Static Variation reported I Variation 1 Single bit Packed format when variation 0 Variation 2 Single bit with flag requested Based on point Index add column to table below 2 1 2 Event Variation Variation 1 without time reported when variation I Variation 2 with absolute time 0 requested Variation 3 with relative time Based on point Index add column to table below 2 1 8 Event reporting mode Only most recent I All events 2 1 4 Binary Inputs included I Always L PRO Offliner in Class 0 response Never Only if point is assigned to Class 1
240. n once per hour Sampling Resolution 12 bits plus sign amplitude measure ment accuracy 0 5 for 54 to 66 Hz Burden AC input voltage 0 15 VA 67 V ac Input current lt 0 50 VA 2 5A Analog Input Sampling Sample rate 96 samples cycle for recording 8x cycle for protection External Inputs 9 isolated inputs 3U chassis 20 isolated inputs 4U chassis Optional 48 to 125 or 125 to 250 Vdc nominal externally wetted D02333R05 00 L PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix A 1 Appendix A IED Specifications L PRO Model 2100 Specifications Burden Burden resistance gt 10 k ohms Isolation Internal optical isolation Sample Rate 1 ms resolution External Input Turn on Voltage 48 Vdc range 27 to 40 Vdc 125 Vdc 75 to 100 Vdc 250 Vdc 150 to 200 Vdc Specified voltages are over full ambient temperature range Output Relays contacts 14 programmable outputs 3U chassis 21 programmable outputs 4U chassis 14 or 21 relay trip 1 relay inoperative Make 30 A as per IEEE C37 90 Carry 8A Break 0 9 A at 125 Vdc 0 35 A at 250 Vdc Interface amp Communication Front Display 2 lines x 24 characters fluorescent Exceptional visibility in all ambient light conditions Front Panel Indicators 6 LEDs Target Relay Functional IRIG B Func tional Service Required Test Mode Alarm Serial User Interface Front and rear RS 232 ports
241. n permissive transfer trip receive signals that the scheme echoes back If the permissive transfer trip receive signal is constantly high the WI logic only echoes back for a time equal to TWD3 plus 3ms If the PT signal being received resets then starts up again after timer setting TWD2 a new per missive transfer trip signal echoes back The WI logic blocks when forward or reverse faults are detected the logic is also blocked for a loss of potential condition During a reverse or a forward fault condition the Zone 2 Zone 4 51N or 50N 67 elements could pick up If any of these functions pick up they block the WI scheme by putting a high in put into inverted input of AND 110 The blocking condition is required last for durations greater than 6 ms The blocking logic continues to block the scheme L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 DCB Logic D02333R05 00 4 Protection Functions and Specifications send and scheme trip signals when the fault detection or loss of potential sig nals go low Timer setting TWD1 determines the block extension time TWD1 should be set to coordinate with the communication reset time of the PT signal It should be set greater than the time it takes for the remote end s Zone 2 to re set and for the PT channel to reset Timer setting TWD2 should be set to a time that prevents chattering of the communications channel If TWD2 is allowed to reset before the remote end strong source clears the fault and stop
242. nactive On active Virtual Input 1 10513 0 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 2 0514 0 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 3 10515 0 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 4 10516 0 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 5 10517 0 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 6 10518 0 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 7 10519 0 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 8 10520 0 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 9 10521 0 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 10 0522 0 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 11 0523 0 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 12 0524 0 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 13 0525 0 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 14 0526 0 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 15 0527 0 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 16 0528 0 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 17 0529 0 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 18 0530 0 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 19 0531 0 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 20 0532 0 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 21 10533 0 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 22 10534 0 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 23 10535 0 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 24 10536 0 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 25 10537 0 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 26 10538 0 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 27 10539 0 Off inactive
243. nal from the remote end to form the blocking logic The blocking logic is time delayed by timer setting TL1 the local end is required to sense reverse faults while receiving the remote permissive trip for durations greater than TL1 The blocking logic continues to block the scheme send and scheme trip signals when the reverse fault detection or permissive trip receive signals go low Timer setting TD1 determines the current reversal block extension time For line terminals with a weak source fault conditions could occur on the pro tected line where no elements operate at the weak source Weak infeed WI logic enables the relay to protect lines where one end ofthe line has no source or has a very weak source The WI scheme can only be enabled if you have se lected the POTT scheme otherwise it is disabled If enabled the WI feature en hances the POTT tripping logic WI enables the POTT scheme to quickly isolate line faults where one end of the line has a high source of impedance During fault conditions where no weak source elements pick up the WI logic echoes back the permissive transfer trip signal received by the weak source If a permissive transfer trip 1s received from the remote line end AND 110 AND 111 and OR 115 echo a POTT signal back to the remote end The permissive transfer trip signal is required to last for durations greater than 20ms A 3ms time delay pickup and time delay dropout timer TWD2 determine the amount of time betwee
244. nce Angle Z0 70 0 deg 45 0 to 89 0 KO Override Disabled KO Magnitude 0 51 0 10 to 2 00 KO Angle 16 5 deg 25 0 to 25 0 Scheme Selector Scheme Selection POTT Communication Receiver1 EI 1 Spare 1 Communication Receiver2 lt disabled gt Scheme Send Pickup Delay TL3 0 100 s 0 000 to 1 000 Scheme Send Dropout Delay TD3 0 200 s 0 000 to 1 000 POTT Current Reversal Pickup Delay 0 300 s 0 000 to 0 500 TL1 POTT Current Reversal Dropout Delay 0 400 0 000 to 0 500 TD1 DCB Scheme Zone 2 Pickup Delay TL2 0 500 s 0 005 to 0 500 DCB Scheme Receiver Dropout Delay 0 500 s 0 000 to 0 500 TD2 50N 67F Overcurrent Carrier Trip Action Disabled Direction Forward 310 Pickup 1 0 A 0 2 to 50 0 Pickup Delay 0 020 s 0 005 to 1 000 50N 67R Overcurrent Carrier Block Action Disabled Direction Reverse 310 Pickup 1 0 A 0 2 to 50 0 Pickup Delay 0 020 s 0 005 to 1 000 52 Breaker Status Main Breaker EI 3 Spare 3 Aux Breaker El 2 Spare 2 Protection Summary 21P Zone 1 Enabled 21P Zone 2 Enabled 21P Zone 3 Enabled 21P Zone 4 Enabled 21N Zone 1 Enabled 21N Zone 2 Enabled 21N Zone 3 Enabled L PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix B 5 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges L PRO Settings Summary Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 REE
245. nctionality compromise Acknowledge D02333R05 00 L PRO User Manual 2100 8 9 5 4 2 Specific cryptographic features Exception 5 4 2 a Webserver functionality Comply Feature not offered in this product 5 4 2 b File transfer functionality Exception Not supported 5 4 2 C Text oriented communication facilities Exception Not supported 5 4 2 d Single Network Management Protocol Comply Feature not offered in this product SNMP 5 4 2 e Network time synchronization Comply Feature not offered in this product 5 4 2 f Secure tunnel functionality Exception Not supported 5 4 3 Cryptographic techniques Exception Not supported 5 4 4 Encrypting serial communications Exception Not supported 5 4 5 Protocol specific security features Comply 5 5 IED configuration software Acknowledge 5 5 1 Authentication Exception Not supported 5 5 2 Digital signature Exception Not supported 5 5 3 ID password control Exception Not supported 5 5 4 ID password controlled features Exception Not supported 5 5 4 1 View configuration data Exception Not supported 5 5 4 2 Change configuration data Exception Not supported 5 6 Communications port access Exception Communication port access control is limited to DNP3 5 7 Firmware quality assurance Comply Appendix A IED Specifications L PRO Model 2100 Specifications Item Quantity Specs Note General Nominal Frequency 50 or 60 Hz
246. nd Aux Breaker Fails are set to be initiated via the Output Matrix from 50LS Pickup 1 0 A Main and Aux and 0 time delay Note Requires a mini mum of 0 2 A on any phase to arm Breaker Fail Breaker Failure Initiator from Output Matrix Z N T1 204 Out 1 pt 0 50 I1a 4 I nominal RMS fixed 50 11b 4 I nominal RMS fixed 205 5011c 4 nominal RMS fixed Out 2 Figure 6 30 Main Breaker Fail Logic 50BF 50BF and 50LS Test Procedure 1 In Terminal Mode access relay Metering gt Logic gt Protection Logic2 Monitor 50LS Main Output Contact 1 SOBF Main 1 Trip A Output Contact 2 SOBF Main 2 Trip A 2 Apply single phase current to the L PRO terminals as follows Ph A 300 301 0 8 A L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 6 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 3 Slowly ramp the current up at a rate of about 0 1 A per second At 0 9 to 1 1 A expect 1 0 A 50LS Main High 5 seconds later Output Contact 1 Closed 50BF Main 1 Trip After an additional 5 seconds Output Contact 2 Closed SOBF Main 2 Trip 4 Turn current off 50LS Main Low Contacts 1 and 2 Open 5 The same 50BF procedure may be followed on the auxiliary input by inject ing current into relay auxiliary current input Terminals 306 307 and mon itor Contacts 3 and 4 Testing Inputs 3 and 4 50LS Function Inputs 3 and 4 50LS functions are used in
247. nd Specifications Record Initiation Record Duration and Extension Record Storage 4 46 Recording can be initiated automatically by the relay when a fault or abnormal condition is detected You can set the relay to initiate a fault record on activa tion of any of its trip or alarm functions or on assertion of any external digital inputs The assignment of fault record initiation to the various relay functions is done through the relay s Output Matrix settings A recording can also be initiated manually through the terminal user interface The commands Fault Recording Swing Recording and Event Recording are available under the Records menu A swing record can take a couple of minutes to produce due to the long post trigger time The length of each record is determined by the Record Length setting Tran sient record lengths can be set between 0 2 and 2 0 seconds swing record lengths can be set between 30 and 120 seconds Pre trigger times are fixed at 10 cycles for transient records and 30 seconds for swing records and are includ ed as part of the normal record length The L PRO automatically extends a record as required to capture consecutive triggers that are close together If a trigger occurs while a recording is in prog ress the record is stretched to include the full post trigger time of subsequent triggers up to a maximum length 2 0 seconds for transient records 180 sec onds for swing records If a trigger occur
248. noperative on the rear panel closes to activate a remote alarm The watch dog repeatedly attempts to re start the DSP for diagnostic purposes The green light stays off and the relays remain de energized even for a successful re start Only a power down power up will reset the LED to green and re energize the relays Note For either of the above cases the DSP controller functions con tinue with normal auxiliary relay outputs provided that DSP failure or Self Check Fail Block has not occurred Appendix D 4 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 Self Check Fail due to DC Offset Detector D02333R05 00 Appendix D Event Messages The DSP has an algorithm that detects continuous dc levels on the analog in puts and initiates alarms and relay output contact blocking when the measured dc level exceeds the Alarm or Block level The Alarm level is intended to pro vide an early indication of a problem The Block level blocks the relay from false tripping by preventing any output contact from closing The Relay Func tional LED turns off but the protection functions will operate normally with the exception that the output contacts will not be allowed to close The Relay Inoperative contact will close for a Block condition The following table de scribes all the Alarm Block indication functions Action Condition Alarm Block Relay Functional LED off x Service Required LED on Self Check Fail Signal high R
249. ns 51N can also be configured for use in the communication scheme All the curve definitions are the same as the phase overcurrent except that this function uses 310 rather than phase current The equation is For 310 gt pickup For 3I0 pickup T 310 TMS B A T 310 TMS a 0 p E 310 y Pickup Pickup 50N 51N 67 Neutral Overcurrent 50N Enable disable Directional Forward reverse or non directional Pickup 3lg 0 50 to 50 00 5 A 0 10 to 10 00 1 A Pickup Delay 0 00 to 99 99 seconds non directional 0 01 to 99 99 seconds directional 51N Enable disable Directional Forward reverse non directional forward amp in scheme Pickup le 0 50 to 50 00 5 A 0 10 to 10 00 1 A Curve Type For details see Table 4 1 IEC and IEEE Curves on page 4 29 TMS 0 01 to 10 00 A 0 0010 to 1000 0000 B 0 0000 to 10 0000 p 0 10 to 10 00 TR 0 10 to 100 00 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 46 50 46 51 67 Negative Sequence Overcurrent D02333R05 00 4 Protection Functions and Specifications Negative Sequence Overcurrent provides further backup protection for any un balanced faults You can define forward reverse or non directional control on either 46 50 or 46 51 functions All the curve definitions are the same as the Phase Overcurrent The only difference is that this function uses the negative sequence current I2 rather than phase current The equation is
250. ntains the type of fault The following type bitmap 0x0001 Phase A 0x0002 Phase B 0x0004 Phase C 0x0008 Ground Any number of the flags may be set for a given fault If the relay could not determine the fault type then the register will not have any flags set and will read 0x0000 Fault Information Fault Dis tance Function Code 3 address 40572 If the current event is a fault location event this register contains the distance to the fault It is scaled up by a factor of 10 The units are the same as the units set in the relay configuration Fault Information Time of Fault Appendix E 8 Function Code 3 addresses 40573 to 40576 If the current event is a fault location event these registers contain the time of the fault in seconds since 1970 Each of these 16 bit regis ters contains an 8 bit portion of a 32 bit time value Register 40573 contains the upper most 8 bits and register 40576 contains the lowest 8 bits Modbus Event Message Example FL2000Sep21 20 16 16 966 21P1 AB 1 0km Trip Register Value Meaning High Byte Low Byte 40516 0x00 0x1B Event text size 27 0x1B hex 40517 0x46 0x4C FL Fault locator event L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 D02333R05 00 Appendix E Modbus RTU Communication Protocol L PRO User Manual 2100 Modbus Event Messag
251. nual 2100 Appendix L 1 Appendix L L PRO Setting Example Switching Setting Groups Using One External Input to Toggle Setting Group Appendix L 2 You can program a total of 16 Group Logic statements per setting group to cause a setting change from one group to another Create settings using the Of fliner setting software or by using the Terminal Mode Some common uses for setting groups might be cold load pickup Zone 1 and or Zone 2 reach extension for phase and ground distance elements zero sequence source increase or decrease An example of pulsing an external input and an example of a solid initiate to activate setting group changes are shown below Use one external input connected to a SCADA output contact to toggle be tween 2 or more setting groups In this example we connect external input one EI 1 to the SCADA control output contact and switch between group 1 and group 2 If you wanted to switch through all setting groups group logic 2 would switch to setting group 3 and so forth If the contact input to switch set ting groups becomes welded shut or the SCADA system has a problem the re lay will only switch to the new logic and stay in that logic until the input has been de energized for the ProLogic pickup delay which was set to 10 seconds Setting Group 1 Logic Statements When setting group one becomes active either through a setting group change or is the default group after relay power up ProLogic 9 becomes
252. o 4 00 A transition this equates to 4x pickup Time Delay TMSx B 4 ex 0 0228 0 0103 F x 0 0228 Aer 1 1685 Lois a1 4999 1 0 0281 multiple 3 Inject fault Observe Relay Target 51N Trip End of 50N 51N test 6 30 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 6 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 50 51 Phase Phase Instantaneous and Time Overcurrent Test Overcurrent Test Settings Only 51 Directional 50 Pickup 15 0A e 51 Pickup 1 5 A Time Curve IEC Very Inverse A 13 5 B 0 00 p 1 0 TMS 0 5 50P Directional Control If Directional T must be greater than 10 ms 284 E Out 10 e Al 0 arm Timer is active only if it directional J ui 285 51P Directional Control 1 ow Figure 6 26 Phase Instantaneous and Time Overcurrent Logic 50 51 ILa RMS ILb RMS ILc RMS 50 and 51 Test Procedure 1 In Terminal Mode access relay Metering Logic Protection Logicl Monitor 51 Alarm Output Contact 10 50 Trip 2 Apply single phase current to the L PRO terminals Ph A 300 301 0 5 A 3 Slowly ramp up the current At 1 43 to 1 58 A expect 1 5 A 51 Alarm High 4 Continue to raise current At 14 3 to 15 8 A expect 15 A 50 Trip High Contact 10 Closed 5 Turn current off 51 Alarm Low 50 Trip Low D02333R05 00 L PRO User Manual 2100 6 31 6 Acceptance Protection Function T
253. ock trip signal to the local end The lo cal end senses a block trip receive signal and the scheme trip logic is disabled with no intentional delay Current reversal logic guards against incorrect local tripping for installations with parallel lines where one end ofthe un faulted line is contributing fault current and the other end of the un faulted line is reverse reaching and sending a block trip signal The local forward directional ele ments are supervised by the block receive signal from the remote end to form the blocking logic The blocking logic reset is time delayed by timer setting TD2 the local end is required to receive the remote block trip for durations greater than 0 ms The blocking logic continues to block the scheme trip signals when the block trip receive signal goes low Typically the block reset timer TD2 is set longer than the forward directional elements reset time L PRO User Manual 2100 4 43 4 Protection Functions and Specifications PUTT Logic The PUTT logic is used for tripping schemes where the local end under reach the remote end for close in forward fault conditions for details see Figure 4 23 Communication aided Scheme on page 4 41 The local end sends a permissive trip signal to the remote end when one of the forward directional elements op erates Zone 1 distance elements The scheme send signal permissive transfer trip send is time delayed by timer setting TL3 the local end is required to sense a forward fa
254. of line 5 9 Q Pos itive Sequence Line Angle Z1 80 21P2 7 38 O Maximum Reach 125 of line 24 25 miles at maximum torque angle of 80 Time Delay 400 ms expect 1 0 to 1 3 cycle additional delay due to in herent detection and contact times Delta Current Supervision 3 0 A minimum phasor difference between any 2 phases to allow 21P2 Trip This test example shows how to test for a phase to phase fault Determine the voltage and current quantities required to perform this test Determine the minimum current required as per Idelta supervision setting 2 Determine an appropriate fault voltage to use for the test 3 Determine the 3 phase voltage phasors required to create the fault voltage 1 Minimum current required for this test I delta Supervision Setting the phasor difference of 2 phases 3 0 A Cur rent is injected into polarity of B phase and out of polarity of C phase Therefore B phase and C phase currents are equal in magnitude but 180 out of phase L PRO User Manual 2100 6 13 6 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide The minimum delta current required 3 0 A add 5 to ensure supervision is met 3 0 x 105percent 3 2amps Since B phase C phase actual minimum current required 3 2 6amps 2 D 2 Usethe minimum test current to determine what voltage would be appro priate for this test Equation 5 V faultmin ET testmin From Equation 5 we can d
255. ogic 10 lalolo oj oj o Group Logic 1 is used to switch to the new setting group there is no intentional delay Group Logic 1 Group Logic 1 v Enabled Name Group Logic 1 AND Setting Group to Activate sc 2 Setting Group 2 E 0lo0 o Pickup Delay D seconds H 1 9 1 D D 1 1 1 Input A PL 10 ProLogic 10 Input B PL 8 Block Group Logic x Out Input C El 4 43CS Local Remote EI Figure L 6 Group Logic 1 Appendix L 4 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 Appendix L L PRO Setting Example Using Three Three external inputs connected to an 8 position selector switch The output External Inputs to contact is used to build a truth table to toggle between 8 setting groups In this Toggle Setting Group example we connect EI 1 EI 2 and EI 3 to the selector switch output contacts Selector Input States Setting Group to Activate Switch P STE EI 3 EI 2 EI 1 1 0 0 0 Setting Group 1 2 0 0 1 Setting Group 2 3 0 1 0 Setting Group 3 4 0 1 1 Setting Group 4 5 1 0 0 Setting Group 5 6 1 0 1 Setting Group 6 7 1 1 0 Setting Group 7 8 1 1 1 Setting Group 8 Setting Group 1 8 Logic Statements The following Group Logic statements are entered into each of the 8 setting groups When the selector switch is rotated to the appropriate position the correspond ing setting group becomes active Each setting gr
256. onfigurable other describe 1 4 4 Self Address Support Yes only allowed if configurable NA using address OxFFFC I No 1 4 5 Sends Confirmed User Always L PRO Offliner Data Frames Sometimes explain to disable set Never Data Link Time I Configurable either always or never out to 0 1 4 6 Data Link Layer None 2 000 Confirmation Timeout I Fixed at 2 000 ms Configurable range to ms Configurable selectable from ms Configurable other describe Variable explain 1 4 7 Maximum Data Link Never Retries 3 Retries x Fixed at3 Configurable range to Configurable selectable from Configurable other describe 1 4 8 Maximum number of x Fixed at 292 292 octets Transmitted in a Configurable range to Data Link Frame Configurable selectable from Configurable other describe 1 4 9 Maximum number of x Fixed at 292 292 octets that can be Configurable range to Received in a Data Link Configurable selectable from Frame Configurable other describe Appendix F 8 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile eee TIT If configurable 1 5 Application Layer Capabilities Current Value list methods 1 5 1 Maximum number of Bd Fixed at 2048 2048 octets Transmitted in an Configurable range to Application Layer Configurable selectable from Fragment other than Configurable other describe File Transfer 1 5 2 Maximum number of Fixed at NA octets Transmitte
257. ons and Specifications Weak Infeed 4 18 Dead Line Pickup Dead Line Pickup Enable disable Device 27 Vpos Pickup 0 0 to 69 0 volts secondary Device 50 Pickup 0 5 to 50 0 A secondary 5 A 0 1 to 10 0 A secondary 1 A Device 50N Pickup 0 5 to 50 0 A secondary 5 A 0 1 to 10 0 A secondary 1 A Second Harmonica Restraint Enabled disabled 12 11 Ratio 0 0 to 10 0 Weak Infeed provides tripping if fault levels are too low to activate the distance units If enabled this function sends a permissive trip signal even if the fault level seen by the relay is very low as when the line breaker is open The posi tive sequence and zero sequence voltage detectors allow the relay to echo back a permissive signal to allow the end with fault current to trip quickly without the need for an auxiliary b contact Weak Infeed Weak Infeed Enable disable Device 27 V1 Pickup Device 59 VO Pickup Zone 2 Zone 4 Reset Delay TWD1 0 02 to 0 20 seconds Communication Cycle Reset Delay TWD2 0 02 to 0 20 seconds L PRO User Manual 2100 Communication Reset Time Delay TW3 0 02 to 100 0 seconds 0 0 to 69 0 volts secondary 0 0 to 100 0 volts secondary D02333R05 00 25 27 59 Sync Check D02333R05 00 4 Protection Functions and Specifications The relay can bring in voltages from both line and bus PTs The Line Sync Check function if en
258. ons before V 10 Appendix D 6 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 Appendix E Modbus RTU Communication D02333R05 00 Protocol The SCADA port supports DNP3 and Modicon Modbus protocols All meter ing values available through the terminal user interface are also available via the Modbus protocol Additionally the Modbus protocol supports the reading of unit time and time of the readings and provides access to trip and alarm events including fault location information A Hold Readings function is available to freeze all metering readings into a snapshot see Force Single Coil function address 0 Read Coil Status Function Code 01 Channel Address Value Hold Readings 1 0 Readings not held 1 Readings held Reserved 257 Reserved Reserved Output Contact 1 513 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Output Contact 2 514 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Output Contact 3 515 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Output Contact 4 516 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Output Contact 5 517 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Output Contact 6 518 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Output Contact 7 519 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Output Contact 8 520 0 Contact Open inacti
259. opout Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 D02333R05 00 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges L PRO Settings Summary Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 Input E lt Unused 0 gt ProLogic 7 ProLogic 7 ProLogic 7 Disabled Target Enabled Pickup Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt ProLogic 8 ProLogic 8 ProLogic 8 Disabled Target Enabled Pickup Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt ProLogic 9 ProLogic 9 ProLogic 9 Disabled Target Enabled Pickup Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 E 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 L PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix B 15 Appendix B IED Settings and
260. or a line that is in service and is now experiencing a line fault L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 68 Out Of Step D02333R05 00 4 Protection Functions and Specifications Use the out of step OOS function as a tripping or a blocking function This function consists of 2 sets of inner and outer impedance blinders on the R X plane Set the blinders to different values and to have the OOS function operate for different system conditions The blinders are straight lines with the same angle as the angle chosen for the line positive sequence impedance Outputs from the outer and the inner blinders are available on the output matrix for use with other types of OOS schemes or for monitoring Blinders 2 X Figure 4 11 laos Overcurrent Supervision The basic OOS scheme looks at the positive sequence impedance of the line with respect to the line loading If the line loading causes the impedance to cross the outer blinder an out of step timer is started If the impedance does not cross the inner blinder before this timer times out the function produces an out put either a block or trip whichever is set when the impedance crosses the inner blinder The entire activity is supervised by an overcurrent function to prevent undesired operations for impedances far from the origin The logic has a timeout feature that prevents the blocking function from oper ating for an indefinite amount of time Device 68 functions as either a blo
261. or any other desired fault voltage Test voltage magnitude Equation 3 4 aei jg nemine 2 2 2 Note Vfault phase to phase fault voltage and Vnominal phase to neutral nominal voltage Test Phase Angle Offset the nominal phase angles toward the other faulted phase angle by Equation 4 V 60 atan e nomina Example of this calculation using the 70 voltage reduction from the B C fault table Phase B C voltage angle 90 with respect to A N voltage phasor Fault Voltage 70 reduction of phase to phase nominal 115V Z 90 115V Z 90 x 70percent 34 5V Z 90 Faulted Test Voltage Magnitudes 2 2 85 41399 8 37 4V Faulted Phase Angle 34 5 60 atan 225 60 27 5 32 5 For B C fault adjust Phase B angle toward Phase C angle and adjust Phase C angle toward Phase B angle B Phase Angle 120 32 5 152 5 C Phase Angle 120 32 5 152 5 So A Phase Phasor Unfaulted 66 4 V 70 B Phase Phasor Faulted 37 4 V Z 152 5 C Phase Phasor Faulted 37 4 V Z4152 5 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 6 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide Connecting the Test Source for B C Fault AC Current AC Voltages 330 331 332 A B C Main Current Inputs Main Voltage Inputs Figure 6 13 AC Connections to L PRO for B C 21P Test In summary for this example inject Phase B to Phase C fault Line Impedan
262. or uses a combination of positive negative and zero sequence current phasors to correctly determine the faulty phase An OR function with angle checks between I1 and D as well as the angle between I2 and IO The OR functions allows the algorithm to adapt to various fault conditions and provide the correct fault type When you are energizing a line with a T tapped load you may have system conditions where no pre fault load current is available Using positive and negative sequence currents alone may cause an incorrect fault de termination if the load current is significantly large enough to affect the total positive sequence current which includes both load and fault current Angle Relationship of Positive and Negative Sequence Currents The angle comparison scheme is used to determine the faulty phase and the fault type If the load current is subtracted from the total current 1 e only fault current is left for angle comparison the positive sequence I1 and negative sequence 12 current phase angle relations are listed in the following table AG BG CG BCG ABG CAG Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Angle Diff between 11A and DA 0 120 120 180 60 60 Angle Diff between 11B and I2B 120 0 120 60 60 180 Angle Diff between 11C and I2C 120 120 0 60 180 60 Phase Selector Criteria for 11 and I2 The following criteria is used to determine the fault type and phase AG Fault AngleDiff A 45 0 and AngleDiff B
263. ot configured L PRO Offliner Configurable range to for DNP Configurable selectable from 300 1200 2400 9600 19200 38400 and 57600 Configurable other describe 1 2 4 Hardware Flow Control None Handshaking RS 232 V 24 V 28 Options Describe hardware signaling Before Tx Asserts L RTS requirements of the interface DTR Where a transmitter or receiver Before Rx Asserts L1 RTS is inhibited until a given control DTR signal is asserted it is consid Always Asserts k RTS ered to require that signal prior DTR to sending or receiving charac Before Tx Requires AssertedDeasserted ters CTS Where a signal is asserted prior DCD to transmitting that signal will DSR be maintained active until after RI the end of transmission Rx Inactive Where a signal is asserted to Before Rx Requires AssertedDeasserted enable reception any data sent CTS to the device when the signal is DCD not active could be discarded DSR RI Always Ignores CTS DCD DSR RI Other explain RS 422 V 11 Options Requires Indication before Rx Asserts Control before Tx Other explain RS 485 Options Requires Rx inactive before Tx Other explain 1 2 5 Interval to Request Link Not Supported Status Fixedat A seconds Configurable range to seconds Configurable selectable from seconds Configurable other describe 1 2 6 Supports DNP3 No Collision Avoidance Yes explain Appendix F 4 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profil
264. oth integers and floating point then integer and floating point values are required for the minimums and maximums For example a pressure sensor is able to measure 0 to 500 kPa The outstation provides a linear conversion of the sensor s output signal to integers in the range of 0 to 25000 or floating point values of 0 to 500 000 The sensor and outstation are used in an ap plication where the maximum possible pressure is 380 kPa For this input the minimum transmitted value would be stated as 0 0 0 and the maximum transmitted value would be stated as 19000 380 000 b The scaling information for each point specifies how data transmitted in integer variations 16 bit and 32 bit is converted to engi neering units when received by the Master i e scaled according to the equation scaled value multiplier raw offset Scaling is not applied to Floating point variations since they are already transmitted in engineering units c Resolution is the smallest change that may be detected in the value due to quantization errors and is given in the units shown in the previous column This parameter does not represent the accuracy of the measurement d Maximal values are calculated as 2 Configured Nominal Multiplier for voltage channels and as 20 Configured Nominal Multiplier for current channels see Note 2 above for the nominal definitions When a fault location event is available Binary Input Fault Information Available default poin
265. oup logic can have a specific time delay pickup setting You can also provide 2 additional logic inputs in each statement to be used to provide qualifiers before switching setting groups We are using a ProLogic statement and an external input as qualifiers see Us ing ProLogic to Qualify Group Logic Statements in Appendix L on page Appendix L 8 EI 1 low El 2 low and El 3 low Group Logic 16 Go to Group 1 v Enabled Name Go to Group 1 AND Pickup Delay 5 seconds L Setting Group to Activate SG 1 Setting Group 1 E ol o0 eg Al E11 Selector Input B El 2 Selector 2 X Input C El 3 Selector 3 m Input D PL 8 Block Group Logic Y Do Input E El 4 43CS Local Remote Figure L 7 Group Logic 16 Out D02333R05 00 L PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix L 5 Appendix L L PRO Setting Example El 1 high El 2 low and El 3 low Group Logic 15 Go to Group 2 V Enabled Name Go to Group 2 AND Setting Group to Activate 3G 2 Setting Group 2 m fere Er EH Pickup Delay 5 seconds 0 1 o 1 0 D 1 al 1 Input amp eit Setector 1 zl Input B El 2 Selector 2 Ei Input C EI 3 Selector 3 x Input PL 8 Block Group Logic d pe Out Input E El 4 43CS Local Remote Figure L 8 Group Logic 15 El 1 low El 2 high and El 3 low Group Logic 14 Go to Group 3 V Enabled Name Go to Group 3 Setting Group to
266. output contacts are isolated from each other The dropout time for each output contact is configurable Ifthe relay becomes inoperative then the Relay Inoperative Alarm output con tact closes and all tripping functions are blocked L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 1 Overview Optional I O Rear View Biema L ar jL ar ji 125VDC ji 125VDC Cer ji 125VDC ji ap ji ae ji 12500 j Ports Pome N O EECHER SS SES Output Unused Contacts TE ont 79 Faro UE T AA YE zapra EES EE EE EE E s 38 350 e Xi 3D e a SS SS Ss xi XQ 356 34 SS CO L J XO 301 3D om X6 37 X6 30 31 2 39 34 35 36 37 O A gt 16 This row contains 2 distinctive areas from left to right Optional External Inputs Optional Output Relay Contacts D02333R05 00 11 programmable external inputs 7 programmable output relay contacts Figure 1 4 Rear View of Optional I O Model The L PRO Relay model 2100E contains 11 additional programmable exter nal inputs External dc voltage of either 48 125 volts or 125
267. p 01 s Close after the Recloser Follower Time TF Lockout Reset TD 300 s C Close after the Recloser Reset Time TD Initiate Reset TDI 10 s z n le i Figure L 16 79 Recloser Setting the recloser is all done in one screen In our example we are using one shot with an open interval of 10 seconds T1 for the Main circuit breaker and a follow interval of 5 seconds TF for the aux iliary circuit breaker This means that 10 seconds after both breakers open the main breaker will attempt to reclose and 5 seconds after the main breaker has closed the auxiliary breaker will attempt to close The main and auxiliary close signal time is set to last for 0 5 seconds TP When the recloser receives an initiation signal that signal will stay high for an additional time of 1 0 seconds which allows the recloser to seal in TDI We are not using sync control is this example If sync control was necessary the user only has to enable sync control and then set the appropriate settings in the 25 27 59 screen For example if Dead Main Dead Auxiliary was selected the recloser would be blocked unless both main and auxiliary voltages are be low 20 volts positive sequence The recloser mode setting is related to the Ring Bus Configuration auxiliary CT line input and must match the breaker configuration in the system param eters screen Invalid Action EI To disable Aux CT Line Input you will have to change the Recloser Mode in the 79 scre
268. p Logic 16 LOW KE3 gt Quit lt F2 gt Freeze Figure 6 33 Group Logic Metering Screen Confirm the Active Setting Group 81 Overfrequency Settings and Underfrequency Test e 81 1 Time Delay 0 5 second 81 1 Pickup 60 5 Hz Fixed Rate 50 5 Hz for 50 Hz Relay 81 2 Pickup 59 5 Hz Fixed Rate 49 5 Hz for 50 Hz Relay 81 2 Time Delay 0 5 second 81 3 Pickup 1 0 Hz second 81 3 Time Delay 0 2 second 81 4 Pickup 1 0 Hz second 81 4 Time Delay 0 2 second Requires minimum of 0 25 per unit positive sequence voltage fixed setting to enable the 81 element 81 1 Freq or DC L 81 1 Frequency at Vpos gt 0 25 PU 0 0 8t 2 Freg or D Dt 81 2 Frequency TES 305 Vpos gt 0 25 PU 0 0 81 3 Freq or 81 3 Frequency 3 Vpos gt 0 25 PU 0 0 81 4 Freq or DADE 81 4 Frequency r H Vpos gt 0 25 PU 0 0 Figure 6 34 Over Under Rate of Change of Frequency Logic 81 D02333R05 00 L PRO User Manual 2100 Out 8 Out 8 Out 9 Out 9 6 41 6 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 6 42 81 Fixed Rate Test Procedure 1 In Terminal Mode access relay Metering Logic Protection Logic 1 Monitor 81 1 Trip Output Contact 8 2 Apply single phase nominal voltage to Ph A 330 333 66 4 V 60 Hz 50 Hz for 50 Hz Relay 81 1 Low 81
269. p nactive Active None None 16 21P3 Trip nactive Active None None 17 21P4 Trip nactive Active None None 18 51 Trip nactive Active None None 19 50 Trip nactive Active None None 20 21N1 Trip nactive Active None None 21 21N2 Trip nactive Active None None D02333R05 00 L PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix F 17 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile Supported Control Operations Default Class Assigned to Events 1 2 3 or none E S 8 o Qa o o t lt S Name for Name for Name o State when State when Change Command Description z z 2j i 2 value is 0 value is 1 g lio g t SEJE 2 2 S 3l lls Z zig 0 0 6 65 6 6 HE t 8 8 2 8 8 4 8 5 2 Es REESEN beer 22 21N3 Trip nactive Active None None 23 21N4 Trip nactive Active None None 24 68 Out of Step nactive Active None None 25 Zcircle Trigger nactive Active None None 26 51N Trip nactive Active None None 27 50N Trip nactive Active None None 28 46 51 Trip nactive Active None None 29 46 50 Trip nactive Active None None 30 Deadline Trip nactive Active None None 31 Comm Scheme
270. plied Relay Functional green LED on 5 seconds after power applied Front Display on 30 seconds after power applied Test Mode red LED off 40 seconds after power applied When the relay is powered up the normal sequence of LED operation is Test Mode followed by Relay Functional and IRIG B Functional if available dis play on then Test Mode off The entire sequence takes about 40 seconds Ways to interface with the relay Front panel display Terminal Mode Offliner Settings software D02333R05 00 L PRO User Manual 2100 3 1 3 Using the IED Getting Started Front Panel Display LED Lights 3 2 View or change settings using Terminal Mode or loading a setting file from Offliner Setting The front panel display is the fastest and easiest way of getting information from the relay Display LED Lights Target eoo 500ceo Date amp View View Previcus Mast C ear Time Readirgs Logs Target Push Buttons Figure 3 1 Front Panel Display The display the 6 LED lights and the 6 push buttons provide selective infor mation about the relay Relay Indicates when the relay is functional When the Relay Functional Functional green LED goes on the rear Relay Inoperative contact changes to open and the protective functions become functional IRIG B Functional Indicates the presence of a valid IRIG B time signal Service Required Indicates the relay needs service This LED can be the same state as the R
271. put Matrix 30 32 14 126 Magntude J X 0 2 of nominal 1 Settings Summary 30 32 15 12b Angle Hime 5 degrees jo1 EC Setting Group 2 Setting Group 2 f 30 321 16 12c Meanitude O of nominal 1 EC Setting Group 3 Setting Group 3 aa 17 12c Ange ae iD 5 degrees 01 jetting Group 4 Setting Group 4 30 22 18 Ba Magnitude of nominal 1 etting Group 5 Setting Group 5 30 32 18 Ba Angle DIETER 5 degrees o1 etting Group 6 Setting Group 6 f 30 321 20 18b Magnitude of nominal 1 C Setting Group 7 Setting Group 7 3032 21 13b Angle SSC 5 degrees 01 amp C Setting Group 8 Setting Group 3032 22 Tc Meanitude 2 of nominal 1 30 32 23 De Angle EXE 5 degrees 01 30 32 24 MaMegntude Lp of nominal 1 aa 25 Ve Angle reer os ees 0 1 Ll L PRO Offliner Settings v12 Use the space bar to toggle the selected Change Event Class on off med D Figure 5 14 Class Data L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 SCADA Settings Summary D02333R05 00 5 Offliner Settings Software Class data for each DNP point can be assigned on the Class Data screen Only Points which were mapped in the Point Map screen will appear here Sections for Binary Inputs and Analog Inputs appear here Binary Outputs cannot be as signed a Class The list is scrollable by using the scroll control on the right hand side In addition to assigning a Change Event Class to each mapped point most An alog Inpu
272. quested Based on point Index add column to table below below 2 2 6 Command Event Variation 1 without time Not supported L PRO Offliner Variation reported when Variation 2 with absolute time See Note 2 variation 0 requested Based on point Index add column to table below below 2 2 7 Event reporting mode Only most recent Not supported L PRO Offliner All events See Note 2 below 2 2 8 Command Event Only most recent Not supported reporting mode All events 2 2 9 Maximum Time Not Applicable 10s between Select and I Fixed at 10 seconds Operate Configurable range to seconds Configurable selectable from seconds Configurable other describe Variable explain Based on point Index add column to table below 2 2 10 Definition of Binary Fixed list shown in table below Default list is L PRO Offliner Output Status Control I Configurable shown in the relay output block Other explain table below CROB Point List Appendix F 16 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile 1 Binary Outputs are scanned with 500 ms resolution 2 Events are not supported for Binary Outputs group 10 but most of Binary Output points can be mapped to Binary Inputs group 2 with full Event and Class Data support See L PRO Offliner DNP Configuration Point Map screen for com plete point lists and configuration options
273. r 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt Group Logic 8 Group Logic 8 Group Logic 8 Disabled Setting Group to Activate none Pickup Delay 0 s 0 to 999 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt L PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix B 19 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Appendix B 20 L PRO Settings Summary Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt Group Logic 9 Group Logic 9 Group Logic 9 Disabled Setting Group to Activate none Pickup Delay 0 s 0 to 999 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt Group Logic 10 Group Logic 10 Group Logic 10 Disabled Setting Group to Activate none Pickup Delay 0 s 0 to 999 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt Group Logic 11 Group Logic 11 Group Logic 11 Disabled Setting Group to Activate none L PRO User Manual 210
274. r Size 100 Self Check Fail 40317 N A 1 Parameter Diagnostic Subfunctions Function Code 08 Return Query Data Subfunction 00 This provides an echo of the submitted message Restart Comm Option Subfunction 01 This restarts the Modbus communications process Force Listen Only Mode Subfunction 04 No response is returned IED enters Listen Only mode This mode can only be exited by the Restart Comm Option com mand Report Slave ID Function Code 17 0x11 A fixed response is returned by the IED including system model version and issue numbers Channel Type Bytes Value Model Number Read Only 0 and 1 0 x 0834 2100 decimal Version Number Read Only 2 and 3 Version number Issue Number Read Only 4 and 5 Issue number The L PRO IED model number is 2100 Version and issue will each be positive integers say X and Y The L PRO is defined as Model 2100 Version X Issue Y D02333R05 00 L PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix E 7 Appendix E Modbus RTU Communication Protocol Accessing L PRO Event Information All L PRO detector event messages displayed in the Event Log are available via Modbus This includes fault location information The following controls are available Refresh Event List Function Code 6 address 40513 Fetches the latest events from the L PRO s event log and makes them available for Modbus access The most recent e
275. r all 129 response 7 freeze 8 freeze noack 9 freeze clear 10 frz cl noack 20 1 Gounter 32 bitwith flag 129 response 00 04 start step 20 2 Geunter t6 bit with fag 129 response 00 04 start step 20 5 Counter 32 bit without flag 129 response 00 01 start stop 20 6 Goeunter 16 bit witheut lag 129 response 00 04 start step 21 0 Frezen Gounter Any Variation 1 read 06 no range or all 21 1 Frozen Counter 32 bitwithflag 129 response 00 04 start stop 21 2 Frezen Ceunter 16 bit with flag 129 response 900 01 41stan step 21 9 Frezen Gounter 32 bit witheutfag 129 response 00 01 d start step 21 10 Frozen Counter 16 bit without flag 129 response 00 01 d start stop 22 0 Counter Event Any Variation 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited qty 22 1 Geunter Event 32 bit with Hag 129 response 12 28 ndex 430 unsel resp 22 2 Geunter Event 16 bit with Hag 129 response 312 28 ndex 430 unsel resp 30 0 Analog Input Any Variation a read 06 no range or all 29 response 00 01 start stop 00 01 start stop 07 08 limited qty 17 28 index 30 1 Analog Input 32 bit with flag 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop 00 01 start stop 07 08 limited qty 17 28 index 30 2 Analog Input 16 bit with flag 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop 00 01 start stop 07 08 limited qty 17 28
276. racter User is automatically logged out after 60 minutes of inactivity L PRO automatically blocks locks out Access Level for 5 minutes after 7 un successful login attempts Lock out of one Access Level does not affect avail ability of the others Each Access Level is assigned a set of functions authorized for it The set of functions is pre defined and cannot be changed Six Access Levels are defined Access Level list and set of functions associated with each level are described in section 3 Terminal Mode L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 8 Cyber Security Cyber Security Event Monitoring and Logging L PRO monitors activities of the logged in user If user actions result in a change of IED critical resource control or change of IED state a Security No tification is generated There are two types of Security Notification Security Events Security Alarms Security Event is a Security Notification of an authorized activity which has a limited effect on L PRO protection functions Security Alarm is a Security Notification of an authorized or unauthorized ac tivity which may result in a loss of one or more protection functions or make unit unusable L PRO differentiate the following types of Cyber Security activities Table 8 2 Cyber Security Activity Types Activity Message ID Description Access to IED resources ACCS Access to the configuration settings records files and control data Authentic
277. ral Overcurrent settings within the Dead Line Pickup screen are exceeded within 200 ms of line energization 2sec 27 Vpos 0 L 50lLa RMS 4 Inominal RMS fixed 50ILb RMS 290 S oO 295 Out 9 50ILc RMS 50lLa RUS rO IL2a IL1a 2nd Harmonic Blocking IL2b IL1b 292 IL2c IL1c I 2nd Harmonic Restraint Enable Figure 6 18 Dead Line Pickup Logic Dead Line Pickup IV Enabled Device 27 Vpos Pickup 20 0 volts Sec Device 50 Pickup 0 9 lamps isse Device 50N Pickup 03 amps Sec m Second Harmonic Restraint Enabled Second Harmonic to 1241 Ratio 51 Fundamental Current ratio Figure 6 19 Dead Line Pickup Settings Offliner Dead Line Pickup Test Procedure 1 Apply 0 voltage to the relay voltage inputs 2 Instantaneously step single phase current from 0 to 0 95 A to Ph A 300 301 0 95 A Zany Observe target Dead Line Pickup on A End of Dead Line Pickup test 6 22 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 68 Out of Step Test D02333R05 00 e Wu WA ES 165 ou 6 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide Set to trip for this test Settings Outer Right Blinder 17 Q e Outer Left Blinder 17 Q Inner Right Blinder 13 Q Inner Left Blinder 13 Q Swing timer 1 0 second Il Supervision positive sequence current 3 0 A 310 Supervision 1 0A
278. ration 6 2 change 3 15 circuit breaker simulator L 12 clear target 3 3 communication direct serial link 2 2 modem link external 2 3 modem link internal 2 4 network link 2 4 relay 2 2 communication port 2 9 communication wiring 7 1 communication aided scheme 4 40 L 18 creating a setting file from an older version 5 4 CT turns ratio 5 13 L PRO User Manual 2100 D date amp time 3 3 DCB logic 4 43 dead line pickup 4 17 diagnostics 3 14 display 3 4 E erase 3 14 event log 3 13 4 47 external input 3 11 5 8 F fault locator 4 33 front display 3 1 3 2 3 4 G grounding 2 1 group logic 4 34 4 35 5 21 L 8 H HyperTerminal 2 5 l ID 3 10 3 11 identification 5 6 initiate swing recording 3 13 initiate transient recording 3 13 inputs external 1 4 IRIG B time 2 1 installation software 5 2 IP address 2 13 IRIG 3 2 IRIG B time input 2 1 L LED lights 3 2 line parameters 5 17 list 3 13 logic 3 12 M maintenance 2 12 3 14 maintenance menu 2 12 metering 3 12 3 16 mho characteristic shapes 4 2 6 6 phase and ground 4 1 Modbus 3 14 modem link 2 7 O Offliner settings 3 1 5 1 output contact 3 14 5 9 output matrix 5 22 output relay contacts 1 4 P parameters line 5 17 system 5 12 password 3 7 3 15 physical mounting 7 1 ports 3 14 POTT logic L 19 power supply 2 1 ProLogic 5 21 protection functions 4 1 5 20 graphing 5 20 PT turns ratio 5 13 push buttons 3 3 PUTT logic 4 44 PUTT s
279. rip 51 ABC Trip The possible phase information will be A 50 ABC Trip B Cc AB BC CA ABC 51N Alarm 46 51 Alarm L PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix D 1 Appendix D Event Messages Appendix D 2 L PRO Event Messages 51 ABC Alarm The possible phase information will be A Wd Mei AB BC CA ABC Impedance Circle Trigger 68 Out of Step Trip Trip or Alarm based on 68 mode setting PUTT 12 3 kM Trip DCB 12 3 km Trip POTT 12 3 km Trip POTT WI 12 3 km Trip Weak Infeed WI is not available unless POTT is selected PUTT Send POTT Send POTT Send WI Weak Infeed WI is not available unless POTT is selected DCB Send Dead Line Pickup ABC The possible phase information will be A Wd C AB BC CA ABC ProLogic Name PLn ProLogic outputs names are user assigned Extern Input Name Eln High External input names are user assigned Extern Input Name Eln Low External input names are user assigned Virtual Inputs Eln High Virtual Inputs are user assigned Virtual Inputs Eln High Virtual Inputs are user assigned Output Contacts Eln High Output Contact Names are user assigned Output Contacts Eln High Output Contacts names are user assigned 60 LOP ABC Alarm The possible phase information will be A RB Mei AB BC CA
280. rlphase com Technical Support Email support erlphase com Tel 1 204 477 0591 L PRO User Manual 2100 Using This Guide This User Manual describes the installation and operation of the L PRO line protection relay It is intended to support the first time user and clarify the de tails of the equipment The manual uses a number of conventions to denote special information example Describes Start Settings Control Panel Choose the Control Panel submenu in the Set tings submenu on the Start menu Right click Click the right mouse button Recordings Menu items and tabs are shown in italics service User input or keystrokes are shown in bold Text boxes similar to this one Relate important notes and information Indicates more screens p Indicates further drop down menu click to dis play list Vi Indicates a warning D02333R05 00 L PRO User Manual 2100 iii Table of Contents D02333R05 00 EE s edel ees Contact Information HH Using Fhis Ee iuit Bee hotel cadena ea tee Coles iii Table of Contents eseun ono ea e A a V Version Gorpaubiliby s i is eue reatu cei eterne vii eu me 1 1 Front MIER 1 2 Rear VieW ee ed Stetit tive EES 1 3 Optional I O Rear View 1 5 Model OpottonsiCrdetmg 1 6 2 Setup and Communications 2 1 Power Supply iet betreten oe PE eto ds 2 1 IRIG B Time Ioput 2 1 Communicating with th
281. roLogic 3 nactive Active None None 55 ProLogic 4 nactive Active None None 56 ProLogic 5 nactive Active None None 57 ProLogic 6 nactive Active None None 58 ProLogic 7 nactive Active None None 59 ProLogic 8 nactive Active None None 60 ProLogic 9 nactive Active None None 61 ProLogic 10 nactive Active None None Appendix F 18 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile Default Class Supported Control Operations Assigned to Events 1 2 3 or none E S 8 o Qa o o lt S Name for Name for Name o State when State when Change Command Description z z 2j i 2 value is 0 value is 1 g lio g t SEJE 2 2 S S E EI iix l S 9 jojo 6 l6 6 6 z t 8 8 2 8 8 4 8 5 2 Es REESEN n B M MO 62 SOLS Aux nactive Active None None 63 Group Logic 1 nactive Active None None 64 Group Logic 2 nactive Active None None 65 Group Logic 3 nactive Active None None 66 Group Logic 4 nactive Ac
282. roup 6 Setting Group E External Input 4 UE 3 3 L ji C Setting Group 7 Setting Group 71 External input 5 1 2 ly C Setting Group 8 Setting Group 8 External input 6 hz s T T External Input 7 1 2 6 1 External Input 8 1 2 Iu 1 I ji Virtual Input 4 1 2 s 1 x L PRO Offliner Settings v12 Figure 5 15 SCADA Settings Summary This screen provides a summary of the current SCADA settings as set in the working setting file This includes SCADA Communication parameters and if the SCADA mode is set to DNP Binary Input Binary Output and Analog In put information including Deadband and Scaling factors This SCADA Summary screen is scrollable and can be printed L PRO User Manual 2100 5 15 5 Offliner Settings Software Record Length L PRO Offliner Settings Document 1 a 73 Eile Edit Window Help Dc 3 8 e 8 EB ELT Identification Cl Relay Record Length C Analog Inputs f External Inputs SY Output Contacts Vi osi Inputs Prefault time fixed at 10 cycles p Sample Rate fixed at 96 samples per cycle O Setting Groups Fault Record Length 05 Z Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 Swing C Line Parameters Scheme Selector Breaker Status Protection Functions Pretrigger Disturbance time fixed at 30 seconds Sample Rate fixed at 1 sample per cycle Swing Record Length 120 15 Z Circle Trigger Ej ProLogic Ev
283. roup X to Setting Group Y Group Print Print from Output Matrix or any graph About Version number Show or Hide Left Show or Hide Left Hand Side Tree Hand Side Tree Graphing Protection Grid On Grid Off Functions The graph can be viewed with the grid on or off by clicking the Grid On or Grid Off button A right click on the trace of the curve gives you the x and y coor dinates Print Graph To print a particular graph click the Print Graph button Zoom on Graphs Graphs can be zoomed to bring portions of the traces into clearer display Left click on any graph and drag to form a small box around the graph area When you release the mouse the trace assumes a new zoom position determined by the area of the zoom coordinates To undo the zoom on the graph click the Refresh button D02333R05 00 L PRO User Manual 2100 5 3 5 Offliner Settings Software Handling Backward Compatibility Offliner Settings displays the version number in the second pane on the bottom status bar The settings version is a whole number v1 v2 v3 v4 etc The Offliner Settings is backward compatible open and edit older settings files and convert older settings files to a newer version Offliner settings handles forward conversion only it converts an older setting file to a newer setting file Converting a 1 Open the setting file you wish to convert Settings File 2 Inthe File menu select Convert to and then select the vers
284. rtant Note Nominal CT Secondary Current can be set to either 1 A or 5 A Nominal System Frequency can be set to either 50 Hz or 60 Hz Ensure setting selection matches that of target L PRO The serial number of the relay must match the one in the setting file or the setting will be rejected by the relay This feature ensures that the correct setting file is applied to the right relay In Settings Version 7 or greater you can choose to ignore the serial number enforcement in the identification screen The relay only checks for proper relay type and setting version if the ignore serial number has been chosen requires relay firmware version 3 0 or greater Analog Inputs WERTEN O Ele Edit Window Help oleja 3 ano Gn lt i EB EH Identification O Relay Analog Input Analog Input Names alog Inputs C External Inputs C Output Contacts Virtual Inputs EVA Main Voltage A Setting Groups System Parameters Record Length Lvc Main votage c E Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 1 L Line Parameters Main Current Current LIA Main Line Current A 1a3 Current 3 A ug Main Line Curren ies Current 3B So Lic Main Line Current C ies Current 3 c p Main Voltage LVB Main votage B Auxiliary Voltage Auxiliary Current Scheme Selector Breaker Status BVA Aux Vottage A Wa Aux Line Current A jag Current
285. rties dialogue and set the Connect Using field to TCP IP Winsock Ifthis option 1s not avail able in the pick list you will require a newer version of HyperTerminal v1 2 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 2 Setup and Communications or greater Alternatively you can use any Telnet program that fully supports VT 100 terminal emulation and z modem file transfer DNP3 SCADA services can also be accessed over the LAN for details see Accessing the Relay s SCADA Services on page 2 8 Connect Port 5 to the Ethernet LAN using an appropriate 10BaseT cable with an RJ 45 connector The relay supports 10 Mbit Ethernet although a dual speed 10 100 Ethernet hub or switch can be used By default the relay is assigned an IP address of 192 168 1 100 If this address is not suitable it may be modified using the relay s Maintenance Menu for de tails see Maintenance Menu on page 2 12 Using HyperTerminal to Access the Relay s User Interface The relay s user interface lets you change settings view measured values and retrieve data from the relay This section describes how to configure a standard Windows VT 100 terminal program on your PC for use with the relay The computer must be connected to the relay via one of its serial modem or Ethernet communication ports See the preceding Communicating with the Re lay section for details on making these connections The relay user interface is accessed using a standard VT 100 terminal st
286. s before the end of a record caused by a previous trigger but too late to allow sufficient post trigger time in a maxi mum extended record a new overlapping record is created The normal record lengths settings are accessible under the Recording heading of the relay settings and can be set from either the terminal user interface or the Offliner Settings software The L PRO compresses records on the fly achieving a typical lossless com pression rate of 4 1 As a result the L PRO can store up to 30 seconds of tran sient recordings and up to 24 minutes of swing recordings in non volatile storage If the storage is full new records automatically overwrite the oldest ensuring that the recording function is always available L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 4 Protection Functions and Specifications Logging Functions Event Log D02333R05 00 The relay maintains a log of events in a 250 entry circular log Each entry con tains the time of the event plus an event description Logged events include trips alarms external input assertions plus internal events such as setting changes Phase information is included in event messag es where appropriate For example the event log entry for a device trip might be 2000 Nov 21 15 34 19 832 51 on ABC Trip The event log can be viewed in 2 ways Front Panel The front panel display shows events in abbreviated form Trip and Alarm events only Terminal User Interface The ful
287. s sending the permissive transfer trip signal the WI echoes back another block of permissive transfer trip send The WI logic is also used to provide local tripping if both ends of the line are to be isolated The line voltages provide supervision with a positive sequence under voltage element 27V 1 and a zero sequence over voltage element 59V0 If a permissive transfer trip is received from the remote line end AND 110 AND 112 OR 113 and OR 119 provide a local tripping signal The DCB logic is used for tripping schemes where the local end over reaches the remote end for forward fault conditions for details see Figure 4 23 Com munication aided Scheme on page 4 41 Typically DCB is used when the com munications link may be disrupted during fault conditions for example power line carrier The local end sends a block trip signal to the remote end when one of the enabled reverse directional elements operates The scheme send signal block trip send is time delayed by timer setting TL3 the local end is required to sense a reverse fault for durations greater than TL3 If one of the forward directional elements operates the blocking logic does not operate For forward directional fault conditions the DCB logic is time delayed by timer setting TL2 The forward fault condition has to last for durations greater than TL2 The local end does not produce a scheme trip output if the remote has detected a reverse directional fault and sends the similar bl
288. sage The example shows A to E inputs are status points of devices that are user se lectable Each ProLogic output can be given a specific name pickup and reset time delay D E Figure 4 22 ProLogic ProLogic Setting Functions Name Give the ProLogic a meaningful name Pickup Delay Delay time from pickup to operate Dropout Delay Delay time from dropout to a ProLogic status of low A B C D E Relay elements as input statements Operators Boolean type logic gates L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 Group Logic D02333R05 00 4 Protection Functions and Specifications Group Logic Control Statements The L PRO Relay has 8 setting groups SG You can change all relay setting parameters except the physical connections such as input or output parameters in each setting group Setting group changes are performed by using any one ofthe 16 available Group Logic statements per setting group The Group Logic statements are similar to the ProLogic statements with the following excep tions the sole function is to activate one of the 8 setting groups and the pro cessing is in a slower half second cycle Group Logic inputs statements are driven from ProLogic or any external input or virtual input or from previous Group Logic statements Each Group Logic statement includes 5 inputs with Boolean statements one latch state and one pickup delay timer The active setting group ASG is viewed from the Terminal Mode
289. se grounding IRIG B Time Input D02333R05 00 The relay is equipped to handle modulated or unmodulated GPS satellite time IRIG B signals The IRIG B time signal is connected to the BNC connection on the back of the relay When the IRIG B signal is provided to the relay the IRIG B functional LED comes on and the relay clock is referenced to this sig nal No settings are required to differentiate between modulated or unmodulat ed signals this is automatically detected by the relay You can enable or disable the IEEE 1344 extension in the terminal mode set tings Utilities Setup Time for details see Utilities on page 3 14 The en abled mode allows the year to be received from the IRIG B signal If the available IRIG B signal has no year extension this setting should be disabled L PRO User Manual 2100 2 1 2 Setup and Communications Communicating with the Relay IED Direct Serial Link V 2 2 There are different ways you can connect to the relay to access its user interface and SCADA services Direct serial link user interface and SCADA Modem link external or internal user interface only Ethernet network link user interface and SCADA Port 2 direct modem Relay Port 1 or rear Port 2 to DB 9 female laptop Laptop PC Figure 2 1 Direct Serial Link The relay has 3 serial ports that provide direct access to its user interface and SCADA services All of the relay s serial ports Ports
290. se to phase distance element is only allowed to operate if the faulted phase is not involved with the element 21P_AB Supervision Not AG Fault and Not BG Fault 2 P BC Supervision Not BG Fault and Not CG Fault 2 P CA Supervision Not CG Fault and Not AG Fault The Start of the Phase Selector The phase selector starts only when a fault occurs The start definition is if 310 is greater than the minimum of any enabled 21N zone s 310 supervision level setting begin the phase selector algorithm A buffer is used to track the pre fault load current which is subtracted from the total current before checking the phase selector criteria During fault conditions the system frequency may change causing a drift in the angle difference being calculated by the phase selector The locked pre fault load current vector is adjusted accordingly based on this angle difference be tween the pre fault positive sequence voltage and the positive sequence volt age during the fault If the faulted positive sequence voltage shifts the angle difference is taken into account i e the same angle relationship remains along the fault duration L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 CCVT Transient Compensation on 21 Devices D02333R05 00 4 Protection Functions and Specifications Duration of the Phase Selector Supervision The maximum blocking time to 21N for a phase phase ground fault is 2 0 sec onds to x seconds where x is the maximum pickup delay
291. set Self Check DC Ch n O P Block Continuous dc level on Ch n where n 1 to 18 Relay is blocked New Settings loaded Active group n Where n 1 8 New Setting Loaded Manual Settings Load request activate SGn Manual or user initiated settings change Manual Settings Load request completed Completion of user initiated settings change Changed Active Group from x to y Logic n This happens when relay changes setting group Automatic group logic initiated set ting group change User changed Active Group from x to y This happens when the relay changes set ting group User initiated setting group change L PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix D 3 Appendix D Event Messages L PRO Event Messages kasel Unit Recalibrated Unit restarted User logged In Details of Failure Modes User Inputs DSP X86 Pantene Digital Signal Micro hal dam Remote Connection Outputs Processor processor Watch dog Watch dog System Failure or Self Check Fail DSP Failure Service Required l DSP to X86 on front panel goes Communication from off to red Relay Functional Failure or on front panel goes Self Check Fail from green to off l i Self Check Fail The Master Relay is de to user selectable energized Two of its aux output relay contacts open discon contacts close necting all power to the other auxiliary relays A separate contact labelled Relay I
292. sition Expect time delay of 500 ms approximately 1 5 cycle detection time 3 Apply the frequency shift Confirm the expected time delay Target 81 1 4 Move Timer Stop to Output Contact 9 81 2 5 Set timer start on instantaneous frequency shift 66 4 V 60 Hz to 59 4 Hz transition Expect time delay of 500 ms approximately 1 5 cycle detection time 6 Apply the frequency shift Confirm the expected time delay Target 81 2 End of 81 test L PRO User Manual 2100 6 43 6 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 25 27 59 Sync Check Test Note Three or four voltage sources are required for this test The L PRO will create the positive sequence sync check voltage out of the sin gle phase auxiliary voltage input depending on which phase is injected Settings Maximum voltage 70 V sec Maximum Positive Sequence voltage Minimum voltage 40 V sec Minimum Positive Sequence voltage Angle Difference 20 degrees Time Delay 200 milliseconds Dead Main Live Aux DMLA Enable Live Main Dead Aux LMDA Enable Dead Main Dead Aux DMDA Enable 27 Vimein Positive Seq ES O 27 Vaux Positive seq S 59 Vrain Positive S CH 210 2n T 59 Vsync Positive seq 0 MmainAngle VauxAngle lt Setting 25 C Sync Check Enabled Dead Main Live Sync Enabled 27 Vrain Positive Seq 20 V Fixed 214 59 Vsync Positive Seq 20 V Fixed 9 Live Main Dead Sync Enabled
293. st Guide ProLogic 9 This equation closes Out 5 to simulate Main Breaker a contact and also closes Out 14 to provide feedback into Main Breaker Status ProLogic 3 This latching function resets when an external trip is received ProLogic 9 Main Bkr Reclose Name Main Bkr Reclose AND Pickup Delay 0 00 s ojo o Dropout Delay 0 00 s 0 1 1 o o V Target Enabled 1 1 4 Out Input A 79 Main Reclose F Input B Not used d Input C Not used j Input D Nol d Input E Not used d This symbol denotes a function which has not been enabled and is treated as a logic zero input Figure 6 45 Main Breaker Reclose 79 Reset Procedure perform this before beginning the 79 Test 1 In Terminal Mode Service level access Utilities Maintenance Control Virtual Inputs Scroll to Virtual Input 2 SCADA LO Reset Ini 3 Pulse On This simulates a SCADA 79 Lockout Reset Command Observe L PRO Target Init LO Reset VI PL6 After 12 Seconds Target Main LO is Reset PL7 End of 79 Reset procedure L PRO User Manual 2100 6 51 6 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 79 Test Procedure 1 Access Utilities Maintenance Control Virtual Inputs 2 Scroll to Virtual Input 1 SCADA Close Bkr 1 amp 2 3 Pulse On This simulates a SCADA Breaker Close command Observe L PRO actions on the L PRO HMI Main Breaker Close and Aux Breaker Close
294. st where the interface processor associates ancillary functions with the pre vious setting file for approximately 5 seconds The ancillary setting information includes channel or ProLogic and Group Logic statements names front panel target light activation rules and record initiation rules The protection processor does not have any interruption in service Automatic Settings Change Relay configuration changes during a relay initiated setting change does not disrupt the relay protection functions Since the relay setting file does not change the interface processor uses the new setting group ancillary setting in formation at the same time as the protection processor switches to the new set ting group An event is logged to show when the new setting group is in service L PRO User Manual 2100 4 39 4 Protection Functions and Specifications Communication Aided Scheme 50 51N OC Carrier Trip and Block Logic 4 40 The L PRO Relay provides 4 communication aided tripping scheme options Permissive over reaching transfer trip POTT a combination of POTT with weak infeed WI directional comparison blocking DCB or permissive un der reaching transfer trip PUTT are available to be used with external tele communications devices for enhanced tripping of the protected line The combination of phase distance ground distance and neutral overcurrent ele ments provide flexible setting options for the selected communication aided tr
295. stance relays or the actual line to line voltage for the phase distance relay Iis defined as Jane s K x 3I for ground distance relays or the line to line current for phase distance relays Zset s the setting reach and Huis a positive sequence memory voltage stored within the relay V fis the polarizing quantity for the mho elements and is more completely de scribed in Relay Method of Memory Polarization on page 4 5 To make the reach of the ground distance relay relate to the line positive se quence impedance the classical K factor is used This factor is defined as _ 4 41 Ko E The L PRO includes a directional element to supervise the phase 21P and ground 21N mho elements for Zone 1 21P1 21N1 and Zone 2 21P2 21N2 only The directional element prevents mis operation of the mho ele ments for reverse faults faults at the bus and phase phase faults during high load conditions The directional element does not supervise Zone 3 and Zone 4 elements due to the offset reach capabilities of these zones The directional element is desribed in Directional Element on page 4 7 4 2 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 4 Protection Functions and Specifications 21P Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Enable disable Enable disable Enable disable Enable disable Forward Reach ohms 0 05 to 66 00 5 A 0 25 to 330 00 1 A 0 05 to 66 00 5 A 0 25 to 330 00 1 A 0 05 to 66
296. t Test Procedure Terminal Mode access relay Metering Logic Protection Logic Monitor 68 InnBlinder Alarm Output Contact 13 with an ohmmeter 2 Apply balanced 3 phase nominal voltages 66 4 V to the L PRO terminals Ph A 330 66 4 V 70 Ph B 331 66 4 V Z 120 Ph C 332 66 4 V 2 120 Ph N 333 3 Connect 3 phase current sources 3 15 A Z180 from voltages to the L PRO terminals Ph A 300 301 3 15 A Z180 Ph B 302 303 3 15 A 2 60 Ph C 303 304 3 15 A Z 60 Observe 68 InnBlinder Alarm Low Contact 13 Open 4 Simultaneously increase ramp up 3 phase currents At 4 86 to 5 36 A expect 5 11 A 68 InnBlinder Alarm High Contact 13 Closed 6 24 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 Change Setting Group D02333R05 00 6 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide Testing the 68 Swing Timer Delay 1 Monitor Timer Stop on normally open Output Contact 2 204 205 2 Test at impedance between Inner and Outer Right Blinders 15 Q 20 3 Set timer to start from 3 phase current transition i e current off to on 4 Apply keep on balanced 3 phase voltages 66 4 V to the L PRO termi nals Ph A 330 66 4 V Z0 Ph B 331 66 4 V Z 120 Ph C 332 66 4 V Z 120 Ph N 333 5 Apply 3 phase currents from 0 to 4 43 A to start the timer Ph A 300 301 4 43 A Z0 Ph B 302 303 4 43 A Z 120 Ph C 303 304 4 43 A Z120 Expect operating time 1 0 second inherent 1 0 to 1 3 cycle detec
297. t be set to see any faults at the end of the line When the line current of 4 of I nominal secondary or greater stays on for greater than 200 ms the circuit 1s disabled allowing the distance relays to take over protection of the line If faults occur after the line has been energized a voltage level of 7596 could be present The circuit does not react because ofa 2 second delay on the voltage reset No output from this function occurs be cause the blockout feature associated with the line current is greater than 0 2 A secondary If you are concerned about line current being less than 0 2 A secondary at any time during the inservice period you can introduce a breaker auxiliary contact into the logic using a ProLogic statement e g ProLogic Statement Dead Line Pickup External Input Breaker Closed The breaker status can be either an a or b contact Using the breaker contact supervision ensures no opera tion of the Dead Line Pickup function with the line breaker closed after the en ergization period In addition to this logic a second harmonic restraint logic allows the line to be more easily energized if the line is T tapped with an online reactor or trans former Energization of the line with the T tapped device results in 2nd har monics that allows the line to be energized If a fault exists that exceeds the line high set overcurrent devices the line is allowed to trip L PRO User Manual 2100 4 17 4 Protection Functi
298. t index 39 is asserted while there are still fault loca tion events in the buffer size 100 When a Pulse or Latch is received for the Binary Output Get Next Fault Event default point index 124 previous state is not important fault event information is put into the Analog Inputs If there is no fault location event available when the Binary Output is pulsed the fault type is set to zero Not all fault location events are reported trough DNP In a burst of fault loca tions from a fault only the first processed event is available through DNP all other events within the following 100 ms interval are ignored Outside 100 ms from the processed fault location event the system accepts another fault loca tion event and performs the same filtering In addition only fault location events generated by trip elements are available 2 4 Octet String Points INA If configurable Static Steady State Group Number 110 Capabilities Current Value a Event Group Number 111 list methods 2 4 4 Event reporting mode Only most recent B All events 2 4 2 Octet Strings Included Always in Class 0 response IX Never Only if point is assigned to Class 1 2 or 3 Based on point Index add column to table below 2 4 8 Definition of Octet Fixed list shown in table below String Point List Configurable current list may be shown in table below IX Other explain Used for Event Log access as described below D0
299. te nactive Active None None 94 Virtual Input 1 Y Y Y nactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 95 Virtual Input 2 Y Y Y nactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 96 Virtual Input 3 Y Y Y nactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 97 Virtual Input 4 Y M Y nactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 98 Virtual Input 5 Y X X nactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 99 Virtual Input 6 M Y Y nactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis D02333R05 00 L PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix F 19 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile Default Class Supported Control Operations Assigned to Events 1 2 3 or none E S 8 o Qa o o x E E Name for Name for Name o State when State when Change Command Description z T E eh 2 value is 0 value is 1 g lo g t amp e 8 z 2 2 S BPR Bile Le sme em ojojoj l l l HE t 88 8 8 8 8 5 8 5 2 Es REESEN aaa 100 Virtual Input 7 Y Y Y Y Y Y nactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed s 101 Virtual Input 8 Y Y Y Y Y Y nactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 102 Virtual Input 9 Y Y Y Y M Y nactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 103 Virtual Input 10 Y Y Y Y MY Y nactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed a
300. tection gt Logicl Monitor 60 Alarm 2 Apply balanced 3 phase nominal voltages 66 4 V to the L PRO terminals Ph A 330 66 4 V 20 Ph B 331 66 4 V 7 120 Ph C 332 66 4 V Z 120 Ph N 333 3 Connect 3 phase current sources 0 5 A to the L PRO terminals must be greater than 0 2 A 4 Inominal to enable due to low set supervision for details see for details see Figure 6 10 Loss of Potential Logic 60 on page 6 10 Ph A 300 301 0 5 A Z0 Ph B 302 303 0 5 A 7 120 Ph C 303 304 0 5 A Z4120 Observe 60 Alarm Low 4 Instantaneously reduce single phase voltage to 48 V or less 60 Alarm High Contact 2 Closed 6 10 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 6 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide Testing the LOP I1 Supervision Restore 3 phase voltages to 66 4 V Observe 60 Alarm Low Contact 2 Open 2 Increase balanced 3 phase currents to 10 1 A per phase 3 Reduce single phase voltage to 0 Observe 60 Alarm remains low Observe Contact 2 remains open 4 Reduce currents to 0 Testing the LOP 310 Supervision Restore 3 phase voltages to 66 4 V Observe 60 Alarm Low Contact 2 Open 2 Increase any single phase current to 1 1 A 3 Reduce single phase voltage to 0 Observe 60 Alarm remains low Observe Contact 2 remains open 4 Reduce all sources to 0 End of 60 test 21P1 Phase Zone 1 Single Phase Under Impedance Test tested as 3 phase fault Distance Test Settings e Positive Sequence Secondar
301. teristic 0 05 to 66 00 5 A 0 25 to 330 00 1 A 0 05 to 66 00 5 A 0 25 to 330 00 1 A Reverse Reach ohms Quad characteristic x to 66 00 5 A x to 330 00 1 A x to 66 00 5 A x to 330 00 1 A Left Reach R1 ohms Quad only 0 05 to 66 00 5 A 0 25 to 330 00 1 A 0 05 to 66 00 5 A 0 25 to 330 00 1 A 0 05 to 66 00 5 A 0 25 to 330 00 1 A 0 05 to 66 00 5 A 0 25 to 330 00 1 A Right Reach R2 ohms 0 05 to 66 00 5 A 0 05 to 66 00 5 A 0 05 to 66 00 5 A 0 05 to 66 00 5 A Quad only 0 25 to 330 00 1 A 0 25 to 330 00 1 A 0 25 to 330 00 1A 0 25 to 330 00 1 A Mho Characteristic Angle degrees 70 0 to 140 0 70 0 to 140 0 70 0 to 140 0 70 0 to 140 0 Pickup Delay seconds 0 00 to 0 20 0 00 to 2 00 0 00 to 5 00 0 00 to 5 00 Id Supervision amps secondary 0 2 to 50 0 5 A 0 04 to 10 00 1 A 0 2 to 50 0 5 A 0 04 to 10 00 1 A 0 2 to 50 0 5 A 0 04 to 10 00 1 A 0 2 to 50 0 5 A 0 04 to 10 00 1 A 3IO Supervision amps secondary 0 2 to 50 0 5 A 0 04 to 10 0 1 A 0 2 to 50 0 0 04 to 10 0 1 A 0 2 to 50 0 0 04 to 10 0 1 A 0 2 to 50 0 0 04 to 10 0 1 A Line Angle degrees 45 to 89 Setting is made in Parameters Positive Sequence Angle Load Impedance ohms R ohms secondary 150 0 to 150 0 X ohms secondary 150 0 to 150 0 x Rlecos LineAngle
302. ting Group 7 H Setting Group 8 Setting Group 8 Location Anyplace Line Y230z Figure 6 3 Identification Serial Number Screen 3 Save the file 4 Connect to the L PRO in Service or Change mode via the L PRO front port Port 1 using your terminal program s Zmodem e g HyperTerminal or Procomm L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 About the Acceptance Test Setting File D02333R05 00 6 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide From the Main Menu select Settings From the Settings submenu select Load From Offliner Select Y yes you are ready to continue onan Find Send File in your terminal software e g for HyperTerminal under Transfer The acceptance test setting file provided is not necessarily configured to a pro vide a realistic setting example Its configuration is intended to demonstrate simple test methods for each relay element Tests are organized to prevent in terference of one protection element on the next within the relay for ease of testing without using multiple setting files and minimizing the number of test connection changes All contacts in the relay will be tested if all elements in this procedure are tested as written Testing all the elements is accommodated by using of the L PRO Setting Groups 3 groups are used Setting Group 1 tests elements 21P 21N 68 60 Dead Line Pickup Weak In feed Setting Group 2 tests elements 46 50 46 51 50 51 SON SIN 27 59 SOLS
303. tion time Observe target 68 Out Of Step Trip End of 68 Swing Timer test For the next group of tests using the Acceptance Test file you must change to Setting Group 2 InService mode access Utilities Maintenance Control Virtual Inputs 2 Use the Enter key to scroll Input Name to Switch to SG2 3 Cursor over to Action and select Pulse On 4 Press lt F 2 gt to execute this command the Active Setting Group will be come Group 2 LPRO Unit ID R BGB1 Util Maintenance User Access Level SERVICE 20820ugi6 14 18 Tee Me Erase prev menu Calibrate Outputs Control Virtual Inputs Input Nane Action Switch to SG2 ETI F3 gt Quit lt F2 gt Execute Figure 6 21 Change Setting Groups via Virtual Inputs HyperTerminal 5 Confirm the Active Setting Group in Settings gt Active Group Note you can also change the Active Setting Group in this screen L PRO User Manual 2100 6 25 6 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide LPRO Unit ID Wonn Main Menu Settings User Access Level SERUICE 20820ugi6 14 42 prev menu j Settings Load from Offliner Retrieve to Offliner fictive Group fictive Setting Group Group Logic functions Nane State Nane State 1 Switch to G2 LOW 9 Group Logic 9 LOW 2 Switch to Sei LOW 18 Group Logic 10 LOW 3 Group Logic 3 LOW 11 Group Logic 11 LOW 4 Group Logic 4 LOW 12 Group Logic 12 LOW 5 Group Logic 5 LOW 13 Group Logic 13 LOW 6 Group Logic 6 LOW 14 Gro
304. tis 104 Virtual Input 11 Y Y Y Y MS Y nactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 105 Virtual Input 12 M Y Y A Y Y nactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 106 Virtual Input 13 Y Y Y Y Y Y nactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 107 Virtual Input 14 Y Y Y Y Y Y nactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 108 Virtual Input 15 Y Y Y Y M Y nactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 109 Virtual Input 16 Y Y Y Y Y Y nactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 110 Virtual Input 17 Y Y Y Y Y Y nactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 111 Virtual Input 18 Y Y Y Y Y Y nactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 112 Virtual Input 19 Y Y Y Y Y Y nactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 113 Virtual Input 20 Y Y Y Y 04 Y nactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 114 Virtual Input 21 Y Y Y Y Y Y nactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 115 Virtual Input 22 Y Y Y Y Y Y nactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 116 Virtual Input 23 Y Y Y Y Wi Y nactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 117 Virtual Input 24 Y Y Y Y Y Y nactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 118 Virtual Input 25 Y Y Y Y E Y nactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 119 Virtual Input
305. tive None None 67 Group Logic 5 nactive Active None None 68 Group Logic 6 nactive Active None None 69 Group Logic 7 nactive Active None None 70 Group Logic 8 nactive Active None None 71 Group Logic 9 nactive Active None None 72 Group Logic 10 nactive Active None None 73 Group Logic 11 nactive Active None None 74 Group Logic 12 nactive Active None None 75 Group Logic 13 nactive Active None None 76 Group Logic 14 nactive Active None None 77 Group Logic 15 nactive Active None None 78 Group Logic 16 nactive Active None None 79 79 Initiated nactive Active None None 80 79 Blocked nactive Active None None 81 50BF 1 Main nactive Active None None 82 50BF 2 Main nactive Active None None 83 50BF 1 Aux nactive Active None None 84 50BF 2 Aux nactive Active None None 85 79 Main Reclose nactive Active None None 86 79 Aux Reclose nactive Active None None 87 79 Lead Lockout nactive Active None None 88 79 Follow Lockout nactive Active None None 89 81 1 Trip nactive Active None None 90 81 2 Trip nactive Active None None 91 81 3 Trip nactive Active None None 92 81 4 Trip nactive Active None None 93 50BF Initia
306. to 57 6 K baud Rear port can support an external modem Internal Modem 33 6 Kbps V 32 bis Optional internal modem Network 10BaseT Ethernet port Optional Ethernet card SCADA Interface DNP3 RS 232 or Ethernet or Modbus RS 232 Rear port Time Sync IRIG B BNC connector Modulated or unmodulated auto detect Self Checking Relay Inoperative 1 contact Closed when relay inoperative Terminal User Interface VT100 terminal emulation Accessible via serial modem or net work interface Environmental Ambient Temperature Range 40 C to 85 C IEC 60068 2 1 IEC 60068 2 2 Humidity Up to 95 without condensation IEC 60068 2 30 Insulation Test Hi Pot Power supply analog inputs external inputs output contacts 1 5 kV 50 60 Hz 1 minute IEC 60255 5 Electrical Fast Transient ANSI IEEE C37 90 1 1989 Oscillatory Transient ANSI IEEE C37 90 1 1989 RFI Susceptibility ANSI IEEE C37 90 2 IEC 255 22 3 Shock and Bump IEC 60255 21 2 Class 1 Sinusoidal Vibration 10 Hz to 150 Hz 0 15 mm or 20 m s 10 sweep cycles IEC 60068 2 6 Physical Appendix A 2 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 Appendix A IED Specifications L PRO Model 2100 Specifications Weight 11 1 kg 3U chassis 24 47 Ibs 3U chassis 14 5 kg 4U chassis 32 0 Ibs 4U chassis Dimensions 13 3 cm 3U chassis 5
307. tput14 Spare 14 0 10 s 0 00 to 1 00 Virtual Input Names VI 1 Virtual Input 1 VI2 Virtual Input 2 VI 3 Virtual Input 3 VI4 Virtual Input 4 VI 5 Virtual Input 5 VI6 Virtual Input 6 VI 7 Virtual Input 7 VI8 Virtual Input 8 VI9 Virtual Input 9 VI 10 Virtual Input 10 VI 11 Virtual Input 11 VI 12 Virtual Input 12 VI 13 Virtual Input 13 VI 14 Virtual Input 14 VI 15 Virtual Input 15 VI 16 Virtual Input 16 VI 17 Virtual Input 17 VI 18 Virtual Input 18 VI 19 Virtual Input 19 VI 20 Virtual Input 20 VI 21 Virtual Input 21 VI 22 Virtual Input 22 VI 23 Virtual Input 23 VI 24 Virtual Input 24 VI 25 Virtual Input 25 VI 26 Virtual Input 26 VI 27 Virtual Input 27 VI 28 Virtual Input 28 L PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix B 3 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges L PRO Settings Summary Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 p OSDoosixaGaas axi s ds eA GISAE Fk amp R 5s I VI 29 Virtual Input 29 VI 30 Virtual Input 30 Setting Group Names Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 Setting Group 2 Setting Group 2 Setting Group 3 Setting Group 3 Setting Group 4 Setting Group 4 Setting Group 5 Setting Group 5 Setting Group 6 Setting Group 6 Setting Group 7 Setting Group 7 Setting Group 8 Setting Group 8 System Parameters Base MVA 100 00 MVA
308. ts can also be assigned a Deadband and Scaling factor L PRO Offliner Settings Document 1 nl xj Ele Edt Window Heb 218 xl psn X B3 tB o I Bs amp t8 EL kentification L PRO SCADA Summary Relay C Analog Inputs C External Inputs Point Change Deadband Reported C Output Contacts Name Value Group Index Event Class Deadband Units Scale Units C Virtual Inputs LIseung Groups SCADA Communication C System Parameters m C SCADA Communication Ee t EE DNP Configuration Mode Ethernet Network Port DNP3 Level 2 TCP C Point Map Gare GER Class Data Parity Odd EE SCADA Settings Summary Data Link Timeout em Record Length Keep Alive Timeout EC Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 UDP Response Source Port of Request C Line Parameters Number of Masters 1 C Scheme Selector Connection Based On Port Number C Breaker Status Master 1 IP Address 23614 C Directional Element Master 1 Port 20000 56 Protection Functions Master 2 IP Address 4721612 Z Circle Trigger Master 2 Port 20000 C Protege Master 3 IP Address 4721621 C Group Logic Master 3 Port 20000 Output Matrix C Settings Summary 7 Setting Group 2 Setting Group2 Binary Inputs 8C Setting Group 3 Setting Group 3 External input 1 4 2 o none 4 Setting Group 4 Setting Group 4 External Input 2 4 2 M 1 4 L Setting Group 5 Setting Group 5 External Input 3 4 2 2 2 SL Setting G
309. tting Group 3 Setting Group 3 External Input Names Comm T T Revr Comm P T Revr Spare 3 Spare 4 Spare 5 Spare 6 Spare 7 Spare 8 oe Ae o eww Spare 9 C Setting Group 4 Setting Group 4 C Setting Group 5 Setting Group 5 Setting Group 6 Setting Group 6 Setting Group 7 Setting Group 7 Setting Group 8 Setting Group 8 E amp amp IL PRO Offliner Settings v8 Enter up to 20 characters for External Input name Figure 5 7 External Inputs External Input Names screen allows you to define meaningful names for 9 ex ternal digital inputs T T Refers to Transfer Trip and P T Permissive Trip External Input Names 1to9 User defined L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 D02333R05 00 Output Contacts L meray C Analog Inputs vutiput VAUILdUCL Names and Dropout Timers O Virtual Inputs C Setting Groups System Parameters C Record Length H Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 H Setting Group 2 Setting Group 2 H Setting Group 3 Setting Group 3 H Setting Group 4 Setting Group 4 H Setting Group 5 Setting Group 5 H Setting Group 6 Setting Group 5 H Setting Group 7 Setting Group 7 H Setting Group 8 Setting Group 8 Names Timers afse ow 2 mwe2 TS 3 Spare 3 010 s losen os 5 Spare 5 010 s 6 Seares os p swer Tase 8 Spare 8 o10 s see 0
310. tual Input in ProLogic ProLogic 2 This equation is used to reset the Main Breaker Status via ProLog ic 3 Opens Out 5 Bkr Status Reset 0 00 0 00 a RRE Notused j Figure 6 38 Breaker Status Reset using ProLogic Ext Input 3 via Output Contact 5 L PRO User Manual 2100 6 47 6 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide ProLogic 3 This equation is set from ProLogic 1 Main Breaker Close Com mand OR ProLogic 9 Main Breaker Reclose Note that ProLogic 9 is mapped to Out 14 so Out 14 is used to indirectly provide ProLogic 9 availabil ity to ProLogic 1 through 8 ProLogic 9 changes the Main Breaker Status con tact Out 5 and apply a trip signal via ProLogic 4 Reset occurs when ProLogic 2 Breaker Status Reset is activated Main 52a Status 0 00 0 01 PL1 Main Bkr Close Output Contact 14 E PL 2 Bkr Status Reset 7 Figure 6 39 Main Breaker Status ProLogic 4 This equation applies the External Trip Closes Out 7 10 seconds after the Breaker Status ProLogic 3 goes high i e Main Breaker Status Closed Ext Trip Signal PL 3 Main 52a Status aue i Figure 6 40 Using ProLogic to give Trip Command via External Input 6 48 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 D02333R05 00 6 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide ProLogic 5 This equation provides indication via the L PRO HMI display that the Recloser has locked out Recloser Lockout 0 00 0 50
311. u e DEER 7 1 AG and DC ee e EE 7 1 Communication Wiring eessen 7 1 8 Cyber Sept sugEEEEbEEESERSEESEEEEEEEEEEENEeNEEENEEEh 8 1 System Access Control and Authorisation 8 1 Cyber Security Event Monitoring and Logging 8 3 Cyber Security Notification message format 8 4 I Ports and Services E 8 7 IEEE 1686 Table of Compliance 8 8 Appendix A IED Specifications A 1 Distance Element Operating Time Curves at Nominal PROQUGMOY e E A 4 Frequency Element Operating Time Curves A 8 External Input Pickup Elter A 9 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges B 1 Appendix C Hardware Description C 1 Appendix D Event Messages D 1 Appendix E Modbus RTU Communication Protocol E 1 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile F 1 Appendix G Mechanical Drawings G 1 Appendix H Rear Panel Drawings H 1 Appendix AC Schematic Drawings l 1 Appendix J DC Schematic Drawings J 1 Appendix K Function Logic Diagram K 1 Appendix L L PRO Setting Example L 1 Switching Setting Groups L 2 79 Auto recloser examples ssssssesrirerrtrrrrnrrennrnen reene L 9 OX EE
312. ult for durations greater than TL3 The remote end does not produce a scheme trip output unless a forward directional fault is detected and the local end has sent the permissive trip signal The remote end senses a per missive trip receive signal and the scheme trip closes the output contacts and removes the fault contribution from the remote end The remote end can act quicker for fault conditions where the Zone 2 faults would be time delayed un less the close in fault condition was not transferred by the scheme send 4 44 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 4 Protection Functions and Specifications Recording Functions Fault Recording Swing Recording Event Recording D02333R05 00 The relay has high speed fault recording and logging functions to allow you to analyze faults and to review the operation of the overall protection scheme Slow speed swing recording can be used to analyze system stability If the relay has reached its recording capacity new records overwrite the oldest records The relay provides DFR quality fault recording capturing input signal wave forms and external input states at a rate of 96 samples per cycle Each record also contains the timing of the internal logic produced by the relay e g Device 51 trip Obtain this information by uploading the records from the relay via the terminal mode file transfer process and view them with RecordBase View software The quantities recorded are 18 analog chann
313. umber of samples in a packet of 12 that must be recognized by the DSP as high before an External Input status is changed from low to high This will af fect the pulse width required for the External Inputs to be detected Below 1s a table describing the pulse widths for possible and definite defection for each D02333R05 00 setting Pickup Filter Input Pulse Width required for Input Pulse Width required Count El to be possibly detected Tor Elto Be denitely detected 4 0 694 ms 1 215 ms 5 0 868 ms 1 563 ms 6 1 042 ms 1 909 ms 7 1 215 ms 2 257 ms 8 1 389 ms 2 604 ms 9 1 563 ms 2 951 ms 10 1 736 ms 3 299 ms 11 1 909 ms 3 645 ms 12 2 083 ms 3 993 ms L PRO User Manual 2100 Appendix A 9 Appendix A IED Specifications Fora setting of 6 it will take between 1 042 and 1 909 ms for an External Input to be declared as high The default setting is 4 which was the number that was used in the L PRO prior to Version 10 Appendix A 10 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 Appendix B Settings and Ranges D02333R05 00 IED Settings and Ranges When a setting has been completed in Offliner Settings software it can be printed along with the ranges available for these settings This is a view only option to change the settings you must go back into the particular setting that you wish to change The summary is a quick way to view all the settings in a compact form The top part of th
314. up Logic 14 LOW Group Logic 7 LOW 15 Group Logic 15 LOW 8 Group Logic 8 LOW 16 Group Logic 16 LOW F3 gt Quit lt F2 gt Accept if Group number has been modified otherwise Refresh Figure 6 22 Group Logic Metering HyperTerminal 27 Undervoltage Settings Test Main AND 3 Phase Undervoltage Auxiliary AND Single Phase Undervoltage Only 1 phase is connected Main and Aux Pickup 30 V Time Delay 0 01 second 27 Va mein RMS 27 Vb mein RMS GES Oo 27 Vc main RMS O Out 14 27 Main Undervoltage 301 O 3 Phases Connected 7 27 Va aux RMS _ _ 27 Vb aux RMS 302 O 27 Vc aux RMS 27 Aux Undervoltage 303 RD 0 1 Phase Connected Figure 6 23 Undervoltage Logic 27 6 26 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 D02333R05 00 6 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 27 Test Procedure 1 Terminal Mode access relay Metering Logic Protection Logic2 Monitor 27 Main U V 27 Aux U V Monitor Output Contacts 13 27 Aux Trip 14 27 Main Trip 2 Apply balanced 3 phase nominal voltages 66 4 V to the L PRO terminals Ph A 324 and 330 66 4 V 70 Ph B 331 66 4 V Z 120 Ph C 332 66 4 V 2 120 Ph N 327 and 333 Observe 27 Main U V Low 27 Aux U V Low 3 Reduce A Phase voltage At 31 0 to 29 0 V expect 30 V 27 Aux U V High Contact 13 closed 27 Main U V remains Low Contact 14 open L PRO User Manual 2100
315. ve 1 Contact Closed active Output Contact 9 521 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Output Contact 10 522 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Output Contact 11 523 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Output Contact 12 524 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Output Contact 13 525 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Output Contact 14 526 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Output Contact 15 527 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Output Contact 16 528 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Output Contact 17 529 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Output Contact 18 530 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Output Contact 19 531 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Output Contact 20 532 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Output Contact 21 533 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active 21P1 Trip 769 0 Off inactive 1 On active 21P2 Trip 770 0 Off inactive 1 On active 21P3 Trip 771 0 Off inactive 1 On active 21P4 Trip 772 0 Off inactive 1 On active 51 Trip 773 0 Off inactive 1 On active 50 Trip 774 0 Off inactive 1 On active 21N1 Trip 775 0 Off inactive 1 On active 21N2 Trip 776 0 Off inactive 1 On active 21N3 Trip 777 0 Off inactive 1 On active 21N4 Trip 778 0 Off inactive
316. ve 13 Virtual Input 5 1 Inactive Active 14 Virtual Input 6 1 Inactive Active 15 Virtual Input 7 1 Inactive Active 16 Virtual Input 8 1 Inactive Active 17 Virtual Input 9 1 Inactive Active 18 Virtual Input 10 1 Inactive Active 19 Virtual Input 11 1 Inactive Active 20 Virtual Input 12 1 Inactive Active 21 Virtual Input 13 1 Inactive Active 22 Virtual Input 14 1 Inactive Active 23 Virtual Input 15 1 Inactive Active 24 Virtual Input 16 1 Inactive Active 25 Virtual Input 17 1 Inactive Active 26 Virtual Input 18 1 Inactive Active 27 Virtual Input 19 1 Inactive Active 28 Virtual Input 20 1 Inactive Active 29 Virtual Input 21 1 Inactive Active 30 Virtual Input 22 1 Inactive Active 31 Virtual Input 23 1 Inactive Active 32 Virtual Input 24 1 Inactive Active 33 Virtual Input 25 1 Inactive Active 34 Virtual Input 26 1 Inactive Active 35 Virtual Input 27 1 Inactive Active 36 Virtual Input 28 1 Inactive Active 37 Virtual Input 29 1 Inactive Active 38 Virtual Input 30 1 Inactive Active Appendix F 14 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile Point Default Class Name for Name for index Name Assigned to Events State when State when Description 1 2 3 or none value is 0 value is 1 39 Fault Information Available 1 Inactive Active 40 External Input 10 1 Inactive Active 41 External Input 11 1 Inactive Active 42 External Input 12 1 Inactive Active
317. ve Adobe Acrobat on your com puter If you need a copy download a copy by clicking on Download Adobe Acrobat Anti virus Anti spyware Software If an anti virus anti spyware software on your local system identifies any of the ERLPhase applications as a potential threat it will be necessary to con figure your anti virus anti software to classify it as safe for its proper oper ation Please consult the appropriate anti virus anti spyware software documentation to determine the relevant procedure Offliner Features The Offliner software includes the following menu and system tool bar Help Help Topics About L PRO Settings File Edit window Help New Save Copy Undo Copy About Setting 1 Open Cut Paste Copy Group Print Show or Hide Graph Left Hand Side Tree Figure 5 2 Top Tool Bar Tool Bar Windows Menu Icon Restore minimize close File New open close save save as print setup Edit Undo cut copy paste Window Cascade tile arrange icons Help Help Topics About L PRO Settings L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 5 Offliner Settings Software Settings Program Icons New Open new default settings file Open Open any valid settings file Save Save current settings file Cut Edit function Copy Edit function Paste Edit function Undo Edit function Copy Graph Copy to clipboard Copy Setting Copy from Setting G
318. ve sequence calculation The directional element will only move from one calculation to the next calculation if insufficient sequence voltages and currents exist to make a valid calculation The negative sequence calculation determines the angle between the measured negative sequence impedance and the positive sequence line impedance angle entered in settings To perform this calculation the default minimum amount of negative sequence voltage required is 0 5 Vsec and the default minimum amount of negative sequence current required is 0 2 Asec The zero sequence calculation determines the angle between the measured Zero sequence impedance the zero sequence line impedance angle entered in settings To perform this calculation the default minimum amount of zero se quence voltage 3V0 required is 1 0 Vsec and the default minimum amount of zero sequence current 310 required is 0 2 Asec The positive sequence calculation determines the angle between the measured positive sequence impedance based on measured current and the memory voltage output of the ring filter and the positive sequence line impedance an gle entered in settings To perform the positive sequence impedance calcula tion the directly measured positive sequence current must exceed 0 2 Asec and the memorized positive sequence voltage must exceed 2 Vsec 4 8 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 Directional Element Outputs Settings D02333R05 00 4 Protection Functions
319. vent becomes the current event available for reading Acknowledge Current Event and Get Next Event Function Code 6 address 40514 Clears the current event from the read registers and places the next event into them An acknowledged event is no longer available for reading Get Next Event Function Code 6 address 40515 Places the next event in the read registers without acknowledging the current event The current event will reappear in the list when Refresh Event List is used Size of Current Event Message Function Code 3 address 40516 Indicates the number of 16 bit registers used to contain the current event Event data is stored with 2 characters per register A reading of zero indi cates that there are no unacknowledged events available in the current set NB The Refresh Event List function can be used to check for new events that have occurred since the last Refresh Event List Fault Location Event Function Code 3 address 40517 Identifies fault location events These events are identified by FL in this register Non fault location events contain in this location Read Event Message Function Code 3 addresses 40518 40570 Contains the current message Two ASCII characters are packed into each 16 bit register All unused registers in the set are set to 0 Fault Information Type Function Code 3 address 40571 If the current event is a fault location event this register co
320. xception Authorization level is defined by login name 5 1 5 2 Authorization using role based access Exception Authorization using RBAC is not supported control RBAC 5 1 6 IED main security functions Exception 5 1 6 a View data Comply 5 1 6 b View configuration settings Comply 5 1 6 c Force values Comply 5 1 6 d Configuration change Comply 5 1 6 e Firmware change Comply 5 1 6 f ID password or RBAC management Comply Feature not offered in this product 5 1 6 g Audit trail Exception Audit trail is not supported 5 1 7 Password display Exception Passwords are displayed when user logs in 5 1 8 Access timeout Exception Access timeout period is 60 minutes and cannot be changed 5 2 Audit trail Exception Audit trail is not supported Cyber Security Notifica tion to an external Syslog RFC 5424 server is pro vided instead 5 2 1 Audit trail background Exception Not supported 5 2 2 Storage capability Exception Not supported 5 2 3 Storage record Exception 5 2 3 a Event record number Exception Not supported 5 2 3 b Time and date Comply 5 2 3 c User identification Comply 5 2 3 d Event type Comply 5 2 4 Audit trail event types Exception 8 8 L PRO User Manual 2100 D02333R05 00 8 Cyber Security 5 2 4 a Log in Comply 5 2 4 b Manual log out Comply 5 2 4 c Timed log out Comply 5 2 4 d Value forcing Comply 5 2 4 e
321. y Line Impedance 100 of line 5 9 Q Positive Sequence Line Angle 80 e 21P1 4 72 Q Maximum Reach 80 of line at maximum torque angle of 80 Time Delay 0 expect 1 3 cycles 22 ms or less Delta Current Supervision 7 0 A minimum phasor difference between any 2 phases to allow 21P Trip 21P Zab 50 lab Directional Element 133 P Zone 21P Zbc ALN 50 Ibc 134 136 0 TP Directional Element 60 9 137 m Out 1 4ms 4ms p it i 21P Zca a Generic Phase Distance 50 Ica 135 Logic any zone j Directional Element Figure 6 11 Phase Distance Logic 21P D02333R05 00 L PRO User Manual 2100 6 11 6 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide Preliminary Calculations Since this is a balanced 3 phase test there is no Zero Sequence Current so Z is calculated as Z V Phase I Phase The minimum 3 phase current required is Remember I Delta is the phasor difference between any 2 phase currents add 5 to ensure the Minimum I Delta Supervision Logic is high for this test _ IDeltaSupervision x 05percent_ 7 0 x 1 05 3 4 3 Imin 4 24amps 21P1 Test Procedure 1 In Terminal Mode access relay Metering gt Logic gt Protection gt Logic Monitor 21P1 Trip 2 Apply balanced 3 phase nominal voltages 66 4 V to the L PRO terminals Ph A 330 66 4 V Z0 Ph B 331 66 4 V Z 120 Ph C 332 66
322. yle program on your computer eliminating the need for specialized user interface software Any terminal program that fully supports VT 100 emulation and pro vides z modem file transfer services can be used The HyperTerminal pro gram which is included in some versions of Microsoft Windows and is also available separately as HyperTerminal PE 1s used here as an example Configure your terminal program as described in the table below and link it to the appropriate serial port modem or TCP IP socket on your computer Terminal Program Setup Baud rate For a direct serial link the baud rate must match that of the relay serial port For a modem link the baud rate refers only to the link between your computer and its own modem Refer to Setting the Baud Rate on page 2 7 for further information Data bits 8 Parity None Stop bits 1 Flow control Hardware or Software Hardware flow control is recommended The relay automatically sup ports both on all its serial ports Function arrow Terminal keys and control keys Emulation VT100 D02333R05 00 L PRO User Manual 2100 2 5 2 Setup and Communications Ending a User Interface Session 2 6 Terminal Program Setup Use a font that supports line drawing e g Terminal or MS Line Draw If the menu appears outlined in odd characters the font you have selected is not supporting line drawing characters To initiate the connection with t

L-PRO User Manual 4.0 Rev 4.book

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents